HomeMy WebLinkAboutLedcor Construction Inc; 2010-05-13; PWS10-31UTIL Part 4 of 5SECTION 07311
ASPHALT SHINGLES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Product Supplied Under this Section.
1. Asphalt Shingles
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Roof framing and purlins.
B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing.
C. Section 07212 - Board and Batt Insulation
D. Section 07411 - Roofing and Siding .
E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Field-installed sealants.
F. Section 09900 - Paints and Coating
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
0. D 224 Standard Specification for Smooth-Surfaced Asphalt Roll Roofing (Organic
Felt).
1. D 226 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing
and Waterproofing.
2. D 3018 Standard Specification for Class A Asphalt Shingles Surfaced with Mineral
Granules.
3. D 3161 Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Asphalt Shingles.
4. D 3462 Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles from Glass Felt and Surfaced
with Mineral Granules.
5. D4869 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Shingle
Underlayment Used in Roofing
6. D 3909 Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass Mat) Surfaced with Mineral Granules.
7. E 108 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Indicate material characteristics
2. Performance criteria
3. General construction
4. Dimensions of individual components
5. Profiles
6. Fastening methods
7. Installation details.
C. Samples: Submit 2 samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish
texture/pattern, for color selection.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of (3) three years documented experience in similar sized
roofing installations.
B. Industry Standards:
7. Work of this section to conform to Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA)
Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual.
C. Regulatory Requirements
7. Fire Hazard Classification of Top Surface: UL Class A.
2. Conform to building code for minimum wind uplift resistance.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Asphalt Shingles
Specifications 07311-1
A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with Section 01600.
B. Packaging: Clearly mark manufacturer's name, style, type, and color of product and area of
roof surface covered by package. Include manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels
intact.
D. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. Do not
double stack. Do not store near sources of heat or in direct sunlight. Systematically rotate
stock so that the material that has been stored the longest will be used first.
E. Stand roll materials on end.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Proceed with shingle installation only when existing and forecasted weather will allow work to
be performed according to manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements, and
when deck is completely dry.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Submit a (30) thirty year written limited warranty signed or printed by manufacturer agreeing to
refund or replace, on a prorated basis that includes materials and application labor, asphalt
shingles that fail in materials or manufacturing workmanship within the specified warranty
period and (5) five year non-prorated Umbrella Coverage.
B. Submit a 5 year written limited warranty signed or printed by manufacturer agreeing to replace
or, if applicable, hand seal asphalt shingles that fail due to wind blow-offs for winds up to a
maximum of 90 miles per hour. All reasonable costs for labor and material will be covered
during this period without proration.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Elk Corporation of Texas, California Division, 6200 Zerker Road, Post Office Box 472, Shafler,
California 93263; 800-355-4968.
B. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Shingles:
1. Prestique High Definition by Elk Corporation
2. Fiberglass base, mineral granule-surfaced type, two-ply laminated.
3. ASTM D 3018, Class A with Type I self-sealing.
4. 13-1/4 inches by 38-3/4 inches.
5. Stain inhibitor: StainGuard
6. Color: Pewter Grey
7. Product meets requirements of ASTM D 3462.
8. Product meets criteria for AC127, ICBO #ER-5414.
B. Starter Strip (for application at eave and at rake edge): Elk Starter Strip.
C. Paint: Elk Roof Accessory Paint.
D. Underlayment: ASTM D 4869, Type [I] [II], non-perforated asphalt-saturated organic felts.
E. Mineral Surfaced Roll Roofing: ASTM D 3909; 90 pound mineral surfaced; granules to match
adjacent shingles.
F. Smooth Surfaced Roll Roofing: ASTM D 224; 50 pound smooth surfaced roll roofing.
G. Fasteners:
1. Nails: Galvanized 3/8 inch head, minimum 12 gage roofing nails. Minimum 3/4 inch
penetration in deck. 1-1/4 inch nail recommended for new construction and 1-1/2 inch
nail recommended for re-roofing. Nails should be long enough to sink into and hold in a
sound nailing base.
H. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type with mineral fiber components, as recommended for
sealing and coating flashings in buildings; free of toxic solvents; capable of setting within 24
hours at temperatures of approximately 75 degrees F and 50 percent RH.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Asphalt Shingles
Specifications 07311 - 2
I. Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphaltic type, as recommended for use as an adhesive in the
cold application of asphalt roofing or underlayment; free of toxic solvents.
J. Elastomeric Underlayment: Rubberized asphaltic sheet laminated to a polypropylene film
meeting the requirements of ASTM D 1970, 40 mil minimum total thickness, 36 inch width,
manufacturer approved by shingle manufacturer. Provide with appropriate primers as
recommended by manufacturer.
2.3 FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Metal Flashings: Galvanized steel, meeting ASTM A 525, G90 coating, hot dipped
galvanized, both sides flattened, chemically treated, 26 gage.
B. Provide sheet flashing for use in the following locations:
1. Valley flashing.
2. Drip edge.
3. Step flashing at masonry wall.
C. Penetration Flashings: Sheet lead, 4 Ib./s.f. minimum weight, with appropriate pipe diameter
for penetrations encountered.
D. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color.
E. Nails: Standard round wire roofing type of hot-dipped zinc-coated steel; minimum 19/64 inch
head diameter and 0.104 inch shank diameter; of sufficient length to penetrate through roof
sheathing.
F. Staples: Galvanized finish, of type and quality approved by Architect.
2.4 FLASHING FABRICATION
A. Form flashings to profiles indicated on Drawings and to protect roof assembly and shed water.
Form sections square, true, and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from
distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
B. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/4 inch on underside.
C. Apply bituminous paint on concealed surfaces of flashings if required to prevent electrolysis.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids.
B. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface.
C. Verify that roof openings are correctly framed.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cover knot holes with sheet metal.
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install asphalt shingle roofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions over dry
surfaces, free of ridges, warps, and voids. Install asphalt shingle roofing in accordance with
local codes if code requirements are more strict than manufacturer's requirements.
B. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof. Verify
roof openings are appropriately framed, sized, and located prior to installing work of this
Section.
C. Completed installation to provide weathertight service.
3.4 PROTECTIVE UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Completely cover deck with one ply of asphalt shingle underlayment. Succeeding courses
should overlap existing courses a minirnum of 2 inches. Continue laying underlayment
parallel to eaves. Begin by fastening a full 36 inch wide sheet along eaves. Make end laps
minimum 4 inches and space end laps in succeeding courses a minimum 6 feet apart. Lap
asphalt shingle underlayment 6 inches from both sides over hip and ridges, unless ridge vents
are required. Secure felt with only enough nails to hold in place.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Asphalt Shingles
Specifications 07311-3
B. Install protective underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof.
C. Weather lap underlayment minimum 4 inches over eaves membrane.
D. Weather lap and seal items projecting through or mounted on roof with plastic cement.
3.5 EAVES FLASHING
A. Starting from eave edge, lay 36 inch wide strip of smooth coated roll roofing over the
underlayment to produce a 1 ply membrane. Weather lap plies minimum 19 inches and nail in
place. Lap ends minimum 2 inches and cement horizontal joint. Stagger end joints of each
consecutive ply. Extend from the eave edge to a point at least 12 inches beyond the inside
wall and cement to underlayment.
B. Place a layer of elastomeric underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Extend from the eave edge to a point at least [12] [24] inches beyond the
inside wall. Begin application of shingle underlayment by overlapping the elastomeric material
a minimum of 2 inches.
3.6 METAL DRIP EDGES
A. Place metal drip edge tight with fascia boards at all rake and eave edges and extend 3 inches
back from roof edge bend downward over the fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches.
Fasten in place with nails spaced 8 to 10 inches apart.
B. At eaves, place drip edge directly onto deck below underlayment. At rakes, place drip edge
over underlayment.
3.7 VALLEY PROTECTION INSTALLATION
A. Valleys - Sheet Metal: Place 36 inch wide vertical underlayment. Place 1 layer of sheet metal
flashing over the underlayment, centered over open valley and crimped to guide water.
Weather lap joints 12 inches minimum and cement joints. Nail in place 18 inches on center
minimum, 1 inch from edges, no nails within 6 inches of centerline.
1. Open: Comply with ARMA recommendations. Install a second felt underlayment
shingle lapped at least 12 inches and sealed with plastic asphalt cement. Install a
metal valley shingle lapped at least 9 inches and sealed with plastic asphalt cement.
3.8 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Weather lap joints minimum 12 inches in weathertight manner. Secure in place with nails,
spaced at manufacturer's recommended intervals. Conceal fastenings.
B. Flash and seal work projecting through roofing with plastic cement. Provide weathertight
installation.
3.9 ASPHALT SHINGLES INSTALLATION
A. Place asphalt shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce a
double thickness over entire roof area. Do not use sealant dots for shingle alignment.
B. Extend shingles minimum 1/2 to 3/4 inch beyond face of rake edge fascia boards.
C. Nail shingles in place through double thickness area designated by fastener line, or between
and in line with sealant dots if no fastener line, and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions for slope and anticipated wind conditions.
D. Cap hips and ridges with RidgeCrest shingles, maintaining 5-5/8 inch weather exposure.
Place to avoid exposed nails.
3.10 FIELD PAINTING ROOF ACCESSORIES
A. Prepare metal surfaces in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations to leave
in proper condition to accept field applied coatings.
B. Field paint flues, vent stacks, eave flashings, drip edges, stepped flashings, valley flashings
using Elk Roof Accessory Paint in accordance with Section 09900.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Res ponders Training Facility Asphalt Shingles
Specifications 07311 - 4
SECTION 07411
ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
A. PREFORMED ROOF PANEL SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The location of the preformed roof panel systems are described in the constructions documents
and occur above the PD/FD Specialty Vehicle Parking, the Trash Enclosure and the entries to
Storefront Prop Rooms 135, 138 and 140.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fastening system.
B. Factory finishing.
C. Accessories and miscellaneous components.
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Roof framing and purlins.
B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing.
C. Section 07212 - Board and Batt Insulation
D. Section 07410 - Metal Wall Panels: Preformed wall panels.
E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Field-installed sealants.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated
by the Hot-Dip Process; 2006a.
B. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing; 2006.
C. UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; 2006.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Summary of test results, indicating compliance with specified requirements.
2. Storage and handling requirements arid recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
4. Specimen warranty.
C. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions,
spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions.
1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled.
D. Verification .Samples: For each roofing system specified, submit samples of minimum size 12
inches (305 mm) square, representing actual roofing metal, thickness, profile, color, and texture.
E. Test Reports: Indicate compliance of preformed metal roofing system to specified requirements.
F. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed
in Owner's name and are registered with manufacturer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing systems similar
to those required for this project, with not less than 5 years of experience.
1. Comply with current independent testingand certification as specified.
2. Manufacturer shall provide proof of liability insurance for their metal roof systems.
3. Roof panel manufacturer must also subscribe to Underwriter's Laboratories 'Folow Up
Service' assuring continuing product compliance with UL requirements.
4. Panel manufacturers without full supporting literature, Flashings & Details Guides, Guide
Specifications and Technical Support shall not be considered equal to the specified product.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company trained and authorized by roofing system manufacturer.
1. Successfully applied five (5) metal roofs of comparable size and complexity which reflects a
quality weathertight installation in the retgion where the work will be performed.
2. Have been in business for a minimum period of five (5) years in the region where the work
will be performed.
C. Comply with UBC and local Building Code requirements if more restrictive than those specified
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
Specifications 07411-1
herein.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide strippable plastic protection on prefinished roofing panels for removal after installation.
B. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to
panels prior to installation.
C. Panels to be shipped with a protective plastic sheeting or a strippable film coating between all
panels. Remove any strippable film coating prior to installation. Do not allow the strippable film
coating to remain on the panels in extreme heat, cold or in direct sunlight or other UV sources.
D. Shipment packaging of panels and attachment clips must bear UL classification markings.
E. Protect against damage and discoloration
F. Handle panels with non-marring slings.
G. Do not bend panels.
H. Store panels above ground, with one end elevated for drainage.
I. Protect panels against standing water and condensation between adjacent surfaces.
J. If panels become wet, immediately separate sheets, wipe dry with clean cloth, and allow to air dry.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's special warranty covering failure of factory-applied
exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence of
finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified
warranty period of 5 year period from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty for weathertightness of roofing system,
including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water within specified
warranty period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY
1. Warrant panels, flashings, sealants, fasteners and accessories against defective materials
and/or workmanship, to remain watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for two (2)
years following Project Substantial Completion date.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. AEP Span, A Division of ASC Profiles Inc, 2110 Enterprise Boulevard, West Sacramento, Calif
95691 800-733-4955
Fontana: 10905 Beech Avenue, Fontana, California 92337
Tacoma: 2141 Milwaukee Way, Tacoma, Washington 98421
B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PANEL DESIGNATION
A. Mini-V-Beam. Net coverage 32", rib depth 1-3/8" @ 4-9/16" o.c.
2.03 ARCHITECTURAL ROOF PANELS
A. Performance Requirements: Provide complete engineered system complying with specified
requirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movement of
substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system.
B. Metal Roofing: Factory-formed panels with exterior finish: DuraTech® mx metallic finish,
consisting of a baked-on primer (0.15-0.2 mil.) and a baked-on Polyvinylidine Fluoride finish coat
(0.7-0.8 mil.) with a specular gloss of 20-35% when tested in accordance with ASTM D-523-89 at
60°.
1. Texture: Smooth.
2. Length: Maximum possible length to minimize lapped joints. Where lapped joints are
unavoidable, space laps so that each sheet spans over three or more supports.
3. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 32 inches (812.8 mm).
2.04 PANEL FINISH
A. Acrylic Enamel Coating: Epoxy primer and acrylic enamel topcoat with minimum dry film
thickness of 0.8 mil (0.02 mm); color and gloss to match sample.
B. Manufacturer's Standard Color:
1. Cool Metallic Silver. Solar Reflectivity: 48.9; Emissivity: .88; Solar Reflective Index: 56.
2.05 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
Specifications 07411-2
strips, and caps of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items
completely concealed after installation may optionally be made of stainless steel.
B. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of steel with corrosion
resistant finish.
C. Sealants: As specified in Section 07900.
1. Exposed sealant must cure to rubber-like consistency.
2. Concealed sealant must be non-hardening type.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Panels: Fabricate and finish panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer's
standard processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements.
1. Fabricate panels in continuous one-piece lengths and fabricate flashings and accessores in
longest practical lengths.
2. Roofing panels shall be factory formed. Field formed panels are not acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates have been properly
prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other
adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks.
B. Remove protective film from surface of roof panels immediately prior to installation. Strip film
carefully, to avoid damage to prefinished surfaces.
C. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt
sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer.
D. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal joints
with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
E. Field Measurements
1. Verify prior to fabrication.
2. If field measurements differ from drawing dimensions, notify Architect/Engineer prior to
fabrication.
F. Protection
1. Treat, or isolate with protective material, and contacting surfaces of dissimilar materials to
prevent electrolytic corrosion.
2. Require workmen who will be walking on Roofing Panels to wear clean, soft-soled work
shoes that will not pick up stones or other abrasive material, which could cause damage or
discoloration.
3. Protect work of other trades against damage and discoloration.
G. Surface Preparation
1. Clean and dry surfaces prior to applying sealant.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions.
Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for structural
movement.
1. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods that
will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited.
2. Overlap roof panels at least 6 inches.
3. Install flashings to allow for thermal movement.
4. Remove strippable protective film, if used, immediately preceding flashing installation.
B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including flashings,
gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, caps, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar
roof accessory items.
C. Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, minimizing
transverse joints except at junction with penetrations.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
Specifications 07411-3
D. Panel Damage and Finish Scratches
1. Do not apply touch-up paint to damaged paint areas that involve minor scratches.
2. Panels or flashings that have severe paint and/or substrate damage shall be replaced as
directed by the Architect's or Owner's representative.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films,
excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and
unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary
walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until
completion of project.
END OF PREFORMED ROOF PANEL SYSTEM
B. EXTERIOR METAL BOX RIBBED WALL PANEL SYSTEM
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The location of the exterior metal box ribbed wall panel systems are described in the constructions
documents and extend from the concrete sill on the first floor to the top of the parapet between
vertical grid lines 1 and 3 and horizontal grid lines F and G and L and N.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manufactured metal panels for walls and soffits, with insulation, liners, related flashings, and
accessory components necessary to form the exterior metal wall panel system as shown on the
contract drawings and/or specified herein.
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05400 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Water-resistive barrier under wall panels.
B. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wall panel substrate.
C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Water-resistive barrier under wall panels.
D. Section 07212 - Board and Batt Insulation.
E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
F. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Wall panel substrate.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007.
B. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated
by the Hot-Dip Process; 2006a.
C. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007.
D. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2007.
E. ASTM C 236 Standard Specification for Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building
Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box.
F. ASTM E 283 Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
G. ASTM E 331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Single-skin concealed fastener metal wall panel applied as the exterior component of an insulated
wall system. This system must include an air and water resistant barrier located on the outboard
side of the wall supports, that is designed and provided by a subcontractor/supplier other than the
metal wall panel manufacturer. The air and water resistant barrier will provide the air and water
infiltration performance.
1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: 1/90 of span.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
Specifications 07411-4
B. Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to components or
deterioration of seals, movement within system; movement between system and perimeter
components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release of
loads; and deflection of structural support framing.
C. There shall be no uncontrolled water penetration to the building interior when the wall panel
system is tested per ASTM E 331 at a positive pressure differential of 6.24 psf or 20% of the
design wind pressure whichever is greater. The test pressure need not exceed 12 psf.
D. Drainage: Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensation occurring
within panel system.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout, joints, construction details, methods of anchorage.
C. Panels: One (1) of each type, full panel width by 12 inches long.
1. Fasteners: Two (2) of each type with statement of intended use.
2. Closures: One (1) of each type metal closure and foam closure as required.
3. Sealants: One (1) sample of each type with statement of intended use.
4. Clips: Two (2) of each type.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum ten (10) years of documented experience.
1. Manufacturer shall provide a list of five (5) similar completed projects with addresses of the
project location, architect, and owner.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum ten (10) years of experience.
1. The wall systems contractor shall provide a list of five (5) similar completed projects with
addresses of the project location, architect, and owner.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap.
B. Store prefinished material off ground and protected from weather. Prevent twisting, bending, or
abrasion, and provide ventilation to stored materials. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective work within a two (2) years period after Substantial Completion for degradation
of panel finish, including color fading caused by exposure to weather.
C. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Substantial Completion, including defects in
water tightness and integrity of seals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Centria: www.centria.com. 1005 Beaver Grade Road, Moon Township, PA 15108
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements.
a. No substitution will be considered unless, written request for approval has been
received by the specifying architect at least ten (10) days prior to the bid date. Request
shall include evidence submitted to demonstrate equivalency to the products and
performance levels specified.
1) A complete description of the substitution including details referenced to the wall
conditions shown on the contract drawings.
(a) Independent test reports verifying compliance with specified performance
requirements.
2) Calculations certified by a professional engineer, registered in the state where the
project is located, verifying that the proposed substitution meets the specified
loading requirements.
3) A detailed listing of each specification item with which the substitution does not
fully comply.
b. The manufacturer or wall systems contractor proposing the substitute shall pay the
costs of any other subcontractor affected by the proposed substitute.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
Specifications 07411-5
2.02 MANUFACTURED METAL PANELS
A. Wall Panel System: Preformed and prefinished metal panel system of Concept Series Metal
Wall Panel # CS-660 horizontal profile; site assembled; with subgirt framing assembly.
B. Exterior Panel:
1. Minimum 22 gage (0.8 mm) thick precoated steel sheet.
2. Profile as indicated.
3. 16 inches (406.4 mm) wide panels.
4. Interlocking edges, fitted with continuous gaskets.
5. Color: Platinum.
6. Surface Finish: Smooth - Standard
7. Coating: JF
C. Panels shall be nominal 7/8-inches in depth with 16 inches of coverage width.
D. Panels shall have identical interlocking side joints to accommodate multiple panel profile
integration. Panel side joints shall have a factory-applied sealant.
E. Horizontal panels shall be fastened to the wall girts with minimum 16 gage concealed clips and
fasteners to allow for unimpeded thermal movement of the wall system. Clips shall be designed to
hold panel Vz minimum from exterior sheathing to create a drain plane & ventilation cavity. Load
span tables must include evaluation of clip and side joint interaction. Exposed fastened panels are
unacceptable.
F. Panels shall be factory fabricated by roll-forming operations to assure consistency and quality of
manufacture. Panels fabricated by press brake or folding machine are unacceptable.
G. Metal panels shall be fabricated from zinc coated steel conforming to ASTM A 653 SS Grade 37,
G90 coating.
H. Subgirts:
1. Profile as indicated; to attach panel system to building.
I. Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets;
Microseam Corners profile to suit system; shop cut and factory mitered to required angles.
Mitered internal corners to be back braced with 22 gage (0.8 mm thick) precoated sheet stock to
maintain continuity of profile.
J. Mitered corner assemblies shall match specified exterior profile panel in shape, general
appearance, material, and finish.
1. Mitered corner assemblies shall be notched, bent, and structurally bonded by the panel
manufacturer. Field fabrication or fabrication by other than the panel manufacturer is not
acceptable.
2. Mitered corner assemblies shall be factory coil coated to match adjacent panels. Paint
finish shall meet specified warranty requirements.
K. Expansion Joints: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; 22 gage (0.8 mm
thick); manufacturer's standard brake formed type, of profile to suit system.
L. Trim: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles.
M. Anchors: Galvanized steel.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Exterior Finish Coating: Panel manufacturer's standard polyvinylidene fluoride (PVF) top coat,
over epoxy primer.
B. Panel Back Coating: Panel manufacturer's standard polyester wash coat.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with system, permanently resilient;
ultraviolet and ozone resistant.
B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application; with soft neoprene washers, steel,
hot dip galvanized. Fastener cap same color as exterior panel.
1. Wall panel system fasteners shall be #14 minimum diameter, self-tapping, with hex head.
a. Concealed fasteners shall be cadmium plated carbon steel or 300 series stainless steel
with 5/8" bonded neoprene and galvanized or stainless steel washers.
b. Exposed fasteners shall be 300 series stainless steel with 5/8" bonded neoprene and
stainless steel washers coated to match the exterior panel color.
C. Sealants
1. Hidden sealant at all side laps, end laps, and flashing details shall be gun grade non-curing
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
Specifications 07411-6
butyl or polymeric non-skinning butyl tape to ensure weather tightness.
2. Exposed sealant shall be one-part moisture curing, gun grade polyurethane.
3.01 PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Concealed fasteners shall be cadmium plated carbon steel or 300 series stainless steel with 5/8"
bonded neoprene and galvanized or stainless steel washers.
B. Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panels.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Field Touch-up Paint: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
B. Bituminous Paint: Asphalt base.
3.03 FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B. Form pieces in longest practicable lengths.
C. Fabricate corners in one continuous piece with minimum 18 inch (450 mm) returns.
D. Verify that water-resistive barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly.
3.04 PREPARATION
A. Install subgirts perpendicular to panel length, securely fastened to substrates and shimmed and
leveled to uniform plane. Space at intervals indicated.
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Install panels on walls and soffits in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Protect surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous
paint. Allow to dry prior to installation.
C. Fasten panels to structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb.
D. Locate joints over supports. Lap panel ends minimum 2 inches (50 mm).
E. Provide expansion joints where indicated.
F. Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect.
G. Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance.
H. Metal filings caused by cutting and drilling shall be immediately removed from finished surfaces to
prevent rusting and staining.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16 inch
(1.6mm).
B. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces.
B. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water.
3.08 DAMAGE MATERIAL
A. Damage caused by the manufacturer or wall panel systems contractor shall be repaired or
replaced.
B. The general contractor shall inspect and approve each completed wall area and be responsible
for protecting finished work from damage by other trades.
C. The wall panel systems contractor shall remove all protective materials and labels from the wall
components as they are installed.
D. The general contractor shall be responsible for final cleaning of the wall panel system due to any
conditions that occur after the wall panel systems contractor has completed an area. Cleaning is
to be done in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
END OF EXTERIOR METAL BOX RIBBED WALL PANEL SYSTEM
C. ZINC METAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The location of the zinc metal wall panel systems are described in the constructions documents
and extend from the concrete sill on the first floor to the top of the parapet between vertical grid
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
Specifications 07411-7
lines 4 and 6 and horizontal grid lines A and D.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein
affecting the work of this Section.
C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Custom fabricated, mechanically attached, pre-weathered zinc alloy flat lock wall panels as
indicated on the Drawings, with all required accessories for a weatherproof installation.
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05400 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Water-resistive barrier under wall panels.
B. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wall panel substrate.
C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Water-resistive barrier under wall panels.
D. Section 07212 - Board and Batt Insulation.
E. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
F. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Rheinzink Application in Architecture, 2nd Updated Edition, January 2002
B. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 5th Edition; Chapter 6 as a minimum standard or
these specification and details where they exceed.
C. All applicable building codes or other authorities having jurisdiction over the City of Carlsbad.
D. As all documents are intended to be complementary, in the event of contradiction in the
references, the RHEINZINK January 2002 reference will govern.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data for zinc wall or roof panels including manufacturer's product specifications,
standard details, installation instructions, and general recommendations,
B. Verification Samples: submit representative plywood-mounted samples of each material that is
to be exposed in the finished work, showing horizontal and vertical seams at abutting panels,
attachment methods, colors, and finish variations. Provide samples having minimum size of 24"
square.
C. Shop Drawings: show layouts of panels on all wall elevations, details of edge conditions, joints,
corners, panel profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details.
Distinguish between factory and field assembly work. Details shall be drawn full scale.
1. Details for forming sheet metal components, including seams and dimensions.
2. Details for joining and securing sheet metal components, including layout, number of
required fasteners, clips and other attachments. Include pattern of seams and spacing
of fasteners.
3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
4. Details of expansion joints, including direction of expansion and contraction.
5. Details of window and door penetrations.
6. Details of edge conditions, sills, parapets and counter flashings.
7. Details of special conditions, integrating mechanical, electrical and plumbing conditions.
8. Details of connections to adjoining work
9. Details of the following accessory items, at a scale of not less than 1 Y2 inches per 12
inches:
a. Flashing and Trim
b. Roof access equipment including fall protection attachments
D. Calculations: Provide positive and negative wind load pressure calculations and certification of
the performance of this work prepared and sealed by a locally licensed Professional Structural
Engineer. Show how design load requirements and other performance criteria have been
satisfied.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
Specifications 07411-8
E. Certification from the fabricator and installer, certifying that the installed systems meet the
specified performance requirements and those of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: The fabricator and installer of the material or equipment
described in this Section must, within the last 5 consecutive years, have successfully
completed in a timely fashion at least 5 projects similar in scope and type to the required
work for this Section.
B. Source: Provide panels which are the product of one manufacturer. Provide secondary
materials which are acceptable to the zinc manufacturer. Award installation of zinc wall or roof
panels, including underlayment and leveling substructure to a single firm for undivided
responsibility.
C. Industry Standard: Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with applicable
recommendations and details of the RHEINZINK Applications in Architecture Manual. Conform
to dimensions and profiles shown.
D. Field Measurements: Prior to fabrication of panel systems, take field measurements of structure
or substrates to receive panel systems.
E. Pre-lnstallation Conference: Prior to commencement of work, convene an installation
conference to include the Architect, General Contractor and Zinc Panel Installer in order to
establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with
related and adjacent work.
1. Review methods and procedures for installation including, but not limited to: substrates,
penetrations and other preparatory work
2. Review drawings, specifications and other contract documents
3. Review submittals
4. Review construction schedule verifying availability of all materials, personnel and
equipment needed to proceed and avoid delays
5. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with
unfavorable conditions, including temporary weatherproofing.
F. Mock-Up: Mock-up of exterior wall including metal panels is required. Incorporate materials
and methods of fabrication and installation identical with project requirements. Install mock-up
at facade location directed by Architect. Retain accepted mock-up as quality standard for
acceptance of completed metal panel installation. If accepted, mock-up may be incorporated as
part of metal panel work.
1. Provide mock-up of sufficient size and scope to show typical pattern of joints, panel
width, edge construction, a sample of soldering (where required) and finish texture and
color.
2. Obtain Architect's written approval of mock-ups prior to proceeding with installation of
mock-up.
G. Soldering: In accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
H. Corrosion Control: Avoid direct contact of incompatible materials.
1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design wall assembly to conform to the requirements of the 2006 International Building Code and
2007 California Building Code.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
Specifications 07411-9
B. Wind Load: Design and engineer sheet metal wall assemblies, including size and spacing of
attachment devices, meeting requirements of local building codes.
C. Thermal Movement: Provide systems and connections which allow for thermal movement
resulting from ambient temperature range of 120 ° F.
D. Structural Performance: Provide metal panels, anchors and attachments which resist loads
required by code and loads as indicated on the Structural Drawings without permanent deflection
or permanent deformation. Information on Drawings referring to specific design of attachment,
panel stiffening, and structural systems is intended for information only. System performance,
based on project conditions and compliance with all applicable codes and loading requirements,
shall be the responsibility of the panel fabricator and installer.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials and products in unopened factory labeled packages. Protect from all possible
damage. All zinc to be transported according to manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
1. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weather
tight ventilated covering. Slope cover to shed moisture. Allow for free air flow around
covered material to exchange outside air.
2. Require all personnel to wear clean white cotton gloves when handling and installing zinc
panels and accessories.
3. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or
other surface damage.
4. Store metal wall panels so that they will not accumulate water.
C. Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting panels to prevent bending, warping, or surface
damage.
D. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Submit 2-part, 5-year, written, signed and sealed warranty:
1. By the zinc manufacturer for zinc material defects
2. By the manufacturers of other components of the wall assembly for their material
defects.
3. By the installer agreeing to repair or replace systems or components as a result of
workmanship defects.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
metal wall panel materials that may be incorporated in the work include:
1. Rheinzink America, Inc.
B. Zinc Alloy Sheet/Coils:
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
Specifications 07411-10
1. Titanium Zinc Alloy whose base is electrolytic high grade fine zinc (DIN EN1179) with a
99.995 % Zn degree of purity and alloying additives of 1% copper and 1% titanium in
accordance with DIN EN 988.
a. Bright and Shiny
b. Pre-Weathered: pickling process (no phosphate)
1. Color: Graphite Gray
2. Minimum Panel Thickness: 0.8 mm
3. Minimum Flashing Thickness: 0.7 mm
4. Provide custom copings and related sheet metal work fabricated from zinc, copper and
titanium alloy sheet by Rheinzink America, Inc.
2.02 FRAMING
A. Design, engineer, and provide complete assembly of framing components, studs, grits, hat
channels and the like. All framing members and components shall be fabricated from ASTM
A525 G90 galvanized sheet steel. Provide all primary and secondary framing members not
indicated on the structural drawings.
B. Coordinate panel support with cold-formed metal framing, plywood sheathing, exterior gypsum
sheathing and furring, for complete structural support for performances indicated. Refer to
Section for related requirements.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide all components necessary for a complete, functional, weatherproof assembly including,
but not limited to, trims, copings, fascias, sills, flashings, counter flashings, door frame trim,
corner units, clips, wall caps, copings, sealants, closures and fillers. Metal materials shall match
panels and be zinc compatible.
B. Clips & Fasteners: Provide stainless steel or zinc, corrosion free; supplied in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and to meet the load requirements as specified by Engineer
and maintain a weather-tight installation. Attachment clips shall permit expansion and contraction
of the panel system throughout the specified temperature range. Provide fasteners with
watertight washer gaskets.
C. Solder: Lead-tin solder containing 40% tin and 60% lead to DIN 1707 termed L-Pb Sn 40 (Sb)
[antimony content less than 0.5 wt.%]. Flux: Felder ZD-Pro or equal.
D. Ventilation Mat: Provide manufacturer's approved nylon non-woven ventilation mat equal to
Enkamat 7010 or 7008, by Colbond.
E. Non-Permeable Underlayment and Ice Dam Protection: self-adhering, high-temperature
composite, butyl rubber-based, polyethylene-backed membrane such as Vycor Ultra or equal.
F. Permeable Underlayment: Permeable breather type underlayment membrane: Roof shield
(Vaproshield) as manufactured by A Proctor Group
G. Sealants:
1. Seam Sealing Tape: pressure-sensitive 100 per cent solids polyisobutylene compound
sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sag,
non-toxic non-staining tape.
2. Joint Sealant: DOW 795; backer rod shall be extruded polyethylene foam as DOW
ETHAFOAM SB or equal.
2.04 PANEL FABRICATION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
Specifications 07411-11
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal panels to comply with details shown and
recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and RHEINZINK
"Applications in Architecture" that apply to the design, dimensions , geometry, metal thickness,
and other characteristics of installation indicated. Fabricate sheet metal roofing and
accessories at the shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Apply bituminous coating or other permanent separation materials on concealed panel
surfaces where panels would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials that
are non compatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or
finishes.
B. Fabricate sheet metal wall panels to allow for expansion in running work sufficient to prevent
buckling, damage, and deterioration of the Work. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit over
substructure without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels
indicated.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot
be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled
with non-acidic sealant (concealed within joints).
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non expansion-type joints are indicated or required to produce
weather tight seams, form metal to provide for proper installation of electrometric sealant in
compliance with SMACNA standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall inspect all surfaces, areas and other contingent construction in or to which his
work is to be installed and insure himself that they are in proper condition to receive the work to
be performed under this Section.
B. Verify that sheathing surfaces are sound, dry, properly secured and that provision has been
made for flashings, anchorage, and all other interface items attaching to or penetrating through
the Work of this Section.
C. The Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing, before any work is installed, of any condition
requiring correction. Failure to make such a report shall be construed as acceptance of the
existing conditions and the responsibility to provide an acceptable installation.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Verify field dimensions before fabrication. Notify Architect of any discrepancies between field
measurements and dimensions indicated in Construction Documents.
B. Place membrane [and venting mat] on substrate surfaces to receive metal panels; comply with
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Coordinate metal panel installation with roofing and rain drainage work, flashing, trim and
construction of parapets, and other adjoining work to provide a weatherproof, secure and
non-corrosive installation.
2. For end and side laps, see manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Where breather-type permeable membrane is specified, adhere to manufacturer's instructions
and apply sealant to backside of clips to exclude water at fastener locations.
3.03 INSTALLATION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
Specifications 07411-12
A. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with
recommendations and instructions of manufacturer of sheet metal being fabricated and installed.
1. Do not install in inclement weather
2. Do not install over a damp substrate
3. Do not install when inclement weather is threatening.
4. If covering of zinc panels is required, provide free air flow around the zinc material to
manufacturer's requirement to prevent white rust.
B. Install work to be truly straight and square or conform to curvilinear geometry indicated on
drawings.
1. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate.
2. Form exposed faces free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks
considering temper and reflectivity of metal.
3. Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of % inch in 20' -0"
4. All seams shall be of uniform appearance and dimensions, straight and level with
minimum exposure of solder and sealant.
5. Except as otherwise shown, fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of
exposed edges.
6. Form all seams to be weatherproof, leaving room for expansion and contraction with
specified and required tolerances.
7. Comply with RHEINZINK "Applications in Architecture" 2nd Edition and SMACNA
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for flashings and sheet metal work.
C. Conceal fasteners and expansion provision where possible in exposed work, and locate so as to
minimize possibility of leakage.
D. Provide work as indicated on approved shop drawings
1. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, edge treatments, integral flashings, and
other components of metal panels to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements
shown and as required for rainproof construction.
E. Separate non-compatible materials with a rubberized asphalt underlayment.
F. Install work to meet specified performance requirements.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove protective film (if any) from exposed surfaces of metal panels promptly upon installation
and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and with care to avoid damage to
finish.
B. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that would interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering and as recommended by panel manufacturer and maintain in a clean condition during
construction.
C. Ensure that cleaning by other trades working in proximity to zinc installation is in accordance with
the recommendations of the zinc manufacturer.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
Specifications 07411-13
D. Damaged units: Replace panels and other components of the work that have been damaged or
have deteriorated beyond successful repair by means of finish touch-up or similar minor repair.
3.05 CLEAN-UP
A. During the progress of the work, keep premises clear of debris resulting from this operation and
remove surplus and waste materials from the site as soon as possible.
B. Upon completion of the work, Contractor shall remove from the site all equipment and materials
used on the work as well as any debris resulting from the operations.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS
Specifications 07411-14
SECTION 07420
PLASTIC WALL PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Solid phenolic for Single-skin panels and Sandwich panels for:
1. Wall cladding system and Fascias panel application.
B. Related Sections: Section(s) related to this section include:
1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wall panel substrate.
2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Water-resistive barrier under wall panels.
3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM D792 Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of
Plastics by Displacement.
2. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Provide panels that have been manufactured, fabricated and
installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or
failure.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout, joints, construction details, methods of anchorage.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of wall panel at 12 inch (304.8 mm) by 12 inch (304.8 mm) in size
illustrating finish color, sheen, and texture.
D. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's SPEC-DATA™ product sheet, for
specified products.
E. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
2. Certificates:
a. Qualification Certificates: Submit certificate indicating compliance with qualification
requirements in Quality Assurance article.
b. Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified
performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
c. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions.
F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer producing product in ISO 9001 certified facility,
capable of providing field service representation during fabrication and approving application
method,
a. Obtain from a single manufacturer.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PLASTIC WALL PANELS
Specifications 07420 -1
2. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be approved by the manufacturer and
experienced in performing work of similar type and scope.
B. Preinstallation Meetings: Conduct preinstallation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate
conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
Comply with Division 1 Project Management and Coordination (Project Meetings) Section.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections.
B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid
construction delays.
C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions,
at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before
fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements
and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty
document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and
not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOLID PHENOLIC WALL PANELS
A. Manufacturer: Trespa North America.
1. Contact: Trespa North America, 12267 Crosthwaite Circle, Poway, CA 92064; Telephone:
(800) 487-3772, (858) 679-2090; Fax: (858) 679-0440; E-mail: ; Web site: .
B. Products:
1. Trespa Meteon
a. Colors. 07420.A - Trespa Meteon Uni - A 05.0.0 Pure White on one side with
standard white color on other side.
1) Panel Standard Sizes: 5 feet * 2 feet (1.8288 m x .6096 m).
2) Panel Corner Profile: 3 feet x 2 feet (.9144 m x .6096 m).
3) Finish: Satin sheen.
4) Panel Thickness. 3/8 inch (10 mm).
5) Corner Profile Thickness: 3/8 inch (10 mm).
6) Assembly: TS210 System (Concealed)
2. Trespa Athlon
a. Colors: 07420.B - Trespa Athlon Polar - E 2-01 Pearl White on one side with
standard white color on other side.
1) Panel Standard Sizes: 5 feet x 2 feet (1.8288 m x .6096 m).
2) Panel Corner Profile: 3 feet x 2 feet (.9144 m x .6096 m).
3) Finish: Satin sheen.
4) Panel Thickness: 3/8 inch (10 mm).
5) Assembly: TS210 System (Concealed)
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PLASTIC WALL PANELS
Specifications 07420 - 2
3. Trespa Athlon
a. Colors: 07420.C - Trespa Athlon Construction - E 25-013 Ash Gray on one side
with standard white color on other side.
1) Panel Standard Sizes: 5 feet x 2 feet (1.8288 m x .6096 m).
2) Panel Corner Profile: 3 feet x 2 feet (.9144m x .6096 m).
3) Finish: Satin sheen.
4) Panel Thickness: 3/8 inch (10 mm).
5) Assembly: TS210 System (Concealed)
4. Trespa Athlon
a. Colors: 07420.D - Trespa Athlon Construction - E 25-03 Zinc Gray on one side
with standard white color on other side.
1) Panel Standard Sizes: 5 feet x 2 feet (1.8288 m x .6096 m).
2) Panel Corner Profile: 3 feet x 2 feet (.9144 m x .6096 m).
3) Finish: Satin sheen.
4) Panel Thickness: 3/8 inch (10 mm).
5) Assembly: TS210 System (Concealed)
5. All Trespa panels to have the following:
a. Material: Solid phenolic panel.
b. Panel/Partition Core: Standard black core.
c. Modulus of Elasticity: 1,200,000 psi (8000 N/mm2) minimum per DIN 53457.
d. Tensile Strength: 13,000 psi (90 N/mm2) per DIN 53455.
e. Flexural Strength: 16,000 psi (110 N/mm2) minimum per DIN 53452.
f. Surface Impact Resistance: 9 Ibf (40 N) index minimum per EN 438-2 (11).
g. Scratch Resistance: 0.79 Ibf (3.5 N) index minimum per EN 438-2 (14).
h. Fire Performance: Maximum flamespread index of 5 per ASTM E84 Type I.
i. Smoke Development Index: 5.
j. Water Absorption: Less than 1.0% per EN 438-2 (7).
k. Porosity: Nonporous surface and edges.
I. Microbial Characteristics: Will not support microorganic growth.
m. Cleanability: Resists dirt pickup. Easily cleaned.
n. Color Stability: 4-5 grey scale per ISO 105 A02-87 (3000 hr xenon lamp test).
o. Secondary Framing: Aluminum subframing.
2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate solid phenolic wall panels and accessory items in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and approved submittals.
B. Fabricate panels to profile indicated.
PARTS EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins,
product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed
under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Do not apply materials; when surface and ambient temperatures are outside
the temperature ranges required by the product manufacturer.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PLASTIC WALL PANELS
Specifications 07420 - 3
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Do not apply wall panel during rain or snow condition outside the ranges required by the product
manufacturer.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Install solid phenolic wall panels plumb and level and accurately spaced in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and approved submittals.
B. Fasten solid phenolic wall panels to supporting substrate with fasteners for use with adjoining
construction.
C. Accessory Items: Install corner profiles, gaskets and trim with fasteners for use with adjoining
construction as indicated on drawings and as recommended by manufacturer.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace
damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions prior to Owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally
dispose of debris.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PLASTIC WALL PANELS
Specifications 07420 - 4
SECTION 07480
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Work Included - Furnish and install pre-finished wood siding and materials where shown on the
drawings or as specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to:
A. Exterior Pre-Finished wood siding used as interior ceiling systems in the Residential and
Commercial Burn Prop Buildings. Refer to plans for locations.
B. Exterior Pre-Finished perforated wood soffits. Refer to plans for locations.
C. Exterior Pre-Finished wood trim and battens
D. All associated metal framing, attachments, and materials necessary to provide a complete
installation in accordance with manufacturer's recommended practices.
1.02 Related Work Described Elsewhere
A. Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing
B. Section 06200 Finish Carpentry
C. Section 09900 Paints and Coating
1.03 References
A. National Evaluation Report No. NER 405
B. City of Los Angeles, Research Report No. 24862
C. California DSAPA-019
D. Non-asbestos fiber cement siding in accordance with ASTM E136
E. US Department of Housing and Urban Development Release #1263d
1.04 Quality Assurance
A. Installer - Work to be performed only by workers thoroughly skilled and specially trained
in the installation of fiber cement siding and who are familiar with the published
recommendations of the manufacturer for the product being used.
1.05 Submittals
A. Product Data - Submit material specifications, manufacturer's installation data, color samples
and other pertinent manufacturer's literature.
B. Shop drawings to include at a minimum all elements listed below and as addressed in this
Specification Section:
1. Floor Plans depicting all locations of installation and type used.
2. Typical attachment details, metal stud framing and attachment structure.
3. Plans showing panel layout of seams, joints, battens and trim pieces.
1.05 Product Handling
A. Protection
1. Material to be stored at the job site in a safe, dry place with all labels intact and
legible at time of installation.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fiber Cement Siding
Specifications 07480-1
2. Use all means to protect material before, during, and after installation. Do not
allow products to become wet or damp.
3. Stack materials on edge or lay flat on smooth, level surface
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, including water intrusion, replace all affected
product at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.06 Warranty -
A. Provide limited product warranty against manufacturing defects:
1. Siding material: Fifty (50) Years.
2. Finish: Fifteen (15) Years.
2. Trim and accessories: Ten (10) Years.
B. Workmanship: Application for limited warranty for two (2) Years.
PART 2PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to the compliance with requirements. Manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the
following:
1. James Hardie® Building Products. 26300 La Alameda, Suite 250 Mission Viejo,
CA 92691 (888) 542-7343 http\\www.jameshardie.com.
2. Approved Equivalent.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Exterior Pre-Finished Siding: Basis of Design, James Hardie® HardiePanel™.
1. Panel Size: 4'x 8'
2. Thickness: 5/16"
3. Weight: 2.3 Ibs/sq. ft.
4. Wall Panel Texture: Smooth
5. Pre-Primed with PrimePlus® sealer and primer.
6. Color: To be selected for ColorPlus® Collection of colors
B. Exterior Pre-Finished Soffit Panels: Basis of Design, James Hardie® Hardisoffit™ Vented
Soffit Panels.
1. Thickness: %"
2. Weight: 1.9 Ibs/sq. ft.
3. Soffit Panel Texture: Smooth
4. Pre-Primed with PrimePlus® sealer and primer.
5. Color: To be selected for ColorPlus® Collection of colors
C. Exterior Pre-Finished Battens: Basis of Design, James Hardie® HardieTrim™ XLD Trim
Planks.
1. Thickness: %"
2. Weight: 3.9 Ibs/sq. ft.
3. Batten Panel Texture: Smooth
4. Pre-Primed with PrimePlus® sealer and primer.
5. Color: To be selected for ColorPlus® Collection of colors
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fiber Cement Siding
Specifications 07480-2
2.03 METAL FRAMING
A. Contractor provided and install typical metal framing support system for fiber cement panels
and soffits, including, but not limited to the following:
1. Standard framing members
2. Perimeter support channels and angles
3. Blocking
4. Seismic restraints
B. For metal framing of soffits and ceiling, refer to the drawings for location and the following
Specification Section.
1. Metal Framing: Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing
2.04 FASTENERS
C. Metal Framing:
1. Metal framing: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) No. 8-18 by 0.375 inch (9.5 mm) head self-
drilling, corrosion resistant S-12 ribbed buglehead screws.
2. Metal framing: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) No. 8-18 by 0.323 inch (8.2 mm) head self-
drilling, corrosion resistant S-12 ribbed buglehead screws.
3. Metal framing: 1 inch (25 mm) No. 8-18 by 0.323 inch (8.2 mm) head self-drilling,
corrosion resistant ribbed buglehead screws.
4. Metal framing: 1 inch (25 mm) No. 8-18 by 0.311 inch (7.9 mm) head self-drilling,
corrosion resistant S-12 ribbed buglehead screws.
5. Metal framing: 1.5 inch (38mm) [AGS-100] .100 inches by 25 inches (2540 mm by 635
mm) ET&F Pin or equivalent pneumatic fastener.
6. Concrete Walls: Erica Stud Nail, EET&F ASM No.-144-125, 0.14 inch (3.6 mm) shank
by 0.30 inch (7.6 mm) head by 2 inches (51 mm) corrosion resistant nail.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the exterior siding and soffit systems.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PANEL FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Minimum 20 gauge 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) C-Stud 16 inches maximum on center or 16 gauge 3-5/8
inches (92 mm) C-Stud 24 inches (610 mm) maximum on center metal framing complying with
local building codes, including the use of water-resistive barriers and/or vapor barriers where
required. Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) face and straight, true, of uniform dimensions and
properly aligned.
1. Install water-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces.
2. Repair any punctures or tears in the water-resistive barrier prior to the installation of the
siding.
3. Protect siding from other trades.
3.03 PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Block framing between studs where panel siding horizontal joints occur.
C. Place fasteners no closer than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from panel edges and 2 inches (51 mm) from
panel corners.
D. Allow minimum vertical clearance between the edge of siding and any other material in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
E. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fiber Cement Siding
Specifications 07480-3
F. Specific framing and fastener requirements refer to Tables 2 and 3 in National Evaluation
Service Report No. NER-405.
3.04 TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install flashing
around all wall openings.
B. Fasten through trim into structural framing or code complying sheathing. Fasteners must
penetrate minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) or full thickness of sheathing. Additional fasteners may be
required to ensure adequate security.
C. Place fasteners no closer than 3/4 inch (19 mm) and no further than 2 inches (51 mm) from side
edge of trim board and no closer than 1 inch (25 mm) from end. Fasten maximum 16 inches
(406 mm) on center.
D. Maintain clearance between trim and adjacent finished grade.
E. Trim inside corner with single board.
F. Outside Corner Board: For 1 inch (25 mm) and 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) trim only. Pre Build
corners by fastening trim together with 16 ga. corrosion resistant finish nail 1/2 inch (13 mm)
from edge spaced 16 inches (406 mm) apart, weather cut each end spaced minimum 12 inches
(305 mm) apart.
G. Allow 1/8 inch gap between trim and siding.
H. Seal gap with high quality, paint-able caulk.
I. Shim frieze board as required to align with corner trim.
J. Fasten through overlapping boards. Do not nail between lap joints.
K. Overlay siding with single board of outside corner board then align second corner board to
outside edge of first corner board. Do not fasten trim boards to trim boards.
L. Shim frieze board as required to align with corner trim.
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing
pre-finished wood systems. Do not install damaged components. Seal joints watertight.
B. Install siding over weather-resistive barrier, 40# building paper or equivalent, as shown on
drawings.
C. Provide and install all flashing and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and installation guidelines.
D. Install product with a minimum of 6" clearance to the finished grade at the exterior of the
building.
E. Maintain a %" clearance between product and horizontal flashing.
F. Install kick-out flashing at roof-wall junctions where occurs.
G. Position all fasteners 3/8" from panel edges and no closer that 2" away from corners. Do not nail
into corners.
H. Caulk all perimeter and field joints. For caulking, use a latex sealant that complies with either
ASTM C834 or ASTM C920. Caulking to be applied in accordance with caulking manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Repair or remove and replace Work that does not meet requirements or that is damaged;
replace to conform to specified requirements.
3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Upon installation of horizontal framing members, adjust framing to ensure flat, level surface
prior to installation of fiber cement products.
B. Inspect all surfaces upon complete installation to ensure smooth uninterrupted finish.
C. Remove excess sealant and dirt from surfaces
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
the Installer, that ensures the exterior siding systems are without damage or deterioration at the
time of Substantial Completion.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fiber Cement Siding
Specifications 07480-4
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fiber Cement Siding
Specifications 07480-5
SECTION 07510
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Three plies cold applied built-up roofing system with granule cap sheet.
1. Energy Star Certified and State of California Title 24 CRRC approved roofing system
B. Walkway protection pads
C. Roofing Insulation
D. Roofing Cover Board
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C 165 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal
Insulations
B. ASTM C 208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 1995 (Reapproved
2001).
C. ASTM C 209 - Standard Test Methods for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board
D. ASTM D 41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and
Waterproofing; 2005.
E. ASTM D 228 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling, Testing, and Analysis of Asphalt Roll
Roofing, Cap Sheets, and Shingles Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
F. ASTM D 276 - Standard Test Methods for Identification of Fibers in Textiles
G. ASTM D 1475 - Standard Test Method for Density of Liquid Coatings, Inks, and Related Products
H. ASTM D 2196 - Standard Test Methods for Theological Properties of Non-Newtonian Materials by
Rotational (Brookfield type) Viscometer
I. ASTM D 2523 - Standard Practice for Testing Load-Strain Properties of Roofing Membranes
J. ASTM D 3960 - Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of
Paints and Related Coatings
K. ASTM D 4601 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in
Roofing; 2004.
L. ASTM D 5147 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet
Material
M. ASTM D 6163 - Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements
N. ASTM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
O. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
P. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
Q. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2007.
R. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors
Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.
S. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
T. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit product data for type of product indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with other
materials, and details for base flashings, cants, membrane terminations, crickets, saddles and
tapered edge strips including slopes.
D. Samples for Verification: Submit three samples 8x8 inches in size illustrating base and cap
sheets intended for use in the project.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Installer Certificate: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,
authorized or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.
G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
Specifications 07510-1
A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum 10 years of experience.
1. Has a U.L. listing and FMG approval for roofing system identical to that used for this Project.
2. Be Associate Member in good standing with National Roofing Contractors Association
(NRCA) for at least five (5) years.
3. Has not been in Chapter 11 bankruptcy during the last five (5) years.
4. Provide evidence of financial responsibility: Certificate of Insurance showing Products
Liability in the amount of $25 million minimum and provide affidavit signed by a corporate
officer showing corporate net worth of $50 million minimum.
5. Be ISO 9001 registered for the previous five (5) years.
6. Employ full-time Field Technical Services Representatives for daily job-site monitoring and
production of daily reports.
7. Require Field Representatives to make periodic job-site visits and produce work quality and
progress reports.
C. Manufacturer's Field Technical Services Representative Qualifications: An authorized full-time
employed representative of manufacturer experienced in the installation and maintenance of the
specified roofing system and qualified to determine Installer's compliance with the requirements
of this Project.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated.
E. Installer Qualifications: Installer specializing in installing cold applied built-up roofing systems
with minimum 10 years experience.
1. Be a Manufacturers Certified Contractor.
2. Not have been in Chapter 11 Bankruptcy during the last ten (10) years.
3. Acquire inspection service days utilizing manufacturer's technical inspectors.
a. The minimum number of full time Technical Service inspection days will be three (3)
days for a project of 200 squares or less.
b. The number of days will increase at a rate of one (1) day for each additional or partial
100 squares.
F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL,
FMG or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119
G. Wind Uplift Test: Minimum 90 Ibs sf according to UL 580
1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not
permit the passage of water and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement,
and exposure to weather without failure.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
condition of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
C. Roofing Membrane Load-Strain Properties:
1. Provide a roofing membrane identical to component systems that have been successfully
tested by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to meet the following
minimum load-strain properties at membrane failure when tested in accordance with ASTM
D 2523:
a. Tensile strain at failure: 795 Ibf/ in MD; 825 Ibf/ in XMD
b. Elongation: 3.80% MD; 4.90% XMD
D. Flashings: Provide base flashings, perimeter flashings, detail flashings and component
materials that comply with requirements and recommendations of the following:
1. FMG 1-49 Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Perimeter Flashings.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
Specifications 07510-2
2. FMG 1-28 Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Wind Loads to Roof Systems and Roof Deck
Securement
3. FMG 1-29 Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Above Deck Roof Components.
4. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual (fifth edition) for construction details and
recommendations.
5. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (fifth edition) for construction details.
6. ASCE 7, Chapter 6
E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL,
FMG or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119
F. Wind Uplift Test: Minimum 90 Ibs psi according to UL 580
1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene one week before starting work of this section.
B. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with
related work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels
intact.
B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.
B. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or above 100
degrees F.
C. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected
or occurring.
D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be
weatherproofed the same day.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's Warranty and Service Agreement in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fain in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period. Failures includes roof leaks.
1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane
accessories, roof insulation, all sheet metal related details and termination details.
2. Manufacturer will provide, at no cost to the Owner, the following services in years 2, 5 and
10:
a. Inspection by a Technical Representative and delivery of a written inspection report
documenting roof conditions.
b. Preventative maintenance and necessary repairs, including splits, tears or breaks in the
roof membrane system and flashings that threaten the integrity of the roof system and
are not exempt from coverage due to neglect, negligence, vandalism or other exclusion.
c. General rooftop housekeeping and clean-up, subject to limits, but generally including
removal of incidental debris.
3. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, signed by Installer, covering Work
of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as roofing membrane, base
flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers
and walkway products for the following warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
Specifications 07510 - 3
A. Built-up Asphalt Roofing:
1. Tremco Roofing, Inc.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements.
B. Wood fiber board:
1. Georgia Pacific High Density Fiber Board
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 BASE SHEET MATERIALS
A. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, SBS modified, asphalt-impregnated and coated sheet, with
glass fiber reinforcing mat/ polyester/ glass glass fiber laminate reinforcement, dusted with fine
mineral surfacing on both sides.
1. Weight: 31lb/100sf ASTM D 228
2. Tensile Strength: 312lbf/in MD, 290 Ibs/inXMD ASTM D 5147
3. Tear Strength: 540 Ibf/in MD, 538 Ibf XMD ASTM D 5147
4. Elongation: 7.2% MD, 8.3% XMD ASTM D 5147
2.03 ROOF SURFACING
A. Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6163 Grade G, Type II SBS modified asphalt-impregnated and coated,
reinforced composite polyester/ glass-fiber cap sheet, with white coarse mineral-granule top and
factory applied, white, reflective acrylic coating.
1. Tensile Strength: 318 Ibf/in MD, 349 Ibf/inXD ASTM D 5147
2. Tear Strength: 475 Ibf/MD, 478 Ibf/in XD ASTM D 5147
3. Reflectance: 74.87% ASTM C1549
4. Thermal: 0.86 ASTM C1371
2.04 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Flashing Sheet: Elastomeric sheeting compounded from CSPE elastomer laminated to a high
strength polyester reinforcing scrim. Color to be white.
1. Tensile Strength: 225 Ibf ASTM D 751-89
2. Tear Strength: 90 Ibf ASTM D 751-89
3. Elongation: 25% ASTM D 751-89
B. Flashing Adhesive: One part elastomer formulated as an adhesive to bond CSPE sheeting.
Color to be white.
C. Metal Flashing Sheet and Coping: 24 gauge galvanized metal
1. Metal counterflashing
2. Metal termination bar
3. Metal gravel stop
4. Metal coping
D. Stripping: Polyester mesh
E. Stripping Adhesive: One part elastomeric acrylic-based compound for stripping and waterproofing
seams and edges. Color to be white.
F. Glass-Fiber Fabric: Woven glass-fiber cloth, treated with asphalt, complying with ASTM D 1668,
Type 1.
2.05 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
B. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, 1 part
asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with built-up
roofing membranes and flashings. Each container labeled with UL and FM logos indicating
material was under the specified UL and FM quality assurance programs.
1. Asbestos Content: ASTM D 276 None
2. Viscosity: ASTM D 2196 80,000-200,000 cP
3. Density: ASTM D1475 8.1 Ib/gal
4. VOC: ASTM D 3960 Compliant with local building codes
2.06 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with built-up roofing.
B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing
system manufacturer.
C. Fasteners: Factory-Coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
Specifications 07510 - 4
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane
components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength and acceptable to
roofing system manufacturer.
D. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by roofing
system manufacturer.
2.07 WOOD FIBER BOARD
A. General: Provide preformed wood fiber boards that comply with requirements and referenced
standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thickness indicated.
B. Wood Fiber Board: ASTM C 208, Type II, Gradel, cellulose wood fiber board, 1 inch thick with
premium asphalt coating on all six sides.
1. Compressive Strength: 20 psi ASTM C 165
2. Density, nominal: . 15lb/cfh ASTM C 209
2.08 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and
referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated.
B. Insulation Adhesive: Solvent free, cold fluid-applied, bituminous-urethane adhesive formulated
to adhere roof insulation to substrate with the following physical characteristics:
1. No asbestos content per EPA 600/R13/116
2. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC), maximum ASTM D 3960: 20 g/ L
3. Non-Volatile Content, minimum ASTM D 1644: 98%
4. Density at 77 degrees F, minimum: ASTM D 1875: 8.5 Ib/ gal
5. Elongation at 77 degrees F, minimum ASTM D 412: 1200%
6. T-Peel Strength at 77 degrees F, minimum ASTM D 1876: 15 Ibf
7. Adhesion Strength in Shear at 77 degrees F, minimum, ASTM D 816: 80 psi
8. Low-Temperature Flexibility, maximum, ASTM D 816: 60 degree F.
C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, HCFC free with felt
or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.
1. Thickness: 2 1/2 inch
D. Cover Board: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board with premium
asphalt coating on all six sides.
1. Thickness: 3/4 inch
2. Compressive Strength: 20 psi ASTM C 165
3. Density, nominal: 15 Ib/ cf ASTM C 209
E. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
1. 1/2:12 inch slope minimum.
2. Polyisocyanurate cricket material with 1/2 inch thick wood-fiber cover board.
2.09 WALKWAY PROTECTION PADS
A. Walkway Pads: Mineral-granule-surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition, slip-resisting pads,
manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer, 1/2
inch thick, minimum, with the following physical characteristics:
B. Flexural strength at maximum load, minimum, ASTM C 203: 218 psi
C. Granule adhesion (weight loss) maximum, ASTM D 4977: 1.1 gram.
D. Impact resistance at 77 degrees, F, ASTM D 3746: No damage to roof.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Verify deck is supported and secure.
C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped
and suitable for installation of roof system.
D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.
E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips are
in place.
3.02 PREPARATION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
Specifications 07510-5
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture and other substances detrimental to roofing installation
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp objects.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
3.03 FIBER BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or
left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
C. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered
between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with
insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation with 1/4 inch of nailers, projections and penetrations.
D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does
not restrict flow of water.
E. Over metal deck:
1. Mechanically attached Cover Board: Mechanically fasten one layer of 1 inch thick cover
board to deck.
2. Use one fastener per two sq. ft.
F. Over concrete deck:
1. Fully adhere one layer of 1 inch thick cover board over insulation boards in solvent free
insulation adhesive staggering joints below a minimum of 6 inches.
2. Attachment to concrete as the tampered material is glued in place not pinned.
3.04 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or
left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
C. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered
between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with
insulation. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections and penetrations.
D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does
not restrict water flow.
E. Installation:
1. Mechanically Attached Insulation: Mechanically fasten insulation boards to deck according
to FM 1-29 Loss Prevention Data Sheets for required wind uplift pressure.
2. Fully adhere one layer of 1/2 inch thick cover board over insulation boards in solvent free
insulation adhesive staggering joints below a minimum of 6 inches.
3.05 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Start installation of built-up roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's
technical representative.
B. Install roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials in compliance with
requirement in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system as listed in
FMG's 'Approval Guide' for fire/ windstorm classification indicated. Comply with
recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.
C. Install roofing system in accordance with the following NRCA Manual Plates and NRCA
recommendations; modify as required to comply with requirements of FMG references:
1. Base Flashing for Wall-Supported Deck: Plates BUR-5 and BUR-5S.
2. Metal Parapet Cap (Coping) and Base Flashing: Plates BUR-1 and BUR-1S.
3. Equipment Support Curb: Plates BUR-9 and BUR-9S.
4. Plumbing Vent: Plates BUR-18 and BUR-18S.
5. Roof Drain: BUR-20 and BUR-20S.
6. Surface Mount Counter Flashing: Plates BUR-4 and BUR-4S.
7. Embedded Edge Metal Flashing: Plates BUR-3 and BUR-3S.
8. Base Flashing for Vented Base Sheet: Plates BUR--7 and BUR-7S
9. Base Flashing for Non-Wall Supported Deck: Plates BUR-6 and BUR-6S.
10. Expansion Joint with Pre-Manufactured Metal Cover: Plates BUR-7A and BUR-7AS.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
Specifications 07510 - 6
11. Equipment Support Stand with Typical Rain Collar: Plates BUR-11 and BUR-11S.
12. Raised Curb Detail: Plates BUR-13 and BUR-13S.
13. Skylight, Scuttle and Smoke Vent: BUR-14 and BUR-14S.
14. Isolated Stack Flashing: BUR-17A and BUR-17AS.
15. Penetration Pocket: BUR-19and BUR-19S
16. Gutter: BUR-22 and BUR-22S
D. Where roof slope exceeds 2 inch per 12 inches, install sheets of built-up roofing membrane
parallel with slope.
1. Roofing membrane sheets to nailer strips.
2. Roofing membrane sheets to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for
installing built-up roofing system.
F. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and roofing membrane sheets are
not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and
insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt with joints
and edges sealed.
2. Completed terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water
from entering completed sections of roofing system.
3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
G. Cold Process Asphalt Heating
1. An in-line heat exchange unit may be used to facilitate application. Do not exceed
maximum adhesive temperature at 100 degrees F.
2. Heat exchange unit: Use heat transfer oil approved by heating equipment manufacturer.
Follow operation procedures recommended by heating equipment manufacturer.
H. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering
building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction.
3.06 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install one lapped course of base sheet, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants.
Attach base sheet as follows:
1. Adhere to substrate in a solid coating of cold applied adhesive at a rate required by
manufacturer.
2. Broom each ply sheet with a ply width broom to insure full adhesion without voids.
B. Install second base sheet layer starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply sheet without
stretching. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend base sheet over and terminate beyond
cants.
1. Adhere to substrate in a solid coating of cold applied adhesive at a rate required by
manufacturer.
2. Broom each ply sheet with a ply width broom to insure full adhesion without voids.
C. Cap Sheet: Install lapped cap sheet starting at low point of roofing system. Offset laps from laps of
preceding ply sheets and align cap sheet without stretching. Lap in direction to shed water.
Extend cap sheet over and terminate beyond cants.
1. Embed cap sheet in a solid coating of cold applied adhesive applied at a rate required by
manufacturer to form a uniform membrane without ply sheets touching.
2. Broom cap sheet with ply width broom to insure full adhesion without voids.
3. Apply pressure to end lap areas to assure positive adhesion.
3.07 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges and at
penetrations through roof and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instructions and as follows:
1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer.
2. Backer Sheet Application: Mechanically fasten backer sheet to walls or parapets. Adhere
backer sheet over roofing membrane at cants in flashing adhesive.
3. Flashing Sheet Application: Install backer sheet and adhere to substrate in flashing
adhesive.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
Specifications 07510-7
B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 6
inches onto field of roofing membrane.
C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.
1. At parapet walls, extend flashing sheet up entire wall and mechanically fasten at outside
edge of nailer below coping cap.
2. At high walls, mechanically fasten top of base flashing up wall 8-12 inches above roofing
membrane and secure at terminations and perimeter of roofing using butyl tape and
termination bar.
3. Install 24 gauge galvanized metal counterflashing at all vertically terminated base flashings.
D. Install 4 inch and 6 inch stripping plies where metal flanges and edges are set on built-up roofing.
Set in flashing adhesive.
E. Install all edge metal, metal counterflashing, and metal coping according to details and industry
standards.
F. Pipe penetrations: Install split lead flashing and strip in edges same as metal edges.
G. Irregular penetrations: Use Chem Curb flashing component system.
H. Roof drains: Set 30 by 30 inch 4 Ib lead flashing in bed of asphalt roofing cement on completed
roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with stripping and extend a minimum of inches beyond
edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing
and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring.
1. Install stripping of not less than two roofing membrane ply sheets, each set in a continuous
coating of asphalt roofing cement.
I. Details not addressed in specifications shall be in accordance with NRCA Manual Plates and
recommendations, and the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, as issued by Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc (SMACNA).
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional resting arid inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.09 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and war during remainder of construction period. When
remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and
damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
Specifications 07510 - 8
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Precast concrete splash pads.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for batten seams.
B. Section 07631 - Gutters and Downspouts.
C. Section 07720 - Roof Accessories: Roof-mounted units.
D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
E. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007.
B. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2004.
C. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007.
D. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007.
E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2003.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings, terminations, and installation details.
C. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch (304.8 x 304.8 mm) in size illustrating material of
typical standing seam and finish color.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and
standard details, except as otherwise indicated.
B. Upon request of the Architect, demonstrate by hose or standing water that all flashing and sheet
metal is completely watertight.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope
metal sheets to ensure drainage.
B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each
installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of
materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch (0.6
mm) thick base metal.
1. All galvanized sheet products shall have a zinc coating applied by hot-dip process to all
surfaces.
2. At galvanized sheet metal products to be painted (as shown on the Drawings), provide an
AZ-50 coating.
3. At galvanized sheet metal products that will not be painted (as shown on the Drawings),
provide an AZ-55 finish with a clear acrylic coating.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.
B. Primer: Zinc chromate type.
C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
D. Sealant: specified in Section 07900.
E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I.
F. Solder: ASTM B 32; Sn50 (50/50) type.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Specifications 07620 -1
G. Bituminous Coating: SSPC, Paint 12, solvent type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur,
compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat.
H. Mastic Sealant: Polysobutylene, nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating solvent.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and seam corners.
D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use
sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch (450 mm) long legs; seam for rigidity, seal
with sealant.
F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form
drip.
G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches (50 mm) over roofing gravel. Return and
brake edges.
2.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION
A. Gutters: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Rectangular profile.
B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile.
C. Gutters and Downspouts: Sizes indicated.
D. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.
1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements.
2. Gutter Supports: Brackets.
3. Downspout Supports: Brackets.
E. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi (21 MPa)
at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment.
F. Seal metal joints.
PARTS EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in
place, and nailing strips located.
B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film
thickness of 15 mil (0.4 mm).
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with lead wedges. Pack remaining
spaces with lead wool. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant.
B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
E. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with
neutralizing solution and rinse with water.
F. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners.
G. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot (20 mm/m) minimum.
H. Set splash pads under downspouts.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with
specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Specifications 07620 - 2
SECTION 07631
GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Galvanized steel gutters and downspouts.
B. Precast concrete splash pads.
C. Sheet metal splash pans.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07411 - Preformed Metal Roof Panels
B. Section 07510 - Built Up Asphalt Roofing
C. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007.
B. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2003.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for sizing components for rainfall intensity
determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years.
B. Conform to applicable code for size and method of rain water discharge.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, configurations, jointing methods, fastening methods,
locations, and installation details.
C. Product Data: Provide data on prefabricated components.
D. Samples: Submit two samples, 24 inches (609.6 mm) long illustrating component design, finish,
color, and configuration.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope to
drain.
B. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or
damage.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate the work with downspout discharge pipe inlet.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch
(0.6 mm) thick base metal.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Gutters: SMACNA square style profile.
B. Downspouts: SMACNA Square profile.
C. Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.
1. Anchoring Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements.
2. Gutter Supports: Brackets.
3. Downspout Supports: Brackets.
D. Scuppers:
1. In accordance with SMACNA requirements.
2. Scupper and flashing, Figures 1-26A, 1-26B and 1-27A with detail 2 alternate
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi (21 MPa) at
28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated.
B. Fabricate with required connection pieces.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
Specifications 07631 -1
C. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion
or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints.
D. Hem exposed edges of metal.
E. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight.
2.05 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Primer Coat: Finish concealed side of metal sheets with primer compatible with finish system, as
recommended by finish system manufacturer.
PARTS EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective
backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil (0.4 mm).
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts and
accessories.
C. Connect downspouts to storm sewer system. Grout connection watertight.
D. Set splash pans under downspouts.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
Specifications 07631 - 2
SECTION 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof hatches.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07510 - Built-up Asphalt Roofing
B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Roof accessory items fabricated from sheet
metal.
C. Section 07631 - Gutters and Downspouts.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.
1. Installation methods.
2. Maintenance requirements.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ROOF HATCHES
A. Manufacturers - Sound Rated Roof Hatches:
1. Milcor Inc: www.milcorinc.com.
B. Manufacturers - Roof Hatches:
1. Milcor Inc Model #M-3: www.milcorinc.com.
C. Roof Hatches: Factory-assembled steel frame and cover, complete with operating and release
hardware.
1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting on flat roof deck.
3. Sound Rated Hatches: Two sets of double leaf doors with air space between upper and
lower doors; upper doors to open upward, lower doors to open downward; minimum STC of
45.
4. Size(s): As indicated on drawings; single-leaf style unless indicated as double-leaf.
5. For Ladder Access: Single leaf; 30 by 36 inches (762 by 914 mm).
6. For Ships Ladder Access: Single leaf; 30 by 54 inches (762 by 1372 mm).
D. Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings;
extended bottom flange to suit mounting.
1. Material: Galvanized steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick.
2. Finish: Factory prime paint.
3. Insulation: 1 inch (25 mm) rigid fiberboard, located on outside face of curb.
4. Curb Height: 12 inches (305 mm) from finished surface of roof, minimum.
E. Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction.
1. Capable of supporting 40 psf (1.92 kPa) live load.
2. Material: Galvanized steel; outer cover 14 gage, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, Iiner22gage,
0.03 inch (0.76 mm) thick.
3. Finish: Factory prime paint.
4. Insulation: 1 inch (25 mm) rigid glass fiber.
5. Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter.
F. Hardware: Zinc or cadmium plated, unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer.
1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that
automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf (475 kPa)
load.
2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type.
3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release.
4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Roof Accessories
Specifications 07720 -1
5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior and exterior.
6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather
integrity.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean installed work to like-new condition.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Roof Accessories
Specifications 07720 - 2
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sealants and joint backing.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2005.
B. ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2002.
C. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005.
D. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics.
1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight
seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALANTS
A. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane or Polysulfide; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class
25, Uses M, G, and A; multi- component.
1. Color: To match adjacent wall/floor surface color.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.
b. Joints between concrete and other materials.
c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.
d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.
B. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF
single component, paintable.
1. Color: To match adjacent wall/floor surface color.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
C. Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew
resistant.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.
b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.
D. Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and
A; single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning.
E. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses
T, M and A; multi- component.
1. Color: To match adjacent wall/floor surface color.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Expansion joints in floors.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single component,
solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging.
1. Color: To match adjacent wall/floor surface color.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Joint Sealers
Specifications 07900 -1
2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent.
3. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F (-25 to 82 degrees C).
4. Shore A Hardness Range: 10 to 30.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
C. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.
D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces
and material installation instructions.
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.
C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919.
D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when
sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
G. Tool joints concave.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Joint Sealers
Specifications 07900 - 2
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.
B. Steel frames for wood doors.
C. Thermally insulated steel doors.
D. Sound-rated steel doors and frames.
E. Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08710-Door Hardware.
B. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.
C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.
B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames;
2003.
C. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004).
D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007.
E. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2004.
F. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2004.
G. ASTM E 1408 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission
Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems; 1991 (Reapproved 2000).
H. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.
I. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and
Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007.
J. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,
reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy
of referenced grade standard.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and
identifying location of different finishes, if any.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Contractor shall correct defective Work within a (2) two year period after Date of Substantial
Completion; remove and replace steel doors and frames at no cost to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Doors and Frames:
1. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com.
2. Ceco Door ProductsNone - www.cecodoor.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
Specifications 08110-1
2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames:
1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.
2. Door Texture: Smooth faces.
3. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as
indicated on drawings.
4. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in
place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
a. Frame reinforcement:
1) Hinges: 7 gauge
2) Strikes: 12 gauge
3) Closures: 12 gauge
4) Openings: 12 gauge
B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more
than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for
instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the
requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements
conflict, comply with the most stringent.
2.03 STEEL DOORS
A. Exterior Doors:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless.
2. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
3. Doors to be 16 gauge, heavy duty.
B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, full flush.
2. Core: Polystyrene foam.
3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm).
4. Doors to be 16 gauge, heavy duty.
C. Stairway Doors, Fire-Rated:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, full flush.
2. Core: Polystyrene foam.
3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm).
4. Doors to be 16 gauge, heavy duty.
D. Interior Doors, Sound-Rated:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless.
2. STC Rating of Assembled Door, Frame, and Seals: 35, calculated in accordance with
ASTM E 413, tested in accordance with ASTM E 90 or ASTM E 1408.
3. Core: Polyurethane.
4. Doors to be 16 gauge, heavy duty.
5. Sound Seals: Integral, concealed in door or frame.
E. Panels: Same construction, performance, and finish as doors.
2.04 STEEL FRAMES
A. General:
1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.
2. Finish: Same as for door.
3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to
be grouted.
4. Anchors:
a. In masonry walls, provide 0.156" thick wire-type or with adjustable 16 gauge, A60
T-strap not less than2" x 10".
b. In stud partitions, provide 18 gauge steel anchors welded to inside of jambs.
c. Floor anchors to be 14 gauge welded to inside of jamb.
5. Corners to be mitered and fully welded and ground smooth.
6. Provide with integral 5/8" integral stop.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
Specifications 08110 - 2
B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled.
1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
2. Exterior opening frames to be 14 gauge, A70 minimum.
3. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08710.
C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Fully welded type.
1. For openings 4'-0" wide or less: 16 gauge, A70 minimum.
2. For openings wider than 4'-0": 14 gauge, A70 minimum.
D. Sound-Rated Door Frames: Knock-down type.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components;
factory-installed.
1. Provide Anemostat model AFDL, roll-formed 20 gauge steel louver blades with 18 gauge
frame. Mountflush into doors without overlapping moldings on surface of door facing
sheets.
2. Louver blade to be inverted V blade, sight proof, stationary type.
3. In Fire-Rated Doors: UL-listed fusible link louver, same rating as door.
B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08800, factory installed.
1. Provide Anemostat model #LOPRP 20 gauge frame, welded to security side of door,
galvanized.
2. Glazing to be 1/4" thick tempered and fire rated where required. Refer to Section 08800.
C. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner
pumpable grout is prohibited.
2.06 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to
installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM
HMMA 840.
B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
C. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure
of grout before setting will not deform frames.
D. Coordinate installation of hardware.
E. Coordinate installation of glazing.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in (1.5 mm) measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust sound control doors so that seals are fully engaged when door is closed.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
Specifications 08110 - 3
SECTION 08305
SPECIAL DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sliding door #40 between shooting ranges as indicated on the drawings.
2. Pair of swinging doors #32 from 25 yard Range to Range Equipment Storage #127.
3. Single swinging door #50 from 100 yard Range to Storefront Prop.
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01110 - Summary of
Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information
necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. 09986 Plastic Coated Wall Panels
2. 09900 Paints and Coatings
3. 11485 Shooting Range Equipment
4. 13075 Bullet Resistant Fiberglass Armor
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Install per manufacturer instructions, and as specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data and rough-in diagrams and details.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver products in manufacturers original packages, clearly marked with brand name and
model number.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for period as prescribed in
manufacturer's standard Warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Horizontal Sliding Insulated Door #40 with Applied Ballistic Protection and Acoustical
Protection: Unit shall consist of single panel, suspended on heavy duty track. Door shall
be 4" thickness, with an approximate weight of 520 Ibs. prior to attaching additional
cladding materials. Door shall be of sufficient size to completely cover masonry opening,
8'-0" tall by 8'-8" wide. Complete door assembly, including suspension system, jamb
casing, perimeter seals, insulation and door panels, equal to model # "SSM-EHD" as
manufactured by Chase Doors, Cincinnati, OH (800-543-4455), with manual sliding
operation system. On 100-yard range face of door, apply a vinyl J-mould to encase the
following assembly: layer of 1 Ib. / SF limp mass barrier shall be adhered to door.
Staple a layer of resin paper over limp mass. Mechanically fasten another layer of 1 Ib. /
SF limp mass barrier over resin paper. Secure UL 752 Level-2 Bullet Resistant Fiberglass
(5/16" thick) over limp mass with mechanical fasteners as detailed. Ensure vinyl J-mould
trim completely surrounds this assembly. After this is in place, adhere facing of fiberglass
reinforced plastic panel (FRP - color to be selected from standard colors) over previously-
detailed assembly, and trim with additional J-mould as detailed.
B. Insulated Hollow Metal Doors (Pair) #32 and Frame with Applied Ballistic Protection and
Acoustical Protection: Door to be exterior grade, insulated, Heavy Duty, 18 Gauge.
Continuous heavy duty pin and barrel piano hinge, rated for 900 Ibs. per door. Range-
side face of each door shall be clad with Level-2 Bullet Resistant Fiberglass, 5/16" thick,
apply Fiber Reinforced Plastic panel (FRP) over bullet-resistant fiberglass. Install a J-
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Special Doors
Specifications 08305 -1
mould at door edges to provide a finished appearance. Coordinate bevel and hardware to
assure tight fit & smooth operation.
Hardware Set to be coordinate with building hardware specifications
2 ea. Continuous Hinge - Heavy Duty (rated for 900 Ibs. each) - Pemko
#SPBFMHD
1 ea. Lever Lockset Classroom Function (Keyed and type per building hardware
specification - adapted for additional thickness) - Schlage L9070T 17A x 630 "Thick
Door
1 ea. External Closer LCN 4011 x 689 (Pull side)
1 set Perimeter Sound Gasketing - NGP 131N
1 ea. %" thick x 6" wide Solid Stainless Steel Threshold with edges beveled on
angle and countersunk stainless screw attachments
2 ea. Automatic Acoustical Door Bottom - NGP 423N
1 ea. Astragal - NGP 148NGKB
2 ea. Surface Bolts - Ives #SB360 x 626, 12" bottom, 24" top
1 ea. Spring-loaded dustproof receivers - Ives DP1 x 626
C. Insulated Hollow Metal Door #50 and Frame with Applied Ballistic Protection and Acoustical
Protection: Door to be exterior grade, insulated, Heavy Duty, 18 Gauge. Continuous
heavy duty pin and barrel piano hinge, rated for 900 Ibs. per door. Provide internal 10
gauge back up plate inside each face of the door (8" tall by width of door) behind panic
device. Range-side face of each door shall be clad with UL 752 Level-4 Bullet Resistant
Fiberglass, 1-3/8" thick, apply Fiber Reinforced Plastic panel (FRP) over bullet-resistant
fiberglass. Exterior side apply a vinyl J-mould to encase the following assembly: 1 layer of
1 Ib. / SF limp mass barrier shall be adhered to door. Staple a layer of resin paper over
limp mass barrier. Mechanically fasten second layer of 1 Ib. / SF limp mass barrier over
resin paper. After this is in place, adhere facing of fiberglass reinforced plastic panel (FRP
- color to be selected from standard colors) over previously-detailed assembly, and trim
with additional vinyl J-mould as detailed. Coordinate bevel and hardware to assure tight fit
& smooth operation.
Hardware Set to be coordinated with building hardware specifications
1 ea. Continuous Hinge - Heavy Duty (rated for 900 Ibs. each) - Pemko SPBFMHD
2 ea. Von Duprin Guard-X Model 2670 exit alarm panic device (US26D) w/ rim
cylinder (Keyed per building hardware specification). One unit will be installed and
one unit will be provided to Owner for future use.
1 ea. External Closer - LCN 4011 x 689 (mount pull side)
1 set Perimeter Sound Gasketing - NGP 423N
1 ea. %" thick x 6" wide Solid Stainless Steel Threshold with edges beveled on
angle and countersunk stainless screw attachments
1 ea. Automatic Acoustical Door Bottom - NGP 423N
1 ea. Position Switch in frame to relay door-ajar signal to Range Control Panel
signal light. This switch should match the switch used for exterior doors behind bullet
traps.
1 ea. Floor Stop-Ives FS18Lx 626
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas to receive door and frame to insure work of preceding trades is completed.
Check surfaces to see that they are plumb in place, free from grease, oil or other debris
which would affect proper installation. Application constitutes acceptance of substrate
conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with current printed manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Sliding door - Prior to placing door onto track, install limp mass, resin paper and bullet-
resistant fiberglass material. Apply J-mould at door edges as detailed. Ensure sound seal
around entire perimeter; sides, bottom & top.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Special Doors
Specifications 08305 - 2
C. Hollow metal doors - Provide 4 jamb anchors per jamb. Grout frame solid.
D. For ballistic / acoustical doors, carefully install door / frame units to coordinate and accept
hardware and cladding to provide minimum gaps and spaces between materials, while
providing smooth door operation. Grout frame solid. Coordinate w/ range consultant prior
to the installation of cladding.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Special Doors
Specifications 08305 - 3
SECTION 08310
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Access door and frame units, fire-rated and non-fire-rated, in wall, and ceiling locations.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field paint finish.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
B. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of
adjoining work.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Access Doors:
1. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com.
2. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com.
3. Milcor Inc: www.milcorinc.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. All Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground
flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be
installed in.
B. Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they
are to be installed.
1. Provide products listed and labeled by UL or ITS (Warnock Hersey) as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
2.03 WALL AND CEILING UNITS
A. Door and Frame Units: Formed steel.
1. Frames and flanges: 0.058 inch (1.5 mm) steel.
2. Door panels: 0.070 inch (1.8 mm) double sheet with integral non-combustible insulation filler.
3. Sizes:
a. Walls: 12x12 inches (300 x 300 mm).
b. Ceilings: 18x18 inches (609 x 609 mm).
c. Lay-in Grid Ceilings: To match grid module.
4. Hardware:
a. Hinge: Concealed constant force closure spring type.
5. Prime coat with alkyd primer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.
C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
Specifications 08310 -1
SECTION 08331
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
A. EXTERIOR COILING DOORS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Overhead coiling doors, operating hardware, non-fire-rated and exterior, manual, electric, and
non-fire rated operation.
B. Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08710 - Finish Door Hardware and Schedules: Cylinder cores and keys.
B. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field paint finish.
C. Section 16111 - Conduit: Conduit from electric circuit to operator and from operator to control
station.
D. Section 16180-Equipment Wiring: Power to disconnect.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007.
B. ASTM B-117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2003.
D. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays,
Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2000 (R2005).
E. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical
equipment.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and
installation details.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, adjustment and
alignment procedures.
E. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments
required.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to the
authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
B. Overhead coiling doors shall be designed to a standard maximum of 25 cycles per day and an
overall maximum of 50,000 operating cycles for the lifeof the door.
C. Overhead coiling doors are to be installed by a manufacturer's authorized representative.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. All Cookson Rolling Doors shall be warranted for a period of 2 years from the time of shipment
against defects in workmanship and materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Overhead Coiling Doors:
1. The Cookson Company: www.cooksondoor.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements.
2.02 COILING DOORS
A. Exterior Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain.
1. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 20 psf (940 Pa), without undue
deflection or damage to components.
2. Nominal Slat Size: 3 inches (75 mm) wide x required length.
3. Finish: Galvanized.
4. Finish: Factory painted, color as selected.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
Specifications 08331 -1
a. Provide manufacturer's standard ColorCote system consisting of the following:
1) Hot dipped galvanized G-90 coating in accordance with ASTM A-653.
2) Bonderized coating for prime coat adhesion.
3) Factory applied Thermosetting Powder Coating applied with a minimum thickness
of 2 mils.
4) Exhibit no corrosion in accordance with ASTM B-117 for 1,000 hours.
b. Submit full color line for selection of color by Architect.
5. Guides: Angles; galvanized steel.
6. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel.
7. Manual hand chain lift operation.
8. Electric operation.
9. Mounting: Within framed opening.
10. Exterior lock and latch handle.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats.
1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to
prevent lateral movement.
2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed
position.
3. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom of
curtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of exterior doors.
B. Steel Slats: Minimum 20 gauge ASTM A 653/A 653M galvanized steel sheet.
1. Galvanizing: Minimum G90/Z275 coating.
C. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place with snap-on trim, mounting
brackets of same metal.
D. Steel Guides: 3 steel angles bolted together with 3/8 inch fasteners to form a channel with an
extruded vinyl snap-on weatherstripping continuously along the exterior leg of the guide. The
wall angle portion shall be continuous and fastened to the surrounding structure with either
minimum 1/2 inch fasteners or welds, both on 36 inches on center.
E. Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape.
1. Minimum 24 gage thick.
F. Hardware:
1. Latching: Inside mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to keep
in locked or retracted position.
2. Latch Handle: Interior and exterior handle.
G. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing
torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding
position at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 Ib (10 kg) nominal force to
operate.
2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION
A. Electric Operators:
1. Mounting: Side mounted.
2. Motor Enclosure:
a. Exterior doors: NEMA MG 1 Type 4; open drip proof.
b. Interior doors: NEMA MG 1 Type 1; open drip proof.
3. Motor Rating: 1/3 hp (250 W); continuous duty.
4. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter.
5. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1.
6. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second (300 mm/s).
7. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller.
8. Manual override in case of power failure.
B. Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for each
operator.
1. 24 volt circuit.
C. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired
to stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
Specifications 08331 - 2
PARTS EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. All Cookson Rolling Doors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA Bulletin 80 by an
authorized Cookson Distributor.
B. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing
without distortion or stress.
D. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural
members only.
E. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
F. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 16155.
G. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.
H. Complete wiring from fire alarm system and earthquake system.
I. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in
Section 07900.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft (3 mm per 3 m) straight edge.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean installed components.
B. Remove labels and visible markings.
B. PUSH-UP SMOKE CONTROL DOORS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. All Rolling Smoke Control Doors shall be Series SD10 as manufactured by The Cookson
Company, Phoenix, Arizona. Furnished materials shall include all curtains, bottom bars, guides,
brackets, hoods, operating mechanisms and any special features.
B. Work not to be included by The Cookson Company includes design of, material for, and
preparation of door openings but not limited to structural or miscellaneous iron work, metal or
wood trim, access panels, and finish painting.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Overhead coiling doors, operating hardware, fire-rated, manual operation.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007.
B. ASTM B-117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical
equipment.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and
installation details.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, adjustment and
alignment procedures.
E. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments
required.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All rolling smoke control doors shall be constructed in accordance with testing agency
requirements and shall bear an S label 1-1/2 hour rating label.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
Specifications 08331 - 3
B. Overhead coiling doors shall be designed to a standard maximum of 25 cycles per day and an
overall maximum of 50,000 operating cycles for the lifeof the door.
C. Overhead coiling doors are to be installed by a manufacturer's authorized representative.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. All Cookson Rolling Smoke Control Doors shall be warranted for a period of 2 years from the time
of shipment against defects in workmanship and materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Overhead Coiling Doors:
1. The Cookson Company: www.cooksondoor.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 COILING DOORS
A. Push-Up Smoke Control Doors: Steel slat curtain.
1. Model: Type SD10-1
2. Nominal Slat Size: 1 1/4" inches (31.75 mm) high x required length.
3. Finish: #4 Polished Stainless Steel.
4. Guides: Angles; galvanized steel.
5. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel.
6. Manual push-up operation.
7. Mounting: Within framed opening.
8. Locking Mechanism: Thumbturn.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. The door curtain shall be constructed of interconnected strip stainless steel slats. The curtain
shall be constructed of 22 gauge No. 10 (1-1/4" high by 3/8" deep) slats as designated by The
Cookson Company. The finish on the door curtain shall be #4.
B. The bottom bar shall be constructed of tubular stainless steel measuring 2" high by 1-1/4" deep
and shall have a smoke astragal. The finish on the bottom bar shall be #4.
C. The guides shall be constructed of box sections of stainless steel with brush smoke gaskets. The
finish on the guides shall be #4.
D. The brackets shall be constructed of 11 gauge steel plate and shall receive one (1) coat of rust
inhibiting aluminum prime paint.
E. The barrel shall be steel tubing of not less than 4" in diameter. Oil tempered torsion springs shall
be capable of correctly counter balancing the weight of the curtain and shall have both a main
and an auxiliary spring. The barrel shall be designed to limit maximum deflection to .03" per foot
of opening width. The barrel shall receive one (1) coat of bronze rust-inhibiting prime paint.
F. The hood shall be fabricated from 24 gauge stainless steel and shall be formed to fit the square
brackets. A brush lintel gasket shall be provided. The finish on the hood shall be #4.
2.04 OPERATION
A. All push-up operated smoke control doors shall have an automatic closing device, Sure-Close
Release Spring and governor to control the downward speed of the door which shall become
operational upon the fusing of a 160 degree fusible link. The door shall have an average closing
speed of not less than six (6) inches per second and not more than twenty-four (24) inches per
second as indicated in NFPA Bulletin 80. Once the door has closed, it should be able to be reset
by one person on one side of the door only.
B. Push-up operated doors shall open and close with a maximum of 30 pounds of effort utilizing
finger lifts in the bottom bar. This type of operation should not be used for doors over 8 feet wide.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. All Cookson Rolling Smoke Control Doors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA Bulletin 80
by an authorized Cookson Distributor.
B. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing
without distortion or stress.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
Specifications 08331 - 4
D. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural
members only.
E. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
F. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in
Section 07900.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft (3 mm per 3 m) straight edge.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean installed components.
B. Remove labels and visible markings.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
Specifications 08331 - 5
SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum storefront window system.
B. Aluminum storefront entrance system.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07900 - Sealants and Caulking
B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames
C. Section 08700 - Hardware
D. Section 08800 - Glazing
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer - As listed in Part 2.
B. Installer - The storefront installer shall be currently approved by the manufacturer, and have
experience of at least five (5) years installing the selected system.
C. Manufacturer of aluminum entrances and storefronts are to be same manufacturer as aluminum
windows specified in Sectin 08520.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM A36: Structural steel
B. ANSI/ASTM B221: Aluminum-alloy extended bar, rod, wire, shape, and tube
C. ANSI/ASTM E283: Rate of air leakage through exterior windows, curtain walls, and doors
D. ANSI/ASTM E330: Structural performance of exterior windows, curtain walls, and doors by
uniform static air pressure difference
E. ASTM B209: Aluminum and aluminum-alloy sheet and plate
F. FSTT-P-31-Paint, Oil, Iron oxide, ready-mixed, red and brown
G. AAMA - Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association
H. AMA - Aluminum Manufacturers Association
I. All exterior aluminum storefront window and door systems to comply with air infiltration standards
as per California Energy Conservation Standards "Title 24", Division 4 T20-1495 of the California
Administrative Code.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data - Submit material specifications, manufacturer's installation, and maintenance
instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Shop Drawings under provisions of Section 01300. Drawings to include:
1. System and component layout
2. Anchorage and fasteners with applicable flashing details
C. Samples under provisions of Section 01300 to include:
1. Three (3) color and finish sample of typical components
D. Provide storefront and entrance system manufacturer's letter of certification stating that the tested
system meets or exceeds the referenced criteria for the appropriate storefront and entrance type.
1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection
1. Storefront sections, aluminum frames, and storefront system to be stored at the job site in a
safe dry place with all labels intact and legible at time of installation.
2. Use all means to protect aluminum sections before, during, and after installation. Do not
allow products to become scratched or bent.
B. Replacements - In the event of damage, including water intrusion, immediately make all repairs
and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the
Owner.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Five (5) year manufacturer's warranty to cover complete assembly for operation and weather
tightness.
1.08 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind Load = 20 psf
Carlsbad Joint First Respondent Training Facility ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
Specifications 08410-1
1.09 TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Entrance System:
1. Test Units
a. Air test unit shall be minimum size of 3'-0" x 7'-0".
2. Test Procedures and Performances
a. Entrance doors shall conform to all requirements for the door type specified. In addition,
the following specific performance requirements shall be met.
b. Air Infiltration Test
1) With door closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static
air pressure difference of 1.57 psf.
2) Air infiltration shall not exceed .50 cfm per foot of perimeter crack length for single
doors.
B. Storefront Window System:
1. Provisions for Thermal Movements
a. Storefront framing systems shall be designed to provide for thermal movement of all
component materials resulting from surface temperatures ranging from 110 degrees F
to 50 degrees F without causing buckling, stresses on glass, failure of joint seals, undue
stress on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance,
or other detrimental effects. Operating windows and doors shall function normally over
this temperature range.
2. Test Procedures and Performance
a. Air Infiltration Test
1) Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure difference of 6.24
psf.
2) Air infiltration shall not exceed .06 cfm per square foot of fixed wall area.
b. Water Resistance Test
1) Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 331.
2) There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage at a static test pressure of 12.0 psf.
c. Uniform Load Deflection Test
1) Test in accordance with ASTM E 330
2) The system shall withstand 20 psf positive and negative design wind pressure
normal t the plane of the wall.
3) Deflection under design load shall not exceed L/175 of the clear span.
d. Uniform Load Structural Test
1) Test in accordance with ASTM E 330 at a pressure 1.5 times the design pressure
for Uniform Load Test Deflection Test.
2) At conclusion of the test, there shall be no glass breakage, permanent damage to
fasteners, storefront parts, or any other damage that would cause the storefront to
be defective.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. General
1. All storefront and entrance system components shall be the product of a single manufacturer
and represents an integrated system.
2. The aluminum storefront and entrance system was designed based on the product of EFCO
Corporation (www.efcocorp.com) as a standard of quality. All substitutions will be
considered under provisions of specification Section 01030.
2.02 STOREFRONG WINDOW AND ENTRANCE SYSTEM MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer: EFCO Corporation
B. Materials: Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T5 or T6 alloy and tempered.
C. Storefront Window System:
1. Frames: 2" x 6 1/2" profile, flush glazing stops.
a. Thermal Storefront Framing - System 406, 2" x 6 1/2" system with end dams.
b. Provide compensating channel head assembly at all storefronts.
c. Refer to Window Schedule for configuration.
2. Fabrication:
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
Specifications 08410 - 2
a. Fabrication Method — Shearblock or equal. Use of exposed fasteners and stacking
system with receptor sill not acceptable.
b. All aluminum frame extrusions shall have a minimum wall thickness of .080".
c. All exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce continuity of line and design
with all joints. System design shall be such that raw edges will not be visible at joints.
d. Frame:
1) Depth of frame shall not be less than 6 1/2".
2) Face dimension shall not be less than 2".
3) Frame components shall be shear block construction.
D. Entrance Swing Door System:
1. Frames: 1-3/4" x 5" profile, flush glazing stops.
a. Thermal Entrance Swing Door Framing - Series D 500, wide stile.
b. Provide compensating channel head assembly at all storefronts.
c. Refer to Window and Door Schedules for configuration.
d. Hardware for entrance doors is specified under Section 08700 of the specifications and
shall be sent to the door manufacturer for application, except do not drill or tap for
surface-mounted items until time of installation at the site. The finish hardware supplier
shall be responsible for furnishing physical hardware and templates of all hardware to
the entrance door manufacturer prior to fabrication, and for coordinating hardware
delivery requirements with the hardware manufacturer, the general Contractor and the
entrance door manufacturer to ensure the building project is not delayed.
2. Fabrication:
a. Corner construction to use a heavy, concealed, reinforced bracket that is deep
penetration and fillet welded. Use of exposed fasteners and stacking system with
receptor sill not acceptable.
b. Major portions of the door sections shall have .125" wall thickness.
c. Glazing stop sections shall have .050" wall thickness.
d. Entrance Doors:
1) Door stiles shall be no less than 5" wide (not including glass stops).
2) Door stiles and rails shall have hairline joints at corners. Heavy concealed
reinforcement brackets shall be secured with screws and shall be of deep
penetration and fillet welded.
e. Weather stripping shall be wool pile and shall be installed in one stile of pairs of doors
and in jamb stiles of center pivoted doors.
f. Door stops shall include EPDM bulb weather stripping.
E. Fasteners: As recommended by storefront manufacturer.
2.03 Glazing - Refer to Section 08800.
2.04 FINISHES
A. Organic: Factory finish all exposed areas of aluminum windows and components with high
performance 70% PVDF fluoropolymer ultrapon in accordance with Aluminum Association
Designation on AA-M12-C42-R1X and AAMA guide spec 2605-98. All finishes to be factory
applied.
B. Primer and Galvanized surfaces are to be per manufacturer.
C. Touch up for aluminum finish surfaces are to be per manufacturer.
D. Concealed steel items are to be galvanized in accordance with ANSI/ASTM A386 to 2.0 oz/ s.f.
E. Apply one (1) coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with
cementitious or dissimilar materials.
F. Colors: 'Grey' from EFCO standard color line.
1. Provide manufacturer's ClearCote System to finished units.
2.05 GENERAL FABRICATION OF STOREFRONT AND ENTRANCE SYSTEM
A. Fabricate frames allowing for minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation.
B. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners with screw and spline. Make joints and connections
flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C. Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior.
D. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchorage items.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
Specifications 08410-3
E. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and jointing to ensure concealment from view.
2.06 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials, anchorages, and controls, not specifically described but required for a
complete and proper installation of entrances and storefronts, as recommended by the
manufacturer, subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to installation of the work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other
trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
2. Verify that storefront and entrance systems may be installed in accordance with the
approved design.
3. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of
this Section.
4. Where existing conditions occur, Contractor to verify existing wall construction and install
work according to manufacturer recommendations.
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have
been fully resolved.
3.02 GENERAL FABRICATION
A. Shop-fabricate all frames into complete units.
B. Accurately miter and fit all members to hairline joints. Weld or mechanically fasten along entire
line of contact on the unexposed side. No discoloration on face will be permitted after aluminum
finishing.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install frames and glazing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame assembly to structure.
C. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
D. Coordinate attachment and seal of air and vapor barrier materials. Install sill flashings and end
dams.
E. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal
barrier.
F. Cutouts, recesses, mortising or milling operations required for hardware shall be accurately made
and reinforced with backing plates as required to ensure adequate strength of connection.
G. Install all members with adequate provision for settlement, expansion, and contraction to occur
without breaking glass.
H. Screws, bolts, nuts, and other fastening devices shall be of aluminum or non-magnetic stainless
steel, concealed.
I. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, using exterior dry method of glazing.
J. Install perimeter acrylic type sealant, backing materials, and installation requirements in
accordance with Section 07900.
K. Protection of Contact Surfaces: Aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals or with
incompatible materials such as concrete masonry and plaster shall be painted on contact
surfaces with protective coating of alkali-resistant bituminous paint before installation or, isolated
in an approved manner with non-absorption tape or gaskets.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plane: 0.03 inches per foot (2.5 mm/m) maximum or 0.25 inches per 30 feet,
whichever is less.
B. Misalignment of two adjoining members abutting in plane: 0.015 inches.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Provide whatever means are necessary to protect finish. Take particular care to protect all
exposed aluminum work from damage to finish as a result of other work subsequently performed
or from other causes.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
Specifications 08410-4
B. Any material becoming damaged prior to acceptance of building, and which is not subject to repair
as reviewed or authorized by Architect, shall be removed and replaced with new work, at no
additional cost to the Owner.
C. Provide tape and polyethylene sheet protection at all plastering operations. Verify compatibility
of tape with finish prior to application.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft,
clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant
manufacturer.
D. Upon completion of the work, remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from the
entrances and storefront systems installation. Leave areas in neat, clean, and orderly condition.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
Specifications 08410 - 5
SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum fixed windows as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07900 - Sealants and Caulking
B. Section 08800 - Glazing
C. Section 12490 - Window Treatments
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer - As listed in Part 2 or approved by Architect.
B. Installer - The window installer shall be currently approved by the manufacturer, and have
experience of at least three (3) years installing the selected system.
C. References - In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations:
D. ANSI/AAMA 302.9-1977: Air, water, and structural test units sizes and configuration.
E. ANSI/AAMA 101-85: Test Procedures and Performance
F. ASTME283: Air Infiltration Test
G. ASTME331: Water Resistance Test
H. ASTM E330: Air Pressure Test
I. AAMA 1502.7: Condensation Resistance Test
J. AAMA 1503.1: Thermal Transmittance Test
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data - Submit material specifications, manufacturer's installation, and maintenance
instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Shop Drawings under provisions of Section 01300. Drawings to include:
1. Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work, and
installation requirements.
2. Window hardware types
3. Typical head, jamb, and sill details
C. Sample
1. Submit (3) color samples of exterior color for approval by Architect per Section 01300.
2. Product Handling
D. Protection
1. Windows and screens to be stored at the job site in a safe dry place with all labels intact and
legible at time of installation. Aluminum sections to be wrapped prior to installation.
2. Use all means to protect windows and screens before, during, and after installation.
E. Replacements - In the event of damage, including water intrusion, immediately make all repairs
and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the
Owner.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Five (5) year manufacturer warranty to cover complete system.
1.06 TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Test Units
1. Air, water and structural test unit shall conform to requirements set forth in AAMA/NWWDA
101/1. S.2- 97.
2. Thermal test unit sizes shall be 4'-0" x 6'-0". Unit shall consist of a project out over fixed
over project in window.
B. Test Procedures and Performances
1. Windows shall conform to all AAMA/NWWDA 101/1.S.2 - 97 requirements for the window
type specified. In addition, the following specific performance requirements shall be met.
2. Air Infiltration Test
a. With ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static
air pressure difference of 6.24 psf.
b. Air Infiltration shall not exceed 10 cfm per sq. ft. of unit.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Specifications 08520 -1
c. Air infiltration shall not exceed 10 cfm per sq. ft. of unit and .06 cfm per sq. ft. of unit (for
fixed windows).
3. Water Resistance Test
a. With ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 331/ASTM E
547 at a static air pressure difference of 12.0 psf.
b. There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage.
4. Uniform Load Structural Test
a. With ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 330 at a static
air pressure difference of 120 psf, both positive and negative.
b. At conclusion of test there shall be no glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners,
hardware parts, support arms or actuating mechanisms, nor any other damage that
would cause the window to be inoperable.
5. Forced Entry Resistance
a. Windows shall be tested in accordance to ASTM F 588 or AAMA 1302.5 and meet the
requirements of performance level 10.
6. Condensation Resistance Test (CRF)
a. With ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with AAMA 1503.1.
b. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) shall not be less than 51 (frame) for operable
windows.
c. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) shall not be less than 51 (frame) and less than
68 (frame) for fixed windows.
7. Thermal Transmittance Test (Conductive U-Value)
a. With ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with AAMA 1503.1
b. Conductive thermal transmittance (U-Value) shall not be more than 0.60 BTU/hr/ft2/°F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. General
1. All aluminum window system components shall be the product of a single manufacturer and
represents an integrated system.
2. The aluminum window system was designed based on the product of EFCO Corporation
(www.efcocorp.com) as a standard of quality. All substitutions will be considered under
provisions of specification Section 01030.
2.02 ALUMINUM EXTERIOR WINDOWS
A. Fixed Window: 2" heavy commercial window, Series 6600, thermally broken frame, dual-glazed,
factory-finished.
B. Project-out Casement Window: 2" heavy commercial project-out casement window, Series
2700, thermally broken frame, dual-glazed, factory-finished; screens, and operating hardware.
C. Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T5 on T6 alloy and tempered.
D. All aluminum frame extrusions shall have a minimum wall thickness of .062".
E. Mechanical fasteners, welded components, and hardware items shall not bridge thermal barriers.
Thermal barriers shall align at all frame and vent corners.
F. Depth of frame shall not be less than 2".
G. Frame components shall be mortise and tenon. Other means of mechanically fastening, i.e.,
screws shall not permitted.
2.03 GLAZING - Factory Glaze per Section 08800.
2.04 SCREENS
A. Frame to match window color with charcoal fiberglass mesh, 18 x 16 pattern using reusable
spline. Fasten to window frame with tab attachments. Provide sliding or hinged wickets to
access all operating hardware.
2.05 HARDWARE
A. Project-out Casement Window
1. Locking handles shall be lift lock operating hardware and manufactured from a white bronze
alloy with a US25D brushed finish.
2. Operating hardware shall be butt hinges with limit stops.
2.06 FINISHES
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Specifications 08520 - 2
A. Organic: Factory-finish all exposed areas of aluminum windows and components with high
performance 70% PVDF fluoropolymer ultrapon in accordance with Aluminum Association
Designation on AA-M12-C42-R1X and AAMA guide spec. 2605-98. All finishes being
factory-applied.
B. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar
materials.
C. Colors: 'Grey' from EFCO standard color line
1. Provide manufacturer's ClearCote System to finished units.
2.07 SEALANT - Sealant and backing materials per Section 07900 and manufacturer's
instructions.
2.08 WEATHER STRIP - All weather-strip shall be Santoprene or equal.
2.09 THERMAL BARRIER
A. All exterior aluminum shall be separated from interior aluminum by a rigid, structural thermal
barrier. For purposes of this specification, a structural thermal barrier is defined as a system that
shall transfer shear during bending and, therefore, promote composite action between the
exterior and interior extrusions.
B. The perimeter frame thermal barrier shall be Insulabar by Ensinger, Inc. or equal, consisting of
two glass reinforced polyamide nylon 6/6 struts, mechanically crimped in raceways extruded in
the exterior and interior extrusions.
C. The sash and intermediate rails shall be poured and debridged thermal barrier made of two part
polyurethane.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. General
1. All aluminum frame and vent extrusions shall have a minimum wall thickness of .125".
2. Mechanical fasteners, welded components, and hardware items shall not bridge thermal
barriers. Thermal barriers shall align at all frame and vent corners.
3. Depth of frame and vent shall not be less than 2".
B. Frame
1. Frame components shall be mortise and tenon. Other means of mechanically fastening, i.e.
screws shall not be permitted.
C. Ventilator
1. All vent extrusions shall be tubular.
2. Each corner shall be mitered, reinforced with an extruded corner key, hydraulically crimped,
and 'cold welded' with epoxy adhesive.
3. Each vent shall utilize two rows of weather stripping installed in specifically designed dovetail
grooves in the extrusion. The exterior gasket will be omitted at the vent bottom rail for
project-out vents and at the vent top rail for project-in vents, allowing air to pressure equalize
the void between the vents and frame.
2.11 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials, anchorages, and controls, not specifically described but required for a
complete and proper installation of entrances and storefronts, as recommended by the
manufacturer, subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to installation of the work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other
trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
2. Verify that aluminum windows may be installed in accordance with the approved design.
3. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of
this Section.
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have
been fully resolved.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Specifications 08520 - 3
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install window frames and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weathertight installation at all joints, intersections, and at
opening perimeter.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from level or plumb to be 0.06 inches every three (3) feet.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.
C. Windows shall be field-tested for air filtration and water penetration.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
C. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
D. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant
manufacturer.
E. Upon completion of the work, remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from the
aluminum window installation. Leave areas in neat, clean, and orderly condition.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Specifications 08520 - 4
SECTION 08710
FINISH DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Door Hardware, including electric hardware.
2. Storefront and entrance door hardware.
3. Gate Hardware.
4. Power supplies for electric hardware.
5. Padlocks.
6. Key cabinets.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers - exterior thresholds
2. Section 08100 - Steel Doors and Frames
3. Section 08305 - Special Doors
4. Section 08410 - Entrances and Storefronts
5. Section 16725 - Security Access Systems
C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere.
1. Windows.
2. Cabinets, including open wall shelving and locks.
3. Signs, except where scheduled.
4. Toilet accessories, including grab bars.
5. Installation.
6. Rough hardware.
7. Conduit, junction boxes & wiring.
1.2 REFERENCES:
Use date of standard in effect as of Bid date.
A. American National Standards Institute - ANS1156.18 - Materials and Finishes.
B. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990
C. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
D. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute
E. 2007 State of California Building Code
F. SDI - Steel Door Institute
G. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
1.3 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS
A. SUBMITTALS: Submit six copies of schedule per Section 01330. Only submittals printed
one sided will be accepted and reviewed. Organize vertically formatted schedule into
"Hardware Sets" with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of
every item required for each door or opening. Include following information:
1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items.
2. Use BHMA Finish codes per ANSI A156.18.
3. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.
4. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
5. Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule.
6. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
7. Mounting locations for hardware.
8. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing.
9. List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and
phone number.
10. Catalog cuts.
11. Manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for electronic
hardware.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
Specifications 08710-1
B. Bid and submit manufacturer's updated/improved item if scheduled item is discontinued.
C. Deviations: Highlight, encircle or otherwise identify deviations from "Schedule of Finish
Hardware" on submittal with notations clearly designating those portions as deviating
from this section.
D. If discrepancy between drawings and scheduled material in this section, bid the more
expensive of the two choices, note the discrepancy in the submittal and request direction
from Architect for resolution.
E. Substitutions per Division 1. Include product data and indicate benefit to the Project.
Furnish operating samples on request.
F. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers have been requested by Owner to meet
existing standard.
G. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including keying
schedule, wiring diagrams, manufacturers' installation, adjustment and maintenance
information, and supplier's final inspection report.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Qualifications:
1. Hardware supplier: direct factory contract supplier who employs a certified
architectural hardware consultant (AHC), available at reasonable times during
course of work for project hardware consultation to Owner, Architect and
Contractor.
a) Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware.
Detailing implies that the submitted schedule of hardware is correct and
complete for the intended function and performance of the openings.
B. Hardware: Free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware
(latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one manufacturer.
C. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special
knowledge or effort.
D. Note: scheduled resilient seals may exceed selected door manufacturer's requirements.
E. See 2.6.E for added information regarding resilient seals.
F. Furnish hardware items required to complete the work in accordance with specified
performance level and design intent, complying with manufacturers' instructions.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Delivery: coordinate delivery to appropriate locations (shop or field).
1. Permanent cylinders: secured delivery direct to Owner's representative.
B. Acceptance at Site: Items individually packaged in manufacturers' original containers,
complete with proper fasteners and related pieces. Clearly mark packages to indicate
contents, locations in hardware schedule and door numbers.
C. Storage: Provide securely locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture,
sunlight, paint, chemicals, dust, excessive heat and cold, etc.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION:
A. Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished shape or size of
members requiring hardware, provide suitable types having as nearly as practical the
same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval.
B. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper
design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar
requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of
omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents. Furnish related trades
with the following information:
1. Location of embedded and attached items to concrete.
2. Location of wall-mounted hardware, including wall stops.
3. Location of finish floor materials and floor-mounted hardware.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
Specifications 08710-2
c.
1.7
4. Locations for conduit and raceways as needed for electrical hardware items.
Manufacturer templates to door and frame fabricators.
Check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will
be made for proper hardware installation.
WARRANTY:
A. Part of respective manufacturers' regular terms of sale. Provide manufacturers' written
warranties:
1. Locksets:
2. Exit Devices:
3. Closers:
4. Hinges:
5. Continuous Hinges
6. Other Hardware
Three years
Three years mechanical
One year electrical
Ten years mechanical
One year
Life of the Installation
Two years
1.8 COMMISSIONING:
A. Conduct these tests prior to request for certificate of substantial completion:
1. With installer present, test door hardware operation with climate control system
and stairwell pressurization system both at rest and while in full operation.
2. With installer, access control contractor and electrical contractor present, test
electrical hardware systems for satisfactory operation.
PART 2PRODUCTS
A. Listed acceptable alternate manufacturers: submit for review products with equivalent
function and features of scheduled products.
ITEM:
Hinges
Continuous Hinges
Key System
Locks
Exit Devices
Closers
Auto Flush Bolts
Coordinators
Silencers
Push & Pull Plates
Kickplates
Stops & Holders
Overhead Stops
MANUFACTURER:
(IVE) Ives
(IVE) Ives
(C-R) Corbin-Russwin
(SCH) Schlage
(VON) Von Duprin
(LCN) LCN
(IVE) Ives
(IVE) Ives
(IVE) Ives
(IVE) Ives
(IVE) Ives
(IVE) Ives
(GLY) Glynn-Johnson
ACCEPTABLE SUB:
Bommer
Pemko
Owner's Standard
Owner's Standard
Owner's Standard
Owner's Standard
DCI
DCI
Rockwood
Rockwood
Rockwood
Rockwood
None available
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-3
Thresholds (NGP) NGP Zero
Seals & Bottoms (NGP) NGP Reese
Key Cabinets (LUN) Lund TelKee
Signs SBH) Specialized Builders Hardware
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
2.2 HINGING METHODS:
A. Drawings typically depict doors at 90 degrees, doors will actually swing to maximum
allowable. Use wide-throw conventional or continuous hinges as needed up to 8 inches
in width to allow door to stand parallel to wall for true 180-degree opening. Advise
architect if 8-inch width is insufficient.
B. Conform to manufacturer's published hinge selection standard for door dimensions,
weight and frequency, and to hinge selection as scheduled. Where manufacturer's
standard exceeds the scheduled product, furnish the heavier of the two choices, notify
Architect of deviation from scheduled hardware.
C. Conventional Hinges: Steel or stainless steel pins and concealed bearings. Hinge open
widths minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door swing.
1. Outswinging exterior doors: non-ferrous with non-removable (NRP) pins and
security studs.
2. Non-ferrous material exteriors and at doors subject to corrosive atmospheric
conditions.
D. Continuous Hinges:
1. Geared-type aluminum.
a) Use wide-throw units where needed for maximum degree of swing,
advise architect if commonly available hinges are insufficient.
2. At masonry construction, coordinate with the anchoring and hollow metal supplier
prior to frame installation, by placing a strip of insulation on the back of the hollow
metal frame behind the rabbet section. When the frame is grouted in place, the
backing will allow drilling and tapping without dulling or breaking the installer's
bits.
2.3 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS:
A. Mortise Locksets and Latchsets: Shall be Schlage L9000 Series as scheduled.
1. Chassis: cold-rolled steel, handing field-changeable without disassembly.
2. Latchbolts: 3/4 inch throw stainless steel anti-friction type.
3. Lever Trim: through-bolted, accessible design, cast lever or solid extruded bar
type levers as scheduled. Filled hollow tube design unacceptable.
a) Spindles: security design independent breakaway. Breakage of outside
lever does not allow access to inside lever's hubworks to gain wrongful
entry.
b) Inside lever applied by screwless shank mounting - no exposed trim
mount screws
c) Outside and inside trim thru-bolted together and through the door
4. Spring-loaded fusible link provides fail secure mode in case of fire.
5. Universal lock case - 10 functions in one case.
6. Floating mounting tabs automatically adjusts to fit a beveled door edge.
7. Field reversible handing without opening lock case.
8. External spring cages allow for simple trim retrofit.
9. Lever rotation in both directions(up & down) for ease of use.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
Specifications 08710-4
10. At Vandlgard locks, locked lever freely rotates down while remaining securely
locked. This feature prevents damage to internal lock components when
subjected to excessive force
11. Independent lever rotation.
12. Furnish solid cylinder collars with wave springs. Wall of collar to cover rim of
mortise cylinder.
13. Thumbturns: accessible design not requiring pinching or twisting motions to
operate.
14. Deadbolts: stainless steel 1-inch throw.
15. Electric operation: Manufacturer-installed continuous duty solenoid.
16. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1 inch deep box construction,
lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
17. Scheduled Lock Series and Design: Schlage L series, 17A design.
18. Certifications:
a) ANSI A156.13, 1994, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security.
b) ANSI/ASTM F476-84 Grade 31 UL Listed.
2.4 EXIT DEVICES / PANIC HARDWARE
A. General features: Shall be Von Duprin 98 Series as scheduled.
1. Independent lab-tested 1,000,000 cycles.
2. Push-through push-pad design. No exposed push-pad fasteners, no exposed
cavities when operated. Return stroke fluid dampeners and rubber bottoming
dampeners, plus anti-rattle devices.
3. 0.75-inch throw deadlocking latchbolts.
4. End caps: impact-resistant, flush-mounted. No raised edges or lips to catch carts
or other equipment.
5. No exposed screws to show through glass doors.
6. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all
functions, no extra parts required to effect change of function.
7. Releasable in normal operation with 15-lb. maximum operating force per
California State Fire Marshal Standard 12-10-3, and with 32 Ib. maximum
pressure under 250-lb. load to the door.
8. Flush end cap design as opposed to typical "bottle-cap" design end cap.
9. Where devices span over door lite frame and the face of the selected lite manufacturer's
frame is raised from the face of the door, furnish panic hardware manufacturer's fitted
shims or glass-bead kits at no additional cost to the project.
10. Comply with CBC Section 1008.1.9.
B. Specific features:
1. Non-Fire Rated Devices: cylinder dogging.
2. Lever Trim: breakaway type, forged brass or bronze escutcheon min .130" thickness,
compression spring drive, match lockset lever design.
3. Electrically Operated Devices: Single manufacturer source for electric latch
retraction devices, electrically controlled trim, power transfers, power supplies,
monitoring switches and controls.
2.5 CLOSERS
A. Surface Closers: [4011/4111]
1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast iron
body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome-
silicon steel spring.
2. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code.
3. Independent lab-tested 10,000,000 cycles.
4. Non-sized and adjustable. Place closers inside building, stairs and rooms.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
Specifications 08710 - 5
5. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular
header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware.
6. Adjustable to open with not more than S.OIbs pressure to open at exterior doors
and S.OIbs at interior doors. As allowed per California Building Code, Section
1133B.2.5, local authority may increase the allowable pressure for fire doors to
achieve positive latching, but not to exceed 15lbs.
7. When provided, the sweep period'of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an
open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a
point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the landing side of the door.
8. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck,
fourth valve for delayed action where scheduled.
9. Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units. EDA
arms: rigid main and forearm, reinforced elbow.
10. Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test, furnish
data on request.
11. Exterior doors: seasonal adjustments not required for temperatures from 120
degrees F to -30 degrees F, furnish checking fluid data on request.
12. Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires.
13. Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) not permitted.
14. Supply Special Rust Inhibitor(SRI) at corrosive environments. This special
corrosion resistant pretreatment, when added to the powder coat finish, gives the
closer a tremendous advantage over a potentially corrosive environment.
B. Surface Closers: [4041]
1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast iron
body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome-
silicon steel spring.
2. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code.
3. Independent lab-tested 10,000,000 cycles.
4. Non-sized, non-handed, and adjustable. Place closer inside building, stairs, and
rooms.
5. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular
header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware.
6. Adjustable to open with not more than S.OIbs pressure to open at exterior doors
and S.OIbs at interior doors. As allowed per California Building Code, Section
1133B.2.5, local authority may increase the allowable pressure for fire doors to
achieve positive latching, but not to exceed 15lbs.
7. When provided, the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an
open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a
point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the landing side of the door.
8. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck,
fourth valve for delayed action where scheduled.
9. Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires.
10. Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) not permitted.
11. Supply Special Rust Inhibitor(SRI) at corrosive environments. This special
corrosion resistant pretreatment, when added to the powder coat finish, gives the
closer a tremendous advantage over a potentially corrosive environment.
2.6 OTHER HARDWARE
A. Automatic Flush Bolts: Low operating force design.
B. Overhead Stops: Non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Field-
changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
Specifications 08710-6
C. Kick Plates: Rounded and relieved edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height and
width as scheduled. Sheet-metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other
hardware.
D. Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware.
1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor type with appropriate
fasteners. Where floor type cannot be used, provide wall type. If neither can be
used, provide overhead type.
2. Locate overhead stops for maximum possible opening. Consult with Owner for
furniture locations. Minimum: 90deg stop / 95deg deadstop. Note degree of
opening in submittal.
E. Seals: Finished to match adjacent frame color. Resilient seal material: polyurethane,
polypropylene, nylon brush, silicone rubber or solid high-grade neoprene as scheduled.
Do not furnish vinyl seal material. UL label applied to seals on rated doors. Substitute
products: certify that the products equal or exceed specified material's thickness and
durability.
1. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.
2. Solid neoprene: MIL Spec. R6855-CL III, Grade 40.
3. Non-corroding fasteners at in-swinging exterior doors.
4. Sound control openings: Use components tested as a system using nationally
accepted standards by independent laboratories. Ensure that the door leafs
have the necessary sealed-in-place STC ratings. Fasten applied seals over
bead of sealant.
F. Automatic door bottoms: low operating force units. Doors with automatic door bottoms
plus head and jamb seals cannot require more than two pounds operating force to open
when closer is disconnected.
G. Thresholds: As scheduled and per details. Comply with CBC Section 1133B.2.4.1.
Substitute products: certify that the products equal or exceed specified material's
thickness. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.
1. Exteriors: Seal perimeter to exclude water and vermin. Use sealant complying with
requirements in Division 7 "Thermal and Moisture Protection". Non-ferrous 1/4inch
fasteners and lead expansion shield anchors, or Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or
approved equivalent) Flat Head Sleeve Anchors (SS/FHSL).
2. Plastic plugs with wood or sheet metal screws are not an acceptable substitute for
specified fastening methods.
3. Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive. Pinned
TORX drive at high security areas. Flat head sleeve anchors (FHSL) may be
slotted drive. Sheet metal and wood screws: full-thread. Sleeve nuts: full length
to prevent door compression.
H. Exposed Through-Bolts: Do not use SNB, grommet nuts, sleeve nuts or other such
clamping type fasteners, intent is for minimal exposed hardware. Coordinate with wood
doors; ensure provision of proper blocking to support wood screws for mounting panic
hardware and door closers. Coordinate with metal doors and frames; ensure provision of
proper reinforcement to support machine screws for mounting panic hardware and door
closers.
I. Silencers: Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of doors. Omit
where adhesive mounted seal occurs. Leave no unfilled/uncovered pre-punched silencer
holes.
2.7 FINISH:
A. Generally BHMA 626 Satin Chromium OR BHMA 630 Satin Stainless-Steel.
1. Areas using BHMA 626 to have push-plates, pulls and protection plates of BHMA
630, Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise noted.
B. Door closers: factory powder coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
Specifications 08710-7
C. Aluminum items: match predominant adjacent material. Seals to coordinate with frame
color.
2.8 KEYING REQUIREMENTS:
A. Key System: existing Corbin-Russwin system. Initiate and conduct meeting(s) with
Owner to determine system structure, furnish Owner's written approval of the system.
Furnish temporary construction-keyed cylinders.
1. Temporary cylinders/cores remain Owner's property.
2. Furnish 10 construction keys.
3. Permanent cylinders are standard type, not interchangeable-core type.
4. Furnish all permanent cylinders to Owner "0" bitted.
5. Permanent keyway is Corbin 59A1 (verify with Owner).
6. All permanent cylinders are keyed and installed by Owner's representative,
Village Lock and Key, of Carlsbad, CA.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS:
A. Can read and understand manufacturers' templates, suppliers' hardware schedules and
printed installation instructions. Can readily distinguish drywall screws from
manufacturers' furnished fasteners. Available to meet with manufacturers'
representatives and related trades to discuss installation of hardware.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation. Make
corrections before commencing hardware installation.
B. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and
security codes.
1. Notify Architect of code conflicts before ordering material.
2. Locate levers, key cylinders, t-turn pieces, touchbars and other operable portions
of latching hardware between 30 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor, per
CBC Section 1133B.2.5.1.
C. Overhead stops: before installing, determine proposed locations of furniture items,
fixtures, and other items to be protected by the overhead stop's action.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not install
surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units level,
plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper
installation and operation. Remove and reinstall or replace work deemed defective by
Architect.
1. Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim strikes,
etc; fasten hardware over and through these seals. Install sweeps across
bottoms of doors before astragals, cope sweeps around bottom pivots, trim
astragals to tops of sweeps.
2. Use manufacturers' fasteners furnished with hardware items, or submit Request
for Substitution with Architect.
3. Replace fasteners damaged by power-driven tools.
B. Locate floor stops no more that 4 inches from walls and not within paths of travel. See
paragraph 2.2 regarding hinge widths, door should be well clear of point of wall reveal.
Point of door contact no closer to the hinge edge than half the door width. Where
situation is questionable or difficult, contact Architect for direction.
C. Core concrete for exterior door stop anchors. Set anchors in approved non-shrink grout.
D. Locate overhead stops for minimum 90 degrees and maximum allowable degree of
swing.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
Specifications 08710-8
3.4. ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which cannot be
adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
1. Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods: repair or
replace to Owner's satisfaction.
2. Adjust doors to fully latch with no more than 1 pound of pressure.
B. Inspection: Use hardware supplier's consultant or consultant's agent. Include supplier's
report with closeout documents.
C. Final inspection: Installer to provide letter to Owner that upon completion installer has
visited the Project and has accomplished the following:
1. Re-adjust hardware.
2. Evaluate maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and
instruct Owner's personnel.
3. Identify items that have deteriorated or failed.
4. Submit written report identifying problems
3.5 DEMONSTRATION:
A. Demonstrate mechanical hardware and electrical hardware systems, including
adjustment and maintenance procedures.
3.6 PROTECTION/CLEANING:
A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows,
etc. Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion.
B. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation/reinstallation
process.
3.7 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
A. See door schedule in drawings for hardware set assignments.
B. Manufacturers and their abbreviations used in this schedule
B/O By Others
C-R Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware
GLY Glynn-Johnson
IVE H.B. Ives
LCN LCN Closers
LUN Lund
NGP National Guard Products
REE Reese Weatherstripping & Thresholds
SBH Specialized Builders Products
SCH Schlage Lock Company
STA Stanley Hardware
VON Von Duprin
Heading 001
1 SGL DOOR S39 EXTERIOR / BULLET TRAP
1 SGL DOOR S42 EXTERIOR / BULLET TRAP
Each Assembly to have:
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9480P17A 630 SCH
1 EA CYLINDER CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED 626 C-R
1 EA OVERHEAD HOLDER 810H 630 GLY
1 SET SEALS 9700A AL NGP
1 EA AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 220NA AL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP
INSTALL HEAD SEAL BEFORE HOLDER
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
Specifications 08710 - 9
Heading 002
Heading
Heading
Heading
1 SGL DOOR S12
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA PANIC HARDWARE
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA OVERHEAD STOP
EA THRESHOLD
EXTERIOR / HALL
224HD
98EO
4021 SRI
100S-ADJ
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
PERIMETER AND BOTTOM SEALS BY DOOR MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
628 IVE
630 VON
689 LCN
630 GLY
AL NGP
003
1 SGL DOOR S27
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA PANIC HARDWARE
EA CYLINDER
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA OVERHEAD HOLDER
EA THRESHOLD
EXTERIOR / ELEC
224HD 628 IVE
98NL 630 VON
CYLINDER PER UTILITY COMPANY REQUIREMENTS 626 SCH
4021 SRI 689 LCN
100H-ADJ 630 GLY
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL AL NGP
PERIMETER AND BOTTOM SEALS BY DOOR MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
004
1 SGL DOOR S26 EXTERIOR / HALL
Each Assembly to have:
EA POWER TRANSFER
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA PANIC HARDWARE
EA RIM CYLINDER
EA CYLINDER
EA OFFSET DOOR PULL
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA OVERHEAD STOP
EA THRESHOLD
EA POWER SUPPLY
PERIMETER AND BOTTOM SEALS BY
ACCESS CONTROLS, POWER, WIRING BY OTHERS
EPT-10
224HD X EPT PREP
RX-EL98NL-OP
20-022
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
8190-0-L
4021 SRI
100S-ADJ
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
PS873-2
DOOR
689 VON
628 IVE
630 VON
626 SCH
626 C-R
630 IVE
689 LCN
630 GLY
AL NGP
GRY VON
MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
005
1 SGL DOOR S37 EXTERIOR / STORAGE
Each Assembly to have:
EA POWER TRANSFER EPT-10
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD X EPT PREP
EA CYLINDER CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
EA EU STOREROOML9080PEU-RX17A
LOCK
EA SURFACE CLOSER 4110 SHCUSH SRI
EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LOW
689 VON
628 IVE
626 C-R
630 SCH
689 LCN
630 IVE
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-10
Heading
Heading
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Heading
1
1
1
1
1
3
Heading
SET SEALS
EA DOOR SWEEP
EA THRESHOLD
EA POWER SUPPLY
5050B
200NA
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
PS873
ACCESS CONTROLS, POWER, WIRING BY OTHERS
1 SQL DOOR S28
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA STOREROOM LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA OVERHEAD STOP
EA THRESHOLD
EXTERIOR / FIRE RISER
224HD
L9480P17A
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
4021 SRI
100S-ADJ
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
PERIMETER AND BOTTOM SEALS BY DOOR MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
1 SGL DOOR S43
1 SGL DOOR S44
EXTERIOR 7 RESTROOM
EXTERIOR / RESTROOM
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD
EA INDICATOR PRIVL9496P 17A L583-363
LOCK
CYLINDER
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
FLOOR STOP
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET SEALS
EA DOOR SWEEP
EA THRESHOLD
EA RESTROOM SIGN
1 SGL DOOR S45
1 SGL DOOR S46
1 SGL DOOR S47
1 SGL DOOR S48
1 SGL DOOR S49
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA MORTISE DEADBOLT
EA CYLINDER
EA FLOOR STOP
EA THRESHOLD
EA SILENCER
1 SGL DOOR S30
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
4011 DEL SRI
840010"X2"LDW
FS448
5050B
200NA
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
SB443/444/445 AS REQUIRED
EXTERIOR /
EXTERIOR /
EXTERIOR /
EXTERIOR /
EXTERIOR /
STOREFRONT PROP
STOREFRONT PROP
STOREFRONT PROP
STOREFRONT PROP
STOREFRONT PROP
224HD
L463P
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
FS448
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
EXTERIOR / VESTIBULE
BRN NGP
AL NGP
AL NGP
GRY VON
006
628 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
689 LCN
630 GLY
AL NGP
007
628 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
689 LCN
630 IVE
626 IVE
BRN NGP
AL NGP
AL NGP
BLU SBH
008
628 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
626 IVE
AL NGP
GRY IVE
009
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-11
Heading
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Heading
Heading
Each Assembly to have:
EA POWER TRANSFER EPT-10
CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD X EPT PREP
FIRE EXIT HARDWARERX-EL98NL-F
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
RIM CYLINDER
CYLINDER
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
SET SEALS
EA DOOR SWEEP
EA THRESHOLD
EA POWER SUPPLY
20-022
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
4110SCUSHSRI
840010"X2"LDW
50508
200NA
THRESHOLD AS REQUIRED FOR FIRE RATING
PS873-2
ACCESS CONTROLS, POWER, WIRING BY OTHERS
689
628
626
626
626
689
630
BRN
AL
AL
GRY
010
VON
IVE
VON
SCH
C-R
LCN
IVE
NGP
NGP
NGP
VON
1 SGL DOOR S33
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA STOREROOM LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA KICK PLATE
EA FLOOR STOP
SET SEALS
EA DOOR SWEEP
EA THRESHOLD
1 SGL DOOR G01
PARKING / STORAGE
224HD
L9480P 17A
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
4011 SRI
840010"X2"LDW
FS448
5050B
200NA
THRESHOLD AS REQUIRED FOR FIRE RATING
EXTERIOR / STAIR
628
630
626
689
630
626
BRN
AL
AL
011
IVE
SCH
C-R
LCN
IVE
IVE
NGP
NGP
NGP
Each Assembly to have:
EA STOREROOM LOCK LV9080P 17A
EA CYLINDER CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
EA SECURITY FLOORFS18L
STOP
BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY GATE
GATE SIZES MAY VARY
1 SGL DOOR G02 EXTERIOR / GROUNDS
Each Assembly to have:
EA STOREROOM LOCK LV9080P 17A
EA CYLINDER CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211FSEEB
EA SECURITY FLOORFS18L
STOP
EA POWER SUPPLY PS861
ACCESS CONTROLS, POWER, WIRING
BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY GATE
GATE SIZES MAY VARY
630 SCH
626 C-R
BLK IVE
MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
012
630 SCH
626 C-R
630 VON
BLK IVE
GRY VON
BY OTHERS
MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-12
Heading 013
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
Heading
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
Heading
2
1
1
1
1
1
Heading
1 PR DOOR S01
1 PR DOOR S02
Each Assembly to have:
EA POWER TRANSFER
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA PANIC HARDWARE
EA PANIC HARDWARE
EA RIM CYLINDER
EA CYLINDER
EA OFFSET DOOR PULL
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA OVERHEAD HOLDER
EA THRESHOLD
EA POWER SUPPLY
PERIMETER AND BOTTOM SEALS BY
ACCESS CONTROLS, POWER, WIRING BY OTHERS
EXTERIOR / LOBBY
EXTERIOR / LOBBY
EPT-10
224HD X EPT PREP
RX-EL9847EO
RX-EL9847NL-OP
20-022
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
8190-0-L
4021 SRI
100H-ADJ
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
PS873-2
DOOR
689 VON
628 IVE
630 VON
626 VON
626 SCH
626 C-R
630 IVE
689 LCN
630 GLY
AL NGP
GRY VON
MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
014
1 PR DOOR S35
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT
EA DUST PROOF STRIKE
EA STOREROOM LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA COORDINATOR
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA OVERHEAD STOP
EA KICK PLATE
SET SEALS
EA DOOR SWEEP
EA THRESHOLD
PARKING / STORAGE
224HD
FB31P
DP1/2 AS REQUIRED
L9480P 17A
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
COR COMPLETE
4011 SRI
100S-ADJ
8400 10"X1"LDW
5050B
200NA
THRESHOLD AS REQUIRED FOR FIRE RATING
628
630
626
630
626
628
689
630
630
BRN
AL
AL
IVE
IVE
IVE
SCH
C-R
IVE
LCN
GLY
IVE
NGP
NGP
NGP
ASTRAGALS BY DOOR MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
015
1 SGL DOOR S38
1 SGL DOOR S41
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE
EA PASSAGE SET
EA OVERHEAD HOLDER
SET SEALS
EXTERIOR ACCESS DOOR / BULLET TRAP
EXTERIOR ACCESS DOOR / BULLET TRAP
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
L9010 17A
81 OH
9700A
EA AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 220NA
EA THRESHOLD THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
INSTALL HEAD SEAL BEFORE HOLDER
630 IVE
630 SCH
630 GLY
AL NGP
NGP
NGP
AL
AL
016
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-13
1 SGL DOOR S14 HALL / JANITOR
4
1
1
1
1
1
Heading
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Heading
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Heading
4
1
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE
EA STOREROOM LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA KICK PLATE
EA MOP PLATE
EA FLOOR STOP
HOLDER
EA THRESHOLD
1 SGL DOOR S04
1 SGL DOOR S23
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
L9080P 17A
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
840010"X2"LDW
8400 4" X 2" LOW
&FS40 SERIES
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
LOBBY / HALL
HALL / CONTROL ROOM
630 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
630 IVE
630 IVE
626 IVE
AL NGP
017
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
EA POWER TRANSFER EPT-10
EA CYLINDER CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
EA EU STOREROOML9080PEU-RX 17A
LOCK
4011 SRI
FS448
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
PS873
EA
EA
EA
EA
SURFACE CLOSER
FLOOR STOP
THRESHOLD
POWER SUPPLY
ACCESS CONTROLS, POWER, WIRING BY OTHERS
630 IVE
689 VON
626 C-R
630 SCH
689 LCN
626 IVE
AL NGP
GRY VON
018
1 SGL DOOR 508
1 SGL DOOR S09
STORAGE / ARMORY
CHECK-IN / ARMORY
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
EA POWER TRANSFER EPT-10
EA CYLINDER CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
EA EU STOREROOML9080PEU-RX 17A
LOCK
EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 SRI
EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LOW
EA FLOOR STOP &FS40 SERIES
HOLDER
SET SEALS 5050B
EA AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 220NA
EA THRESHOLD THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
EA POWER SUPPLY PS873
ACCESS CONTROLS, POWER, WIRING BY OTHERS
630 IVE
689 VON
626 C-R
630 SCH
689 LCN
630 IVE
626 IVE
BRN NGP
AL NGP
AL NGP
GRY VON
019
1 SGL DOOR S10 HALL / TELE/DATA
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
EA POWER TRANSFER EPT-10
630 IVE
689 VON
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-14
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
Heading
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
Heading
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Heading
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
CYLINDER CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
EU STOREROOML9080PEU-RX17A
LOCK
4011 SRI
840010"X2"LDW
&FS40 SERIES
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
FLOOR STOP
HOLDER
THRESHOLD
SILENCER
POWER SUPPLY
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
PS873
ACCESS CONTROLS, POWER, WIRING BY OTHERS
626 C-R
630 SCH
689 LCN
630 IVE
626 IVE
AL NGP
GRY IVE
GRY VON
020
1 SQL DOOR S22 CHECK-IN / CONTROL ROOM
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
EA POWER TRANSFER EPT-10
EA EU STOREROOML9080PEU-RX 17A
LOCK
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
FLOOR STOP
THRESHOLD
SILENCER
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA POWER SUPPLY
4011 SRI
840010"X2"LDW
FS448
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
PS873
ACCESS CONTROLS, POWER, WIRING BY OTHERS
1 SGL DOOR S19
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA PUSH PLATE
EA PULL PLATE
EA SURFACE CLOSER
SET SEALS
EA
EA
CHECK-IN / VESTIBULE
224HD
8200 8" X 16"
8303-0 4" X 16"
4110SHCUSHSRI
9700A
AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 220NA
THRESHOLD THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
INSTALL HEAD SEAL BEFORE CLOSER
1 SGL DOOR S20 RANGE / VESTIBULE
1 SGL DOOR S25 RANGE / VESTIBULE
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA PUSH PLATE
EA PULL PLATE
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA FLOOR STOP
HOLDER
SET SEALS
EA
EA
224HD
8200 8" X 16"
8303-0 4" X 16"
4011 SRI
&FS40 SERIES
9700A
AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 220NA
THRESHOLD THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
630 IVE
689 VON
630 SCH
689 LCN
630 IVE
626 IVE
AL NGP
GRY IVE
GRY VON
021
628 IVE
630 IVE
630 IVE
689 LCN
AL NGP
AL NGP
AL NGP
022
628 IVE
630 IVE
630 IVE
689 LCN
626 IVE
AL NGP
AL NGP
AL NGP
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-15
Heading 023
1 SGL DOOR S24 HALL / VESTIBULE
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
PUSH PLATE
PULL PLATE
SURFACE CLOSER
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
224HD
8200 4" X 16"
8303-0 4" X 16"
4110SHCUSHSRI
BLADE STOP SPACER 4110-61 AS REQUIRED
AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 220NA
THRESHOLD THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
628 IVE
630 IVE
630 IVE
689 LCN
689 LCN
AL NGP
AL NGP
PERIMETER SEALS BY DOOR MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
Heading 024
1 SGL DOOR S13
1 SGL DOOR S15
Each Assembly to have:
HINGE
PUSH PLATE
PULL PLATE
SURFACE CLOSER
FLOOR STOP
THRESHOLD
SILENCER
RESTROOM SIGN
1 SGL DOOR S29
Each Assembly to have:
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
1 EA PUSH PLATE
1 EA PULL PLATE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA FLOOR STOP
1 EA THRESHOLD
3 EA SILENCER
4
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
Heading
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
HALL / RESTROOM
HALL / RESTROOM
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
8200 8" X 16"
8303-0 4" X 16"
4011 DEL SRI
FS448
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
SB443/444/445 AS REQUIRED
VESTIBULE / STAIR
224HD
8200 8" X 16"
8303-0 4" X 16"
4011 SRI
FS448
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
630 IVE
630 IVE
630 IVE
689 LCN
626 IVE
AL NGP
GRY IVE
BLU SBH
025
628 IVE
630 IVE
630 IVE
689 LCN
626 IVE
AL NGP
GRY IVE
Heading 026
1 SGL DOOR S62
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA PUSH PLATE
EA PULL PLATE
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA FLOOR STOP
EA SILENCER
STAIR / VESTIBULE
224HD
8200 8" X 16"
8303-0 4" X 16"
4011 SRI
FS448
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
628 IVE
630 IVE
630 IVE
689 LCN
626 IVE
GRY IVE
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-16
Heading 027
4
1
1
1
Heading
4
1
1
1
1
1 SQL DOOR 805
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE
EA OFFICE LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA FLOOR STOP
1 SGL DOOR S06
HALL / OFFICE
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
L9050P17AL583-363
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
FS448
HALL / STORAGE
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 17A
EA CYLINDER CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
EA OVERHEAD HOLDER 810H X SHIM AS REQUIRED
EA THRESHOLD THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
630 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
626 IVE
028
630 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
630 GLY
AL NGP
PERIMETER AND BOTTOM SEALS BY DOOR MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
Heading
4
1
1
1
3
1 SGL DOOR S17
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE
EA STOREROOM LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA OVERHEAD HOLDER
EA SILENCER
CONFERENCE / STORAGE
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
L9080P17A
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
81 OH
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
029
630 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
630 GLY
GRY IVE
Heading
4
1
1
1
1
1
3
Heading
1 SGL DOOR S34
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE
EA STOREROOM LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA ARMOR PLATE
EA FLOOR STOP
HOLDER
EA THRESHOLD
EA SILENCER
1 SGL DOOR S11
Each Assembly to have:
STORAGE / STORAGE
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
L9080P 17A
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
8400 36" X 2" LOW
&FS40 SERIES
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
HALL / SHOWER
030
630 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
630 IVE
626 IVE
AL NGP
GRY IVE
031
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-17
4 EA HINGE
1 EA INDICATOR
LOCK
1 EA CYLINDER
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 EA FLOOR STOP
1 EA THRESHOLD
3 EA SILENCER
1 EA RESTROOM SIGN
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
PRIVL9496P 17A L583-363
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
4011 DEL SRI
840010"X2"LDW
FS448
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
SB443/444/445 AS REQUIRED
630 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
689 LCN
630 IVE
626 IVE
AL NGP
GRY IVE
BLU SBH
Heading
4
1
1
1 SQL DOOR S16
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE
EA PASSAGE SET
EA FLOOR STOP
HALL / CONFERENCE
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
L9010 17A
FS448
032
630 IVE
630 SCH
626 IVE
Heading
4
1
1
1
Heading
4
1
1
1
1
3
1 SGL DOOR S18
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE
EA CLASSROOM LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA FLOOR STOP
1 SGL DOOR S21
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE
EA CLASSROOM LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA FLOOR STOP
HOLDER
EA THRESHOLD
EA SILENCER
HALL / PRISM
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
L9070P 17A
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
FS448
CHECK-IN / CLEANING
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
L9070P17A
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
&FS40 SERIES
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
033
630 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
626 IVE
034
630 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
626 IVE
AL NGP
GRY IVE
Heading
1 SGL DOOR S50
Each Assembly to have:
035
STOREFRONT PROP / RANGE
ALL HARDWARE
MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
SEE RELATED SECTION 8305
BY DOOR B/0
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-18
Heading 036
4
1
1
1
1
1
Heading
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SGL DOOR SOS
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE
EA STOREROOM LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA FLOOR STOP
EA THRESHOLD
LOBBY / ELEV MACH
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
L9080P 17A
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
4011 SRI
FS448
THRESHOLD AS REQUIRED FOR FIRE RATING
SEALS BY FRAME MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
SGL DOOR
SGL DOOR
S57
S58
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE
EA PASSAGE SET
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA FLOOR STOP
SET SEALS
EA THRESHOLD
EA RESTROOMSIGN
CORRIDOR / RESTROOM
CORRIDOR / RESTROOM
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
L901017A
4011 DEL SRI
FS448
5050B
THRESHOLD AS REQUIRED FOR FIRE RATING
SB443/444/445 AS REQUIRED
630 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
689 LCN
626 IVE
AL NGP
037
630 IVE
630 SCH
689 LCN
626 IVE
BRN NGP
AL NGP
BLU SBH
Heading
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SGL DOOR S59
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE
EA STOREROOM LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA OVERHEAD STOP
EA KICK PLATE
SET SEALS
EA THRESHOLD
CORRIDOR / STORAGE
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
L9080P 17A
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
4011 SRI
81 OS
840010"X2"LDW
5050B
THRESHOLD AS REQUIRED FOR FIRE RATING
038
630 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
689 LCN
630 GLY
630 IVE
BRN NGP
AL NGP
Heading
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SGL DOOR S60
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE
EA STOREROOM LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA KICK PLATE
EA MOP PLATE
EA FLOOR STOP
SET SEALS
CORRIDOR / JANITOR
3CB1HVV 4.5X4.5
L9080P 17A
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
4011 DEL SRI
840010"X2"LDW
8400 4" X 2" LOW
FS448
5050B
039
630 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
689 LCN
630 IVE
630 IVE
626 IVE
BRN NGP
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-19
Heading
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Heading
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Heading
8
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
Heading
8
EA THRESHOLD
1 SGL DOOR S61
THRESHOLD AS REQUIRED FOR FIRE RATING
CORRIDOR / VESTIBULE
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD
EA
EA
EA
EA
SET
EA
1
1
1
1
FIRE EXIT HAP:DWA
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
FLOOR STOP
SEALS
THRESHOLD
SGL DOOR
SGL DOOR
SGL DOOR
SGL DOOR
S51
S52
S53
S54
4011 SRI
840010"X2"LDW
FS448
5050B
THRESHOLD AS REQUIRED FOR FIRE RATING
HALL / CLASSROOM
HALL / CLASSROOM
HALL / CLASSROOM
HALL / CLASSROOM
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE98L-F 996L 17
EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022
EA CYLINDER CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA SRI
EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4110-61 AS REQUIRED
EA FLOOR STOP FS448
EA THRESHOLD THRESHOLD AS REQUIRED FOR FIRE RATING
PERIMETER SEALS BY FRAME MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
1 PR DOOR S55
1 PR DOOR S56
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE
SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT
EA DUST PROOF STRIKE
EA STOREROOM LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA COORDINATOR
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA OVERHEAD STOP
SET SEALS
EA THRESHOLD
HALL / STORAGE
STORAGE / CLASSROOM
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
FB31P
DP1/2 AS REQUIRED
L9080P 17A
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
COR COMPLETE
4011 SRI
81 OS
5050B
THRESHOLD AS REQUIRED FOR FIRE RATING
ASTRAGALS BY DOOR MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
1 PR DOOR S07 STORAGE / STORAGE
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
AL NGP
040
628 IVE
626 VON
689 LCN
630 IVE
626 IVE
BRN NGP
AL NGP
041
630 IVE
626 VON
626 SCH
626 C-R
689 LCN
689 LCN
626 IVE
AL NGP
042
630 IVE
630 IVE
626 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
628 IVE
689 LCN
630 GLY
BRN NGP
AL NGP
043
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE 630 IVE
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-20
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
Heading
EA POWER TRANSFER
SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT
EA DUST PROOF STRIKE
CYLINDEREA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EPT-10
FB31P
DP1/2 AS REQUIRED
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
STOREROOML9080PEU-RX 17AEU
LOCK
COORDINATOR
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
SET SEALS
SET ASTRAGAL SEAL
COR COMPLETE
4110 SCUSH SRI
8400 10" X1" LOW
5050B
5060B
EA AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 220NA
EA THRESHOLD THRESHOLD AS REQUIRED FOR FIRE RATING
EA POWER SUPPLY PS873
689
630
626
626
630
628
689
630
BRN
BRN
AL
AL
GRY
VON
IVE
IVE
C-R
SCH
IVE
LCN
IVE
NGP
NGP
NGP
NGP
VON
ASTRAGALS BY DOOR
ACCESS CONTROLS, POWER, WIRING BY OTHERS
MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
044
1 PR DOOR S32 RANGE / STORAGE
Each Assembly to have:
ALL HARDWARE
MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
SEE RELATED SECTION 8305
BY DOOR B/O
Heading 045
1 SL DOOR S40
Each Assembly to have:
RANGE / RANGE
ALL HARDWARE
MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
SEE RELATED SECTION 8305
BY DOOR B/O
Heading 046
Heading
1 RU DOOR C10
1 RU DOOR R03
1 RU DOOR S31
1 RU DOOR S36
Each Assembly to have:
DOOR SIZES VARY
SGL DOOR
SGL DOOR
C05
R05
Each Assembly to have:
EA POWER TRANSFER
EXTERIOR / WAREHOUSE
EXTERIOR / GARAGE
EXTERIOR / STORAGE
EXTERIOR / STORAGE
ALL HARDWARE
MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
EXTERIOR / CONTROL
EXTERIOR / EQUIPMENT
EPT-10
BY DOOR B/O
P001
689 VON
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-21
Heading
Heading
1
1
1
1
1
2
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD X EPT PREP
EA CYLINDER CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
EA EU STOREROOML9080PEU-RX 17A
LOCK
4110SHCUSHSRI
840010"X2"LDW
5050B
101VA
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
PS873
EA
EA
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
SET SEALS
EA DRIP SWEEP
EA THRESHOLD
EA POWER SUPPLY
628 IVE
626 C-R
630 SCH
689 LCN
630 IVE
BRN NGP
AL NGP
AL NGP
GRY VON
ACCESS CONTROLS, POWER, WIRING BY OTHERS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
SE-
EA
EA
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SGL
SQL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
DOOR
DOOR
DOOR
DOOR
DOOR
DOOR
DOOR
DOOR
DOOR
DOOR
DOOR
DOOR
DOOR
DOOR
C04
C07
C23
C24
C28
C39
C41
C42
C46
C48
C50
C52
R02
R06
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA MORTISE DEADBOLT
EA CYLINDER
EA PASSAGE SET
EA WALL STOP
EA BRUSH
WEATHERSTRIP
EA SILENCER
P002
1 SGL DOOR C12
1 SGL DOOR C18
1 SGL DOOR C20
1 SGL DOOR C40
Each Assembly to have:
CONTINUOUS HINGE
MORTISE DEADBOLT
CYLINDER
PULL PLATE
OVERHEAD HOLDER
KICK PLATE
SEALS
DOOR SWEEP
THRESHOLD
EXTERIOR / EQUIPMENT
EXTERIOR / FIRE RISER
EXTERIOR / ELEC
EXTERIOR / EQUIPMENT
224HD
L463P
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
8303-0 4" X 16"
810H
840010"X2"LDW
5050B
200NA
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
EXTERIOR / STAIR
EXTERIOR / STAIR
EXTERIOR / TRAINING
EXTERIOR / TRAINING
EXTERIOR WALK / STAIR
EXTERIOR WALK / LIVING ROOM
EXTERIOR WALK / HALL
EXTERIOR WALK / LIVING ROOM
BALCONY / OFFICE
ROOF / STAIR
ROOF / STAIR
STAIR / OFFICE
EXTERIOR / GARAGE
EXTERIOR / KITCHEN
224HD
L463P
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
L9010 17A
WS407CVX X MASONRY ANCHOR
978C-18"
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
628 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
630 IVE
630 GLY
630 IVE
BRN NGP
AL NGP
AL NGP
POOS
628 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
630 SCH
630 IVE
628 REE
GRY IVE
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-22
Heading P004
1 SGL DOOR C09
Each Assembly to have:
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
1 EA MORTISE DEADBOLT
1 EA CYLINDER
1 EA WALL STOP
2 EA BRUSH
WEATHERSTRIP
3 EA SILENCER
Heading
1 SGL DOOR R01
Each Assembly to have:
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
1 EA MORTISE DEADBOLT
1 EA CYLINDER
1 EA WALL STOP
3 EA SILENCER
EXTERIOR / HALL
224HD
L463P
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
WS407CVX X MASONRY ANCHOR
978C-18"
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
EXTERIOR / ENTRY
224HD
L463P
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
WS407CVX X MASONRY ANCHOR
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
628 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
630 IVE
628 REE
GRY IVE
POOS
628 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
630 IVE
GRY IVE
Heading
Heading
P006
1
1
1
1
2
3
Heading
2
2
2
4
1 SGL DOOR C19
Each Assembly to have:
EA MORTISE DEADBOLT
EA CYLINDER
EXTERIOR / HALL
L463P
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
630 SCH
626 C-R
BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
P007
1 SGL DOOR C13
1 SGL DOOR C16
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA SURFACE BOLT
EA PULL PLATE
EA WALL STOP
EA BRUSH
WEATHERSTRIP
EA SILENCER
1 PR DOOR C01
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA SURFACE BOLT
EA PULL PLATE
EA BRUSH
EXTERIOR / RETAIL
EXTERIOR / RETAIL
224HD
SB454-12-TB
8303-0 4" X 16"
WS407CVX X MASONRY ANCHOR
978C-18"
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
[EXTERIOR / LOBBY
224HD
SB454-12-TB
8303-0 4" X 16"
978C-18"
628 IVE
652 IVE
630 IVE
630 IVE
628 REE
GRY IVE
POOS
628 IVE
652 IVE
630 IVE
628 REE
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-23
1
2
Heading
2
2
2
1
2
Heading
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
Heading
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
Heading
WEATHERSTRIP
EA THRESHOLD
EA SILENCER
1 PR DOOR C26
1 PR DOOR C44
1 PR DOOR C51
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA SURFACE BOLT
EA PULL PLATE
EA THRESHOLD
EA SILENCER
1 PR DOOR C49
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT
EA DUST PROOF STRIKE
EA STOREROOM LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA COORDINATOR
EA SURFACE CLOSER
EA ARMOR PLATE
SET SEALS
EA DRIP SWEEP
EA THRESHOLD
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
BALCONY / OFFICE
BALCONY / OFFICE
BALCONY / OFFICE
224HD
SB454-12-TB
8303-0 4" X 16"
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
ROOF / STORAGE
224HD
FB31P
DP1/2 AS REQUIRED
L9080P 17A
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
COR COMPLETE
4110SHCUSHSRI
8400 36" X1" LOW
5050B
101VA
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
AL NGP
GRY IVE
P009
628 IVE
652 IVE
630 IVE
AL NGP
GRY IVE
P010
628
630
626
630
626
628
689
630
BRN
AL
AL
IVE
IVE
IVE
SCH
C-R
IVE
LCN
IVE
NGP
NGP
NGP
ASTRAGALS BY DOOR MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
P011
1 SQL DOOR C45
1 SQL DOOR R09
Each Assembly to have:
EA HINGE
EA STOREROOM LOCK
EA CYLINDER
EA OVERHEAD HOLDER
SET SEALS
EA DOOR SWEEP
EA THRESHOLD
1 SGL DOOR
1 SGL DOOR
1 SGL DOOR
1 SGL DOOR
1 SGL DOOR
1 SGL DOOR
C02
C06
C11
C15
C17
C21
VESTIBULE / EQUIPMENT
VESTIBULE / EQUIPMENT
3CB1HW 4.5X4.5
L9080P 17A
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
810H
5050B
200NA
THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
LOBBY / CLOSET
TRAINING / BEDROOM
HALL / WAREHOUSE
HALL / RETAIL
FIRE RISER / RETAIL
HALL / TRAINING
630 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
630 GLY
BRN NGP
AL NGP
AL NGP
P012
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-24
1
11
3
Heading
1
1
1
2
Heading
1
1
1
1
1
2
Heading
SGL DOOR
SGL DOOR
SGL DOOR
SGL DOOR
SGL DOOR
SGL DOOR
C25
C29
C30
C32
C36
C38
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA PASSAGE SET
EA WALL STOP
EA SILENCER
1 SGL DOOR C43
1 SGL DOOR R04
1 SGL DOOR R07
1 SGL DOOR R08
Each Assembly to have:
EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
EA PASSAGE SET
EA WALL STOP
EA BRUSH
WEATHERSTRIP
SILENCEREA
11
11
1
11
11
SGL DOOR COS
SGL DOOR COS
SGL DOOR C14
SGL DOOR C22
SGL DOOR C27
SGL DOOR C31
SGL DOOR C34
SGL DOOR C37
SGL DOOR C47
Each Assembly to have:
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
1
1
CONTINUOUS HINGE
MORTISE DEADBOLT
CYLINDER
PASSAGE SET
WALL STOP
BRUSH
WEATHERSTRIP
SILENCER
SL DOOR C33
SL DOOR C35
Each Assembly to have:
EA BOX TRACK
HALL. / TRAINING
BEDROOM / BATH
LIVING ROOM / BEDROOM
HALL. / TRAINING
HALL / TRAINING
LIVING ROOM / BEDROOM
224HD
L9010 17A
WS407CVX X MASONRY ANCHOR
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
HALL / LIVING ROOM
GARAGE / DINING
ENTRY / STAIR
LIVING ROOM / BATH
224HD
L9010 17A
WS407CVX X MASONRY ANCHOR
978C-18"
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
LOBE3Y / STAIR
HALL / STAIR
HALL / RETAIL
HALL / TRAINING
OFFICE / STAIR
HALL / STAIR
HALL / TRAINING
HALL / LIVING ROOM
LOBEJY / STAIR
224HD
L463P
CYLINDER(S) AS REQUIRED
L9010 17A
WS407CVX X MASONRY ANCHOR
978C-18"
SR64/65/66 AS REQUIRED
TRAINING / CLOSET
TRAINING / CLOSET
XY2641
628 IVE
630 SCH
630 IVE
GRY IVE
P013
628 IVE
630 SCH
630 IVE
628 REE
GRY IVE
P014
628 IVE
630 SCH
626 C-R
630 SCH
630 IVE
628 REE
GRY IVE
P015
EG STA
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-25
4 EA TRACK HANGER BBXY2650 EG STA
2 EA HEAVY-DUTY HANDLE CD482 STA
3 EA EXTERIOR FASCIA BP250N-02 TOP AND SIDES - CUT TO LENGTH 628 STA
1 EA DUAL TRK FLOORSP2551 EG STA
GUIDE
2 EA HVY-DUTY STAYSP2560 EG STA
ROLLER
2 EA BOX TRACK END CAP XY2641-EC EG STA
MISC ITEMS
Qty
20
20
1
2
Description
PERMANENT CORE
PADLOCK
KEY CABINET
KEY CABINET
Catalog Number
CORE AS REQUIRED
KS43D3200
1201 -60 CAPACITY
C-20 20 CAPACITY
Hand Fin
626
452
GRY
GRY
Mfr
C-R
SCH
LUN
LUN
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-26
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Door Schedule
CLASSROOM BUILDING FIRST FLOOR(S PREFIX)
MARK
S01
S02
SOS
S04
SOS
S06
S07
SOS
S09
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
S31
S32
S33
DOOR NO
S01
S02
SOS
S04
505
S06
S07
SOS
S09
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
S31
S32
S33
HAND HWSET
013
013
036
017
D27
D28
343
D18
018
D19
031
002
024
016
024
032
029
033
021
022
034
020
017
023
022
004
003
006
025
009
046
044
310
MODE
PR
PR
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
PR
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
RU
3R
SGL
WIDTH
6'0"
6'0"
3'0"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
5'8"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
2'6"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
B'8"
3'4"
S'O"
HEIGHT
7'10"
7'10"
7' 10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
7' 10"
7'10"
7'10"
7' 10"
7' 10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
7' 10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
7' 10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
7' 10"
B'O"
7'10"
7'10"
THICK
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
DOOR
A/G
A/G
MG
MG
A/G
1-3/4" U/G
1-3/4" NMD
1-3/4" HMD
1-3/4" HMD
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
HMD
HMD
A/G
HMD
HMD
HMD
A/G
HMD
A/G
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
A/G
A/G
HMD
A/G
A/G
A/G
HMD
HMD
\I\JL
HMD
HMD
FRAME
ALF
ALF
ALF
ALF
ALF
ALF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
ALF
HMF
HMF
HMF
ALF
HMF
ALF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
ALF
ALF
HMF
ALF
ALF
ALF
HMF
HMF
VITL
HMF
HMF
RATING
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
60MIN
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
MON-RTD
50MIN
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
50MIN
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
SOMIN
OUTSIDELOCATION
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
LOBBY
LOBBY
HALL
HALL
STORAGE
STORAGE
CHECK-IN
HALL
HALL
EXTERIOR
HALL
HALL
HALL
HALL
CONFERENCE
HALL
CHECK-IN
RANGE
CHECK-IN
CHECK-IN
HALL
HALL
RANGE
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
VESTIBULE
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
RANGE
3ARKING
INSIDELOCATION
LOBBY
LOBBY
ELEV MACH
HALL
OFFICE
STORAGE
STORAGE
ARMORY
ARMORY
FELE/DATA
SHOWER
HALL
RESTROOM
JANITOR
RESTROOM
CONFERENCE
STORAGE
PRISM
VESTIBULE
VESTIBULE
CLEANING
CONTROL ROOM
CONTROL ROOM
VESTIBULE
VESTIBULE
HALL
ELEC
FIRE RISER
STAIR
VESTIBULE
STORAGE
STORAGE
STORAGE
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-1
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Door Schedule
S34
S35
S36
S37
S38
S39
S40
S34
S35
S36
S37
S38
S39
S40
030
014
046
005
015
001
045
SGL
3R
RU
SGL
SGL
SGL
SL
3'0"
6'0"
8'8"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
9'4"
7'10"
7'1 0"
B'O"
7'10"
3'10"
3'10"
B'O"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
HMD
HMD
MIL
HMD
HMD
HMD
VITL
HMF
HMF
MIL
HMF
HMF
HMF
VITL
NON-RTD
60MIN
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
STORAGE
PARKING
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR ACCESS
DOOR
EXTERIOR
RANGE
STORAGE
STORAGE
STORAGE
STORAGE
BULLET TRAP
BULLET TRAP
RANGE
SHOOTING RANGE FIRST FLOOR(S PREFIX)
MARK
S41
S42
S43
S44
S45
S46
S47
S48
S49
S50
DOOR NO
S41
S42
S43
S44
S45
S46
S47
S48
S49
S50
HAND HWSET
015
001
007
007
008
008
008
008
008
035
MODE
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
WIDTH
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
HEIGHT
3'10"
3'10"
7'1 0"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
no"
THICK
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
DOOR
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
FRAME
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
RATING
NJON-RTD
^JON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
^ON-RTD
^ON-RTD
'vJON-RTD
MON-RTD
NJON-RTD
^JON-RTD
OUTSIDELOCATION
EXTERIOR ACCESS
DOOR
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
STOREFRONT PROP
INSIDELOCATION
BULLET TRAP
BULLET TRAP
RESTROOM
RESTROOM
STOREFRONT PROP
STOREFRONT PROP
STOREFRONT PROP
STOREFRONT PROP
STOREFRONT PROP
RANGE
CLASSROOM BUILDING SECOND FLOOR(S PREFIX
MARK
S51
S52
S53
S54
S55
S56
S57
S58
S59
S60
S61
S62
DOOR NO
S51
S52
S53
S54
S55
S56
S57
S58
S59
S60
S61
S62
HAND HWSET
041
041
041
041
342
042
037
037
038
039
040
Q26
MODE
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
PR
PR
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
WIDTH
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
5'0"
5'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
HEIGHT
7'10"
T 10"
T 10"
7' 10"
7'10"
7'10"
7'10"
T 10"
T 10"
7'10"
no11
7' 10"
THICK
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
DOOR
A/G
A/G
A/G
A/G
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
FRAME
fliLF
ALF
ALF
Mf
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
RATING
BOMIN
50MIN
30MIN
30MIN
50MIN
50MIN
30MIN
30MIN
30MIN
30MIN
60MIN
NON-RTD
OUTSIDELOCATION
HALL
HALL
HALL
HALL
HALL
STORAGE
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
STAIR
INSIDELOCATION
CLASSROOM
CLASSROOM
CLASSROOM
CLASSROOM
STORAGE
CLASSROOM
RESTROOM
RESTROOM
STORAGE
JANITOR
VESTIBULE
VESTIBULE
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-2
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Door Schedule
COMM PROP BUILDING 1ST FLOOR(C PREFIX)
MARK
C01
C02
COS
C04
COS
C06
C07
COS
C09
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
DOOR NO
C01
C02
C03
C04
COS
C06
C07
COS
C09
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
HAND HWSET
POOS
P012
P014
POOS
P001
P012
POOS
P014
P004
346
=012
P002
P007
=014
P012
3Q07
3012
=002
=006
P002
P012
=014
POOS
=003
^O^
MODE
PR
SQL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
RU
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
WIDTH
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
B'8"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
HEIGHT
S'O"
B'O"
B'O"
S'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
THICK
-3/4"
-3/4"
-3/4"
-3/4"
-3/4"
-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
DOOR
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
MIL
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
V1TL
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
FRAME
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
VITL
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
MIL
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
RATING
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
NON-RTD
MON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
MON-RTD
OUTSIDELOCATION
EXTERIOR
LOBBY
LOBBY
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
TRAINING
EXTERIOR
HALL
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
HALL
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
HALL
HALL
EXTERIOR
=IRE RISER
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
HALL
HALL
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
HALL
INSIDELOCATION
LOBBY
CLOSET
STAIR
STAIR
CONTROL
BEDROOM
STAIR
STAIR
HALL
WAREHOUSE
WAREHOUSE
EQUIPMENT
RETAIL
RETAIL
RETAIL
RETAIL
RETAIL
=IRE RISER
HALL
ELEC
TRAINING
TRAINING
TRAINING
TRAINING
TRAINING
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-3
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Door Schedule
COMM PROP BUILDING 2ND FLOOR(C PREFIX)
MARK
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
G32
C33
C34
C35
C36
C37
C38
C39
C40
C41
C42
C43
DOOR NO
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
C36
C37
C38
C39
C40
C41
C42
C43
HAND HWSET
=009
=014
=003
P012
=012
P014
=012
=015
P014
3015
3012
3014
P012
=003
3002
=003
=003
=013
MODE
PR
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SL
SGL
SL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
WIDTH
6'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
B'O"
3'0"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
3'0"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
HEIGHT
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
S'O"
THICK
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
DOOR
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
FRAME
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
RATING
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
OUTSIDELOCATION
BALCONY
OFFICE
EXTERIOR WALK
3EDROOM
LIVING ROOM
HALL
HALL
TRAINING
HALL
TRAINING
HALL
HALL
LIVING ROOM
EXTERIOR WALK
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR WALK
EXTERIOR WALK
HALL
INSIDELOCATION
OFFICE
STAIR
STAIR
BATH
BEDROOM
STAIR
TRAINING
CLOSET
TRAINING
CLOSET
TRAINING
.IVING ROOM
3EDROOM
LIVING ROOM
EQUIPMENT
HALL
JVING ROOM
.IVING ROOM
COMM PROP BUILDING 3RD FLOOR(C PREFIX)
MARK
C44
C45
C46
C47
C48
C49
C50
DOOR NO
C44
C45
C46
C47
C48
C49
P50
HAND HWSET
P009
P011
POOS
D014
D003
P010
POOS
MODE
PR
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
PR
SGL
WIDTH
3'0"
S'O"
S'O"
S'O"
b'O"
3'0"
S'O"
HEIGHT
B'O"
S'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
THICK
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
DOOR
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
FRAME
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
HMF
RATING
MON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
OUTSIDELOCATION
BALCONY
VESTIBULE
BALCONY
-OBBY
ROOF
ROOF
ROOF
INSIDELOCATION
OFFICE
EQUIPMENT
pFFICE
STAIR
STAIR
STORAGE
STAIR
COMM PROP BUILDING 4TH FLOOR(C PREFIX)
MARK
C51
C52
DOOR MO
C51
C52
HAND HWSET
=009
POOS
MODE
PR
SGL
WIDTH
S'O"
S'O"
HEIGHT
B'O"
B'O"
THICK
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
DOOR
HMD
HMD
FRAME
HMF
HMF
RATING
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
OUTSIDELOCATION
BALCONY
STAIR
INSIDELOCATION
OFFICE
OFFICE
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-4
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Door Schedule
RES PROP BUILDING 1ST FLOOR(R PREFIX)
MARK
R01
R02
R03
R04
R05
R06
R07
R08
DOOR NO
R01
R02
R03
R04
R05
R06
R07
R08
HAND HWSET
POOS
POOS
046
P013
P001
P003
P013
=01 3
MODE
SGL
SGL
RU
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
WIDTH
3'0"
3'0"
8'8"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
3'0"
HEIGHT
8'0"
B'O"
3'0"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
B'O"
THICK
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
DOOR
HMD
HMD
MTL
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
FRAME
HMF
HMF
MTL
HMF
HMF
(HMF
HMF
HMF
RATING
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
MON-RTD
OUTSIDELOCATION
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
GARAGE
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
ENTRY
JVING ROOM
|_ INSIDELOCATION
ENTRY
GARAGE
GARAGE
DINING
EQUIPMENT
<ITCHEN
STAIR
BATH
RES PROP BUILDING 2ND FLOOR(R PREFIX)
MARK
R09
DOOR NO
R09
HAND HWSET
P011
MODE
SGL
WIDTH
3'0"
HEIGHT
B'O"
THICK
1-3/4"
DOOR
HMD
FRAME
HMF
RATING
NON-RTD
OUTSIDELOCATION
VESTIBULE
INSIDELOCATION
EQUIPMENT
SITE PLAN(G PREFIX)
MARK
G01
G02
DOOR NO
G01
G02
HAND HWSET
011
012
MODE
SGL
SGL
WIDTH
3'0"
3'0"
HEIGHT
5'0"
S'O"
THICK DOOR
GATE
GATE
FRAME
MTL
MTL
RATING
NON-RTD
NON-RTD
OUTSIDELOCATION
EXTERIOR
EXTERIOR
INSIDELOCATION
STAIR
GROUNDS
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Finish Door Hardware & Schedule
08710-5
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass.
B. Glazing compounds and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites.
B. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
C. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows: Glazed windows.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2004.
C. ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting
Blocks, and Spacers; 2005.
D. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2006.
E. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated
and Uncoated Glass; 2004.
F. ASTM C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2003.
G. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a.
H. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2004.
I. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 1990.
J. GANA (LGDG) - Laminated Glazing Reference Manual; Glass Association of North America;
2006.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,
size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal
failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.
C. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination,
including replacement of failed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLASS MATERIALS
A. Float Glass Manufacturers:
1. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppg.com.
a. PPG Solarban 60 (2) + Clear Low-E for tinted glass.
2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.
1. Annealed Type: ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing
select).
2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C 1048.
3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated.
4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind
load design regardless of specified thickness.
C. Clear Float Glass: Clear, fully tempered.
1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing
select).
2. Comply with ASTM C 1048.
D. Safety Glass: Clear; fully tempered with horizontal tempering.
1. Laminated with 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick plastic interlayer; comply with ASTM C 1172
2. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select)
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GLAZING
Specifications 08800 -1
and ASTMC 1048.
3. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II.
4. Where glazing is to be installed in fire-rated partition, provide glazing that is also
fire-protection rated in accordance with applicable code.
5. Provide this type of glazing in the locations required by code,
a. Glazed lites in doors except fire doors.
E. Low E Glass: Float type, tempered, in Solarban 60 (2) + Clear color.
1. Coating on inner surface.
2. Visible light transmittance of 70 percent, solar light transmittance of 33 percent, shading
coefficient of 0.44.
3. Comply with ASTM C 1048, Type I, Class 2, Qualty Q3.
F. Wired Glass: Clear.
1. Stainless steel wire in square mesh pattern.
G. Exterior Glazing
1. Glazing at Entrances and Storefronts:
a. All insulated glass units to be manufactured with Warm Edge Technology.
b. Entrance and Storefront manufacturer shall furnish glass insulated units and factory
glaze all units.
1) Outboard: 1/4 inch Low-E Solarban 60 (2) + Clear tempered;
2) Air Space: 1/2 inch
3) Inboard: 1/4 inch clear tempered
4) Total glazing thickness: 1 inch
2. Aluminum Windows:
a. All insulated units to be manufactured with Warm Edge Technology.
b. Aluminum Window manufacturer shall furnish glass insulated units and factory glaze all
units. Field glazing will not be permitted.
1) Outboard: 1/4 inch Low-E Solarban 60 (2) + Clear tempered;
2) Air Space: 1/2 inch
3) Inboard: 1/4 inch clear tempered
4) Total glazing thickness: 1 inch
2.02 MIRROR
A. Number 1 quality, 1/4 inch float/ plate glass selected for silvering, electro-copper plated by the
galvanic process.
B. Install mirror in aluminum 'J' molding as indicated on the Drawings. Install 'J' molding at top and
bottom and 'L' molding at all exposed edges with concealed fasteners. Mastic is to be
compatible with mirror. Apply two coats of PPG Edge Sealer to backs and all edges of each
mirror and caulk perimeter of each mirror. Install mirrors from largest sheets pratical to minimize
joints.
C. Refer to Spectification Secion 10800 for prefabricated mirrors in restrooms.
2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.
Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4
inch (100 mm) x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing
method and pane weight and area.
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.
Minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit
application, self adhesive on one face.
PARTS EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GLAZING
Specifications 08800 - 2
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.
E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat
absorbing or reflective glass units.
GLAZING - EXTERIOR VERTICAL FINS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Functional Design
B. Structural Engineer
C. Custom Fabrication
D. Site Erection for Decorative Feature Using Glass Fin Technology
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete structural frame to receive glass fin structure
B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Steel structural frame to receive glass fin structure
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications
and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings.
B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
and Other Structures.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM A276 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes.
2. ASTM C509 - Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material.
3. ASTM C864 - Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers.
4. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
5. ASTM C1036-Flat Glass.
6. ASTM C1048 - Heat Treated Flat Glass, Kind HS, Kind FT, Coated and Uncoated.
7. ASTM C1115 - Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and Accessories.
8. ASTM C1172 - Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.
9. ASTM C1281 - Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications.
10. ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors
under specified Pressure difference Across Specimen.
11. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
12. ASTM E331 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
13. ASTM E546 - Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
14. ASTM E576 - Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in Vertical Position.
15. ASTM E773 - Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
16. ASTM E774 - Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
17. ASTM E1300 - Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings.
D. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): CPSC 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for
Architectural Glazing Materials.
E. Glass Association of North America (GANA): GANA - Glazing Manual.
F. International Code Council (ICC): ICC IBC - International Building Code.
1.04 GLASS FIN STRUCTURE DESCRIPTION
G. Glass fin structure to be custom designed, engineered, detailed, factory fabricated, and site
assembled and erected.
H. Type of glass structure: Glass mainplate vertical panels stabilized and supported with top and
bottom metal connector fittings. Glass fins shall extend full height from floor to ceiling.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GLAZING
Specifications 08800 - 3
I. Basic configuration: Straight layout with vertical glass surface stabilized and supported by metal
connector fittings to provide architectural appearance and configuration shown on Drawings.
J. Dimensions: Glass fin structure shall be nominal dimensions shown on Drawings. Minor
variations to accommodate manufacturer's design and components are acceptable provided
overall concept is maintained.
1.05 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
K. Design Requirements:
1. Design Wind Load: 85 mph
2. Seismic Zone: D
3. Climate Zone: 7
4. Exposure: B
B. Design, size components, and install glass fin structure in accordance with ASTM E1300 to
withstand these loads without breakage, loss, failure of seals, product deterioration, and other
defects.
1. Dead and live loads: Determined by ASCE 7 and calculated in accordance with applicable
codes.
2. Seismic loads: System shall be designed and installed to comply with applicable seismic
requirements for Project location and Seismic Zone D as defined by the 2007 CBC.
3. Movement and deflection of structural support framing.
4. Effects of applicable wind load acting inward and outward normal to plane of wall in
accordance with ASTM E330.
5. Thermal loads and movement:
a. Ambient temperature range: 120 degrees F.
b. Material surfaces range: 180 degrees F.
C. Provide and install exterior gaskets, sealants, and other glazing accessories to resist water and air
penetration.
1. Air infiltration: Less than 0.06 cubic feet/minute/square foot of fixed area tested in
accordance with ASTM E283.
2. Water infiltration: No penetration at 15 pounds/square foot test pressure and 5
gallons/hour/square foot water rate tested in accordance ASTM E331.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data for all proposed components, materials, products and accessories: Provide
structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or
installation requirements.
1. For each type glass, provide maximum allowable stress in both horizontal and vertical
directions.
2. Provide photographs of drawings for fitting and hardware
C. Shop drawings:
1. Plans, elevations and sections illustrating shape, configuration and dimensions.
2. Illustrate method of assembly, installation and glazing.
3. Provide details for supporting framing, reinforcement, connections, joints, anchors and other
fabrication and installation conditions.
4. Indicate required tolerances and coordination with adjacent elements and work of other
trades.
D. Calculations:
1. Show compliance with performance criteria and applicable loads with stamp of Licensed
Professional Engineer registered in the State of California.
E. Samples:
1. 12 by 12 inches minimum size for each type glass.
2. Glass fitting.
3. Metal finishes.
4. Sealant colors.
F. Manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GLAZING
Specifications 08800 - 4
G. Certificates or test reports demonstrating components and methods have been successfully tested
by an independent laboratory in the United States certifying that the proposed system has been
tested and as defined by in section 1.04.
H. Data showing compliance with manufacturer's and installer's qualifications specified in section
1.07.A and 1.07.B. Provide descriptions, locations, photographs, references, and completion
dates for previous projects.
I. Copies of warranties required by section 1.12 for review by Architect. Included with warranty
shall be a letter certifying the proposed system will be manufactured from one source. Glass
cannot be supplied by one manufacturer and hardware from another manufacturer to comply with
this warranty. Letters signed by the subcontractors or installers for this section are not
acceptable.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single source responsibility: Design, structural engineering and custom fabrication for glass fin
structure and supply of all components, materials and products shall be sole responsibility of
single manufacturer. Provision of products from numerous sources for site assembly without
complete single source design and supply responsibility is not acceptable. Components to be
fabricated or supplied by single source are:
1. Support framing.
2. Glass - as specified above under 08800 Glazing.
3. Connectors, fittings, anchors and installation accessories.
4. Gaskets and sealants.
5. All other components, products and materials required for complete, functional glass fin
structure.
B. Single installer responsibility: All components list in section 1.07.A shall be installed by a single
installer.
C. Manufacturer qualifications: Company specializing in designing, engineering, and fabricating
unique, custom designed, glass fin structures, entrances, storefronts, and other glazed structures.
Glass cannot be supplied by one manufacturer and hardware from another manufacturer to comply
with this warranty. Letters signed by the subcontractors or installers for this section are not
acceptable.
1. Experience: 7 years minimum successful experience providing glass structures.
2. Previous projects: Successfully completed ten (10) minimum glass structures of scope, type
and size as proposed Project.
D. Installer qualifications: Company experienced in erecting custom designed, glass fin structures,
entrances, storefronts, and other glazed structures and acceptable to manufacturer for installing
proposed structure.
1. Experience: 3 years minimum successful experience erecting glass structures.
2. Previous projects: Successfully completed three (3) minimum glass structures of scope, type
and size as proposed Project.
E. Design structural components and develop shop drawings under direct supervision of professional
structural engineer experienced in design of glass structures. Calculations and shop drawings
shall bear engineer's seal.
F. Safety glazing: Comply with Consumer Product Safety Commission 16 CFR 1201, ANSI Z97.1,
and other applicable safety requirements. Each piece of safety glazing shall be permanently
labeled with appropriate marking.
G. Manufacturer's field representative:
1. During installation, provide services of manufacturer's field representative knowledgeable of
_ erection process for proposed glass fin structure.
2. Manufacturer's representative shall observe installation, quality control, and certify work
meets specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer's representative shall submit report covering observations, procedures, noted
deficiencies, corrective measures, and certification of proper installation.
1.08 MOCK-UP
A. In accordance with Section 01400 - Quality Requirements, prepare separate mock-up illustrating
construction method for glass fin structure. Mock-up shall demonstrate performance and establish
workmanship quality standard.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GLAZING
Specifications 08800 - 5
B. Provide concrete slab as mock-up base.
C. Mock-up shall be segment of structure with two minimum glass fins. Construct with all anchors,
fasteners, sealants, and other components proposed for actual installation.
D. Approximate size: 4 by 10 feet.
E. Submit report describing tests, results, and any modifications made to correct deficiencies or to
improve performance.
F. Do not proceed with installation until mock-up has been inspected and accepted by Architect.
G. Retain approved mock-up during construction as quality standard. Completely remove when work
is accepted.
1.09 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. In accordance with Section 01140 - Coordination and Meetings, convene a pre-installation
conference at site prior to commencing work of this Section.
B. Require attendance of entities directly concerned with glass fin structure including manufacturer's
field representative.
C. Review the following items at the meeting:
1. Construction of foundation and preparation of rough opening to receive glass fin structure.
2. Schedule, sequence, and method for installing glass fin structure and coordination with other
work.
3. Safety procedures.
4. Availability of system materials.
5. Chemical compatibility of glass panels, sealants, adjacent construction materials, and other
glazing materials.
6. Protection of adjacent items and finishes.
7. Approved mock-up to be used a measure of acceptance.
8. Other items related to successful execution of work.
1.10 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protect glass and other components during delivery, storage, and handling in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Prevent edging chipping and other damage.
B. Insulating glass units: Comply with fabricator's instructions for venting and sealing units exposed
to substantial altitude changes.
C. Do not store glass panels on site for extended time.
1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces without proper ventilation.
B. During glazing, maintain 40 degrees F minimum temperature.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
1. Manufacturer's 2 years warranty to cover design, fabrication, and materials against defects
and failure to perform and remain weathertight. Warranty to provide for replacement of
defective components.
2. Glass warranties:
a. Ten (10) years warranty to cover replacement of insulating sealed glass units: in event
of seal failure and interpane dusting, misting, and filming.
b. Five (5) years warranty to cover replacement of laminated glass units in event of
delamination, edge separation, and blemishes.
3. Installer's 5 years warranty to cover installation against defects and failure to perform and
remain weathertight. Warranty to provide for required repairs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE DESIGNER-MANUFACTURER
A. Glass fin structure shall be designed and fabricated by Innovative Structural Glass, Inc.
1. Address: 40220 Pierce Drive, Three Rivers, California 93271.
2. Phone: 559-561-7000/Fax: 559-561-7007
3. Website: www.structuralglass.com
B. Requests to use design services and products of another manufacturer must be submitted in
accordance with Section 01130 - Substitutions.
2.02 GLASS PRODUCTS
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GLAZING
Specifications 08800 - 6
A. Glass type and thickness shall be determined by glass fin structure manufacturer to accommodate
Project design and performance requirements specified in section 1.05. Types of glass shall
above under Glazing.
B. Primary glass products:
1. Clear glass: Clear, transparent, flat, annealed, float glass, conforming to ASTM C1036, Type
I, Class 1, Quality q3.
C. Fabricated glass panels:
1. Fully tempered glass: Heat strengthened safety glass complying with ASTM C1048, Kind FT
and ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR.
D. For glass panels to be installed with mechanical connectors and fittings, provide holes to receive
bolts and fitting pins. Holes shall be drilled prior to tempering glass.
2.03 FITTINGS
A. Provide structurally engineered and independently tested fittings by an independent laboratory in
the United States for connecting glass panels and fins together and for attachment to supporting
substrates.
B. Material: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A276, Type 316 with brushed satin finish.
C. Types: Configuration, number of points, size, and spacing shall be determined by manufacturer
and scheduled on shop drawings to accommodate project design and meet performance criteria
specified in section 1.05. Ensure that fitting-induced stresses do not exceed glass strength.
D. Providing fittings with countersunk stainless steel bolts, Delrin bushings, and resilient gaskets.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide glazing accessories, anchors, and fasteners of type recommended by glass fin structure
manufacturer and as required for complete, functional, weathertight installation.
B. Anchorage devices: Clips, anchors, fasteners, and shims required for secure installation of glass
fin structure. Type, size, and spacing as recommended by glass fin structure manufacturer.
C. Cleaners and primers: Recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with substrate and
glazing materials.
D. Setting blocks: Neoprene or EPDM complying with ASTM C864.
E. Edge blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness required to limit lateral movement of glass.
F. Gaskets: Molded or extruded elastomeric type of profile and hardness required to maintain
weathertight seal and complying with ASTM C509, ASTM C864, or ASTM C1115.
G. Glazing tape: Preformed butyl compound, non-staining, non-migrating in contact with non-porous
surfaces, coiled on release paper, complying with ASTM C1281.
H. Glazing sealant: Chemically curing type complying with ASTM C920, compatible with materials
and conditions, and capable of anticipated joint movement without watertight seal failure.
I. Contact structural sealant: High performance, two component, non-sag, neutral cure, ultraviolet
resistant, silicone sealant designed for structural glazing and complying with ASTM C920.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate provision of glass fin structure with casting of concrete floor slabs as specified in
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Ensure that sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts, reglets and
other embedded items are provided in sufficient time for embedment in cast concrete. Ensure that
blockouts and pockets for glass fin structure components are provided, accurately placed, and
properly sized.
B. Coordinate provision of glass fin structure with structural framing specified in Section 05120 -
Structural Steel. Ensure that provision is made for attachments and transfer of calculated loads.
C. Field verify dimensions prior to fabricating glass fin structure components.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. Prior to delivery of glass panels to site, verify that wall openings, support framing, and substrates
are ready to receive glass fin structure. Verify alignment, support dimensions, and tolerances are
correct.
B. Report unacceptable conditions and deficiencies. Do not proceed with installation until corrective
action has been performed.
C. Inspect glass panels for chipped edges, scratches, abrasions, and other damage. Remove
damaged panels from site and replace.
3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GLAZING
Specifications 08800 - 7
A. Site assemble and erect glass fin structure in accordance with approved shop drawings,
manufacturer's installation instructions, and GANA Glazing Manual.
B. Damaged glass: Do not install glass with edge damage or other imperfections.
C. Allow for settling, expanding, and contracting to occur without breaking glass.
D. Do not field cut or alter structural framing without written approval from manufacturer and Architect.
3.04 GLAZING
A. Glazing schedule: Install types and thickness of glass in locations scheduled on Drawings and on
approved shop drawings.
1. Type 1: %" thick, clear tempered glass, laminated with .060 PVB interlayer
2. Type 2: %" thick, tempered glass
B. Color Film:
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: GamColor, 4975 W. Pico Blvd., Los Angeles, California 90019,
(www.gamcolor.com). see section 01600 for substitutions.
2. Material: Deep dyed polyester color filter - sandwiched between laminated pieces of glass
3. Colors, see floor plans for layout and arrange of color pattern:
a. 220 - Pink Magenta
b. 245-Light Red
c. 388-Gold Rush
d. 450-Saffron
C. Protect adjacent surfaces sealants and glazing materials with masking tape or other means.
D. Install setting blocks and spacers as recommended by glass fin structure manufacturer and
indicated on approved shop drawings.
1. Place setting blocks at quarter points. Maintain 6 inches space from corners.
2. Set blocks in sealant.
E. Provide edge blocking as required to prevent sideway movement of glass in glazing channel.
F. Ensure glazing channels and stops provide required bite on glass, minimum edge and face
clearances, and adequate sealant thickness.
G. Glazing methods: Type as determined by manufacturer and indicated on approved shop
drawings. Use the following methods for applications indicated on Drawings
1. Gasket glazing.
2. Wet sealant glazing.
3.05 MECHANICAL ASSEMBLED GLASS UNITS
A. Mechanically install glass fin structure panels with stainless steel fittings as designed by
manufacturer and indicated on approved shop drawings.
B. Glass fins: Mechanically join glass fins to rnainplate panels with connector fittings to provide
stabilization and support.
C. Secure glass panels to fittings with bolts. Torque bolt to amount specified on approved shop
drawings using calibrated tool. Lock torqued bolt into position to prevent backoff. Reset calibrations
regularly to ensure accurate torquing.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean excess sealant from glass and other surfaces immediately after application. Use solvents or
other cleaners recommended by manufacturer.
B. Remove protective material from prefinished surfaces.
C. Wash exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
cloths. Do not use abrasives. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GLAZING
Specifications 08800 - 8
SECTION 08805
GLAZING-SHOOTING RANGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide all glass and glazing as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01110 - Summary of
Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information
necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Hollow Metal Doors."
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Criteria: Glass shall conform to Fed. Spec. DD-G-001403.
B. Installation Criteria: FGJA "Glazing Manual".
C. Security Glazing: Applicable standards
1. Consumer Product Safety Standard 16 CFR 1201, Category II
2. ANSI Z97.1, Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings
3. ASTMC1036, Flat Glass
4. ASTM C1172, Laminated Architectural Flat Glass
5. ASTM C1048, Heat-Treated Flat Glass
6. Fed. Spec. MIL-P-46144, Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit 6" square samples of all glazing materials to the Architect for
review.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Glazing carefully protected and handled prior to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Glass:
1. 1/4" clear float glass (tempered as noted on drawings).
2. 3/8" laminated glass (Clear)
3. %" Laminated Glass (Clear)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Carefully inspect and verify all job site conditions and measurements.
B. Clean all surfaces of all glazing units and materials to which glazing compound and/or
tapes shall be applied and prime as recommended by compound and/or tape
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Field verify all existing conditions and dimensions which receive glazing.
3.02 GLAZING
A. Glazing shall conform to requirements and recommendations of glazing material
manufacturer and Flat Glass Jobbers Association Glazing Manual. This shall include
maintaining proper bite on glazing, properly sized and spaced setting blocks and spacer
shims with proper glazing edge clearances.
B. Glazing to fit line in rabbet with all edges straight and true. Size substantially as shown on
the drawings, however Contractor shall fill sash and openings as actually constructed
whether more or less than sizes given.
C. Material installed in a full bed of sealant, tooling finished surfaces smooth.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Glazing shall be protected from damage during construction. Contractor shall assume all
responsibility for breakage and shall replace cracked, broken, scratched or otherwise
defective glazing.
B. Glazing shall be cleaned carefully at time of final acceptance, removing all labels, excess
sealant, paint and other foreign substances.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Glazing-Shooting Range
Specifications 08805-1
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Glazing-Shooting Range
Specifications 08805-2
SECTION 09206
METAL LATH
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal lath for portland cement plaster.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Sheathing on exterior walls.
B. Section 09220 - Portland Cement Plaster.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C 847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 2006.
B. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application
of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on furring and lathing components, structural characteristics,
material limitations, and finish.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum ten years experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Lath:
1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation: www.amico-online.com
2. Clark Western Building Systems: www.clarkwestern.com.
3. AMICO-Alabama Metal Industries Corporation: www.amico-lath.com
4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 LATH
A. Diamond Mesh Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, galvanized.
1. Weight: To suit application and as specified in ASTM C 841 for framing spacing.
2. Weight: 2.5 Ib/sq yd (1.4 kg/sq m).
3. Backed with treated paper.
a. Provide two (2) layers of asphalt impregnated 60 minute paper - labeled complying with
Federal Specification UU-B-790, Grade D.
B. Corner Mesh: Formed sheet steel, minimum 0.018 inch (0.5 mm) thick, perforated flanges
shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster, minimum 2 inch (50 mm) size; same finish as
lath.
C. Beads, Screeds, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: Depth governed by plaster thickness,
maximum possible lengths.
1. Casing Beads: Square edges.
a. Product: #X-66 manufactured by Amico.
2. Corner Beads: Radiused corners.
3. Base Screeds: Bevelled edges.
a. Product: #7 manufactured by Western Metal Lath.
4. Expansion Joints: Accordion profile with factory-installed protective tape, 2 inch (50 mm)
wide flanges.
a. Product: AMICO Griplock "J" Expansion/Control Joint (J-type) by Alabama Metal
Industries Corporation; 3245 Fayette Ave., P.O. Box 3928, Birmingham, AL 35208,
(205) 787-2611 & (800) 366-2642.
5. Control Joints: Accordion profile with protective tape, 2 inch (50 mm) flanges.
a. Product: AMICO Vinyl Control Joint with Removable Tape, Model # AMCJX-250 with
1/4" space by Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; 3245 Fayette Ave., P.O. Box
3928, Birmingham, AL 35208, (205) 787-2611 & (800) 366-2642 .
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchorage: Tie wire, nails, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility METAL LATH
Specifications 09206 -1
rigidly secure materials in place, galvanized.
B. Fasteners: ASTM C 1002 self-piercing tapping screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that substrates are ready to receive work and conditions are suitable for application.
C. For exterior plaster and stucco on stud walls, verify that water-resistive barrier has been installed
over sheathing substrate completely and correctly.
D. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install interior lath and furring in accordance with ASTM C 841.
3.03 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Locate joints as indicated on drawings.
B. Install control and expansion joints.
3.04 LATH INSTALLATION
A. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports.
B. Lap ends minimum 1 inch (25 mm). Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between
supports.
C. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, except where the metal lath returns 3
inches (75 mm) from corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only.
D. Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of lath only.
E. Place base screeds at termination of plaster areas; secure rigidly in place.
F. Place 4 inch (100 mm) wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing
materials. Secure rigidly in place.
G. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door frames to 6 inches (150 mm)
above ceiling line.
H. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly in
place.
I. Place additional strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility METAL LATH
Specifications 09206 - 2
SECTION 09220
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Portland cement plaster for installation over metal lath, masonry, concrete, and solid surfaces.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 04816 - Unit Masonry Assemblies
B. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood stud framing for plaster.
C. Section 09206 - Metal Lath: Metal furring and lathing for plaster.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2007.
B. ASTM C 206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime; 2003.
C. ASTM C 926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2006.
D. ASTM C 932 - Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Compounds for Exterior
Plastering; 2006.
E. PCA EB049 - Portland Cement Plaster/Stucco Manual; Portland Cement Association; 2003.
F. Plaster and Drywall Systems Manual, current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials, characteristics and limitations of products
specified.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 10 years of experience.
B. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C 926.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Construct mock-up of exterior wall, 8 feet (2.4384 m) long by 8 feet (2.4384 m) wide, illustrating
surface finish.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is under 50 degrees F (10
degrees C) or over 80 degrees F (27 degrees C).
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation of
plaster and until cured.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement, Aggregates, and Other Materials: In accordance with ASTM C 926.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
C. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S.
D. Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C 926.
E. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter that could adversely affect
plaster.
F. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932; type recommended for bonding plaster to concrete surfaces;
Weld-crete manufactured by Larsen Product Corporation.
2.02 METAL LATH - See Section 09206
A. Metal Lath and Accessories: As specified in Section 09206.
B. Beads, Screeds, and Joint Accessories: As specified in Section 09206.
2.03 PLASTER MIXES
A. Over Solid Bases: Two-coat application, mixed and proportioned in accordance with ASTM C
926.
B. Over Metal Lath: Three-coat application, mixed and proportioned in accordance with ASTM C
926.
C. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.
D. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
Specifications 09220 -1
E. Protect mixtures from freezing, frost, contamination, and excessive evaporation.
F. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred.
2.04 LATH ACCESSORIES
A. Aluminum moldings by Fry Reglet or approved equal.
1. DS-875-875 drip screed (plaster over studwalls)
2. DS-875-V-875 drip screed (plaster over concrete/ masonry)
3. PCS-75-V-400 vented drip screed at boxed soffit
4. DCS-75-50 stucco reveal (plaster over studwalls)
5. DCS-625-50 stucco reveal (plaster over concrete/ masonry)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify the suitability of existing conditions before starting work.
B. Masonry: Verify joints are cut flush and surface is ready to receive work of this section. Verify
no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry surface.
C. Concrete: Verify surfaces are flat, honeycomb are filled flush, and surfaces are ready to receive
work of this section. Verify no bituminous, water repellent, or form release agents exist on
concrete surface that are detrimental to plaster bond.
D. Metal Lath and Accessories: Verify lath is flat, secured to substrate, and joint and surface
perimeter accessories are in place.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction.
B. Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter Clean surfaces using acid solutions, solvents, or
detergents. Wash surfaces with clean water.
C. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.03 PLASTERING
A. Two-Coat Application: At all wood framing location.
1. Apply liquid acrylic bonding coat to all concrete and brick surfaces to receive plaster.
Comply with application requirements of the manufacturer.
2. Apply first coat to nominal thickness of 3/8 inch (9 mm).
3. Apply finish coat to nominal thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm).
B. Three-Coat Application Over Metal Lath: At all wood framing and where noted on mechanical
screens.
1. Apply first coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch (9 mm).
2. Apply second coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch (9 mm).
3. Apply finish coat to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm).
C. Moist cure base coats.
D. Apply second coat immediately following initial set of first coat.
E. After curing, dampen previous coat prior to applying finish coat.
F. Finish Texture: Provide a consistent appearance; use the following finishes in the locations
indicated:
1. Smooth trowel: smooth.
G. Avoid excessive working of surface. Delay troweling as long as possible to avoid drawing
excess fines to surface.
H. Moist cure finish coat for minimum period of 48 hours.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m).
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
Specifications 09220 - 2
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Shaft wall system.
B. Acoustic insulation.
C. Cementitious backing board.
D. Gypsum wallboard.
E. Water resistant wallboard.
F. Joint treatment and accessories.
G. Textured finish system.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A108.11 -American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units;
1999(R2005).
B. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications
for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (R2005).
C. ASTM C 475/C 475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007).
D. ASTM C 514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board; 2004.
E. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006.
F. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2007.
G. ASTM C 954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in
Thickness; 2007.
H. ASTM C 1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement
Substrate Sheets; 2004.
I. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2006a.
J. ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior
Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2000 (Reapproved 2005).
K. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2004.
L. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2004.
M. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2007.
N. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; 2006.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system.
C. Mock-ups:
1. At an area on the site where approved by the Architect, provide a mock-up panel of gypsum
board wall surface.
a. Make mock-up panel approximately 4'-0" square.
b. Provide one mock-up panel for each gypsum board finish to be used on the Work.
c. The mock-ups may be part of the Work and incorporated into the finished Work, when
so approved by the Architect.
d. Revise as necessary to secure the Architect's approval.
2. The mock-up panels, when approved by the Architect, will be used as datum points for
comparison with the remainder of the Work of this Section for the purpose of acceptance or
rejection.
3. If the mock-up panels are not permitted to be part of the finished Work, completely demolish
and remove them from the job site upon completion and acceptance of the Work of this
Section.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Specifications 09260 -1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Interior Partitions: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, based on
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E 90.
C. Shaft Walls at Elevator Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Intermittent loads of 5 Ibf/sq ft (0.24 kPa) with maximum
mid-span deflection of L/240.
2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 35-39 calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, based on
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E 90.
D. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies complying with applicable code.
1. Gypsum Association File Numbers: Comply with requirements of GA-600 for the particular
assembly.
2.02 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:
1. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements.
B. Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; sizes to
minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch (16 rnm).
3. Fire Resistant Type: Complying with Type X requirements; UL or WH rated.
a. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested
assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X.
b. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
c. Edges: Tapered.
C. Impact Rated Wallboard:
a. Hallway #112
b. Check-ln/Gathering Space #116
c. Corridor # 206
D. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; Board For Wet Areas:
1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including drinking fountains, and shower
surrounds, shower ceilings, and where no tile is schedule to be installed.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273.
3. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated portland cement panels with
glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 or ASTM
C1325.
a. Core Type: Regular.
b. Edges: Tapered.
c. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
E. Ceiling Board: Special sag-resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C 1396/C 1396M;
sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
3. Edges: Tapered.
2.03 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED BOARD MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9, aggregated portland cement panels with glass fiber
mesh embedded in front and back surfaces, 5/8 inch thick.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced.
B. Acoustic Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board.
C. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project
conditions.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Specifications 09260 - 2
1. Tape: 2 inch (50 mm) wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise
indicated.
D. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to
take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.
E. Textured Finish Materials: Latex-based compound; plain.
F. Fasteners:
1. For fastening gypsum wallboard in place on metal studs and metal channels, use flat-head
screws, shouldered, specially designed for use with power-driven tools, not less than 1 inch
long, with self-tapping threads and self-drilling points.
2. For fastening gypsum wallboard in place on wood, use 1 1/4 inch Type W bugle-head
screws, or use annular ring type nails complyng with ASTM C514 and of the length required
by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
G. Metal Cornerbead and Trim
1. All metal cornerbead and trim, and all accessory items, shall be a system recommended by
the manufacturer as compatible with the gypsum panels.
2. Outside Corners: Bullnose corner
3. Inside Corners: Inner core
4. J Molding: J-Stop, L-Trim and J-Trim
5. Casings (for all face edges of exposed gypsum board): U.S. Gypsum No. 200-4 metal trim,
U-shaped and of 2 inch size.
6. Edge Beads at perimeter of ceilings: Angle shapes with wings not less than 3/4 inch wide,
with concealed wing perforated for nailing and exposed wing edge folded flat and factory
finished white.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION
A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
1. Fasten runners to structure with short leg to finished side, using appropriate power-driven
fasteners at not more than 24 inches (600 mm) on center.
2. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements.
B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special
friction studs.
1. On walls over sixteen feet high, screw-attach studs to runners top and bottom.
3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end
joints, especially in highly visible locations.
B. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of
assembly listing.
C. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where
indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.
D. Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies, comply with requirements of listing
authority.
E. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant.
F. Gypsum Soffit Board: Install perpendicular to framing, with staggered end joints over framing
members or other solid backing.
G. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members where indicated, in
accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Specifications 09260 - 3
B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
3.06 JOINT TREATMENT
A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840, as follows:
1. All gypsum board surfaces to receive a 'light knock down' texture unless noted otherwise.
2. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas
specifically indicated.
3. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the
completed construction.
B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to
receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
C. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after
joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.
3.07 TEXTURE FINISH
A. Apply finish texture coating by means of 'light knock down1 texture in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and to match approved sample unless noted otherwise.
B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to
receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
C. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by
manufacturer.
3.08 TEXTURE FINISH
A. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Texture Required: 'Light knock down1.
3.09 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3
mm in 3 m) in any direction.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Specifications 09260 - 4
SECTION 09300
TILE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tile for wall applications.
B. Tile for shower receptors.
C. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate.
D. Ceramic accessories.
E. Ceramic trim.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07110 - Membrane Waterproofing
B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
C. Section 09220 - Portland Cement Plaster: Lath and portland cement scratch coat and
membrane, where required by TCA Method specified.
D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of tile backer board.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the
Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2005.
1. ANSI A108.1a -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in
the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2005.
2. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile
on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement
Mortar; 1999(R2005).
3. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the
Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured
Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005).
4. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile
with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 1999 (R2005).
5. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile
with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005).
6. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile
with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (R2005).
7. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile
with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (R2005).
8. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile
with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (R2005).
9. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in
Tilework; 1999(R2005).
10. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer
Units; 1999(R2005).
11. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded,
Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2005.
B. TCA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of North America, Inc.;
2007/2008.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include
instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions
with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and
setting details.
D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on three plywood panels, minimum 18x18 inches (450 x
450 mm) in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.
E. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal
methods, and polishes and waxes.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility TILE
Specifications 09300 -1
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain one copy of TCA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5
years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment.
B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation of
mortar materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE
A. Manufacturers: All products of each type by the same manufacturer.
1. Dai-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com.
a. All ceramic tile and system design is based on the products of Dal Tile (7834 Hawn
Freeway, Dallas, TX 75217, 800-933-8453) as a standard of quality. Substitutions
shall be considered under provisions of Section 01030.
b. Coved Tile Base by Dal Tile:
1) Size - 4-1/4 inches x 8-1/2 inches A-3481
2) Finish- Matte
3) Design - Modern Dimensions
4) Color of Coved Tile Base: X714 "Matte Desert Grey (1)"
5) Grout color: Standard Color Line - Midnight
c. Wall Wainscot Ceramic Tile by Dal Tile:
1) Size - 4-1/4 inches x 8-1/2 inches
2) Finish- Matte
3) Design - Modern Dimensions
4) Color of Wall Wainscot Ceramic Tile: X714 "Matte Desert Grey (1 )"
5) Grout color: Standard Color Line - Midnight
d. Wall Wainscot Accent Ceramic Tile by Dal Tile:
1) Size- 4-1/4 inches x8-1/2 inches
2) Finish- Matte
3) Design - Modern Dimensions
4) Color of Wall Wainscot Accent Ceramic Tile: K711 "Matte Black (2)"
5) Grout color: Standard Color Line - Midnight
2. Interstyle Ceramic & Glass - All decorative glass tile and system design is based on the
products of Interstyle Ceramic & Glass, 3625 Brighton Ave., Burnaby, B.C. Canada, V5A
3H5, tel (604) 421-7229, fax (604) 421-7544, info@interstyle.ca &
http://www.interstyle.ca/contact.html as a standard of quality through distributor of Dal Tile.
Alternatively E-mail <mailto:info@interstyle.ca> for information on the dealer nearest you.
Do include geographic location (City, State, Country) and the product(s), as dealers may not
carry all products.
a. Wall Wainscot Border: Impervious Glass Tiles by Madras:
1) Size: 1-1/4 inches x 12 inches (30 x 300 mm)
2) Finish: Clear Glass Polish
3) Thickness: 3/4 inches (19.03 mm)
4) Color of Wall Wainscot Border: "Robin"
5) Grout color: Standard Color Line - Midnight
3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same
manufacturer as tile.
B. Provide surface bullnose trim at all open edges/ends.
C. Provide surface bullnose trim at all tile abutting jamb conditions and extending beyond frame.
D. Provide full-curved stretcher tile for all outside corners.
E. Ceramic Trim: Matching cove base ceramic shapes in sizes indicated.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility TILE
Specifications 09300 - 2
2.03 MORTAR BOND COAT
A. Wall Tile - Dry-Set Mortar, ANSI A108.5 and A118.1 Portland Cement.
2.04 GROUT
A. Wall Tile - Latex Portland cement, per ANS1108.1 A, 1B, 4, 5 and 7.-Grout Color: Pearl Gray, per
ANSI 108.1A, 1B, 4, 5 and 7.
2.05 TILE AND GROUT SEALANT
A. Contractor to provide penetrating sealer to prevent the infiltration of water.
B. Contractor to use heavy duty cleaner to the tile and grout surfaces prior to sealer application.
2.06 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIALS
A. %" x 13/16" Polyurethane Sealant backed by 13/16" x %" x 16 gauge aluminum angles. Color to
be selected from standard color line by Architect. Install per TCA recommendations of TCA and
tile manufacturer.
2.07 JOINT SEALANT - Per Section 07900.
2.08 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials, anchorages, and controls, not specifically described but required for a
complete and proper installation of ceramic tile, as recommended by the manufacturer, subject to
the approval of the Architect.
PARTS EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,
are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.
B. Verify that sub-wall surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
setting materials to sub-wall surfaces.
C. Verify that required wall-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage.
B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness
tolerances.
D. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's
instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry-set mortar to a feather edge
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13,
manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations.
B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases
neatly. Align base and wall joints.
D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints
watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
E. Form internal angles square and external angles square.
F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.
G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
H. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
I. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
J. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.
K. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.
3.04 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS AND RESTROOM WALLS
A. At restroom and shower receptors walls install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method B412,
over cementitious backer units with waterproofing membrane.
B. Grout with standard grout as specified above.
C. Seal joints between tile work and other work with sealant specified in Section 07900.
3.05 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE
A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method
W244, using membrane at locker rooms and toilet rooms.
3.06 CLEANING
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility TILE
Specifications 09300 - 3
A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic along wall tile surface for 4 days after installation.
3.08 COMPLIANCE AND INSPECTION
A. The Owner reserves the right to request and pay for Inspection by a representative of the Tile
Council of America to determine that the Work of this Section has been performed in accordance
with the specified standards.
B. In the event that such inspection determines that the Work of this Section does not comply with
the specified requirements, immediately remove the non-complying items and immediately
replace them with items complying with the specified requirements, including repair and
restoration of any work thus disturbed. All this replacement and repair is to be provided by the
Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner, and the Contractor is to reimburse the Owner for
the cost of the Inspection.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility TILE
Specifications 09300 - 4
SECTION 09511
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Divisions-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Acoustical ceiling panels.
2. Exposed grid suspension system.
3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
2. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
3. Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements
C. Alternates
1. Prior Approval: Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract documents, proposed
product substitutions may be submitted no later than TEN (10) working days prior to the
date established for receipt of bids. Acceptability of a proposed substitution is contingent
upon the Architect's review of the proposal for acceptability and approved products will be
set forth by the Addenda. If included in a Bid are substitute products which have not been
approved by Addenda, the specified products shall be provided without additional
compensation.
2. Submittals which do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not be
considered. The proposed substitution must meet all requirements of this section, including
but not necessarily limited to, the following: Single source materials suppliers (if specified
in Section 1.5); Underwriters' Laboratories Classified Acoustical performance; Panel
design, size, composition, color, and finish; Suspension system component profiles and
sizes; Compliance with the referenced standards.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
2. ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
3. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the
Hot-Dip Process.
4. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation
Room Method.
5. ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
6. ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems
for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.
7. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
8. ASTM E 1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms
Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum.
9. ASTM E 1111 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceilings
Systems.
10. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
11. ASTM E 1477 Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical
Materials by Use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers.
12. ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
13. ASTM E 119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Material.
B. ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004, "Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality"
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Specifications 09511-1
C. International Code Council-Evaluation Services - AC 156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic
Qualification Testing of Non-structural Components
D. International Code Council-Evaluation Services - Evaluation Report, ESR-1308, Fire- and
Nonfire-Resistance-Rated Suspended Ceiling Framing Systems
E. ASCE 7 Standard - American Society of Civil Engineers, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures
F. CISCA Seismic Zones 3 & 4 - Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association Guidelines
for Seismic Restraint for Direct Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies
1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads in accordance with the
International Building Code, Section 1621 for Category D,E, and F.
1.5SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and
suspension system required.
B. Samples: Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch long samples of
exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner and 4 foot cross tees.
C. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of acoustical ceilings. Show locations of items which are to be
coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings.
D. Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements,
including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards. For acoustical
performance, each carton of material must carry an approved independent laboratory classification
of NRC, CAC, and AC.
E. If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have an Underwriter's Laboratory
classification of acoustical performance on every carton, subcontractor shall be required to send
material from every production run appearing on the job to an independent or NVLAP approved
laboratory for testing, at the architect's or owner's discretion. All products not conforming to
manufacturer's current published values must be removed, disposed of and replaced with
complying product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single
manufacturer.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings
of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with
ASTM E 1264 for Class A products.
a. Flame Spread: 25 or less
b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less
C. Seismic Performance: Provide acoustical ceiling system that has been evaluated by an
independent party and found to be compliant with the 2003 International Building Code, Seismic
Category D, E, and F.
1. Tested per International Code Council - Evaluation Services - AC 156 Acceptance Criteria
for Seismic Qualification Testing of Non-structural Components as evidenced by
International Code Council Evaluation Report, ESR-1308.
D. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a
fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight,
surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure:
All ceiling products and suspension systems must be installed and maintained in accordance with
Armstrong written installation instructions for that product in effect at the time of installation and
best industry practice. Prior to installation, the ceiling product must be kept clean and dry, in an
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Specifications 09511-2
environment that is between 32oF (Oo C) and 120oF (49o C) and not subject to Abnormal
Conditions.
Abnormal conditions include exposure to chemical fumes, vibrations, moisture from conditions
such as building leaks or condensation, excessive humidity, or excessive dirt or dust buildup.
HumiGuard Plus Ceilings: Installation of the products shall be carried out where the temperature is
between 32°F (0° C) and 120°F (49° C). It is not necessary for the area to be enclosed or for HVAC
systems to be functioning. All wet work (plastering, concrete, etc) must be complete and dry.
The ceilings must be maintained to avoid excessive dirt or dust buildup that would provide a
medium for microbial growth on ceiling panels. Microbial protection does not extend beyond the
treated surface as received from the factory, and does not protect other materials that contact the
treated surface such as supported insulation materials.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or
replace acoustical panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to:
1. Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping as a result of defects in materials or factory
workmanship.
2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects
3. Acoustical Panels with BioBlock Plus or designated as inherently resistive to the growth of
micro-organisms installed with Armstrong suspension systems: Visible sag and will resist
the growth of mold/mildew and gram positive and gram negative odor and stain causing
bacteria.
B. Warranty Period Humiguard:
1. Acoustical panels: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.
2. Grid: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.
3. Acoustical panels and grid systems with HumiGuard Plus or HumiGuard Max performance
supplied by one source manufacturer is thirty (30) years from date of substantial
completion.
C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other
warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that
match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
appropriate labels.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 5.0 percent of amount
installed.
2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed suspension
component equal to 10.0 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Ceiling Panels:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2.2.0 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS
A. Acoustical Panels Type ACT-1:
1. Surface Texture: Fine
2. Composition: Fiberglass
3. Color: White
4. Size: 24in X 24in X 3/4in
5. Edge Profile: Square Lay-In for interface with Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee.
6. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product
carton, 0.90.
7. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product carton,
Not Applicable
8. Articulation Class (AC): ASTM E 1111; Classified with UL label on product carton 180.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Specifications 09511-3
9. Emissions Testing: Section 01350 Protocol, < 13.5 ppb of formaldehyde when used under
typical conditions required by ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004, "Ventilation for Acceptable
Indoor Air Quality"
10. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL)
11. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; White Panel: Light Reflectance: 0.90.
12. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus - Temperature is between 32°F (0° C) and 120°F
(49° C). It is not necessary for the area to be enclosed or for HVAC systems to be
functioning. All wet work (plastering, concrete, etc) must be complete and dry.
13. Antimicrobial Protection: Inherent - Resists the growth of mold/mildew and bacterial
growth.
14. Acceptable Product: Optima Open Plan, 3150 as manufactured by Armstrong World
Industries.
2.3.0 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Components: Main beams and cross tees In accordance with the International Building Code,
Section 1621 for Category D, E and F as described in ESR-1308.
1. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635, Heavy Duty.
2. Color: White and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted otherwise.
3. Represented Systems: Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee System as manufactured by
Armstrong World Industries.
B. Attachment Devices: In accordance with the International Building Code, Section 1621 for
Category D, E, and F.
C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: In accordance with the International Building Code, Section 1621.
D. Wall Moldings: In accordance with the International Building Code, Section 1621 for Category D, E.
and F or method as described in ESR-1308.
1. Nominal 7/8 inch x 7/8 inch hemmed, pre-finished angle molding
E. Accessories:
1. BERC2 - 2 inch Beam End Retaining Clip, 0.034 inch thick, hot-dipped galvanized
cold-rolled steel per ASTM A568 - used to join main beam or cross tee to wall molding.
2. SJCG - Seismic Joint Clip, 5 inches x 1-1/2 inch, hot-dipped galvanized cold-rolled steel
per ASTM A568. The two piece unit is designed to accommodate a seismic separation
joint. The clip is compatible with 15/16 inch and 9/16 inch grid systems including Prelude,
Suprafine, and Silhouette The SJCG is not suitable for use with Vector panel installations.
3. SJMR15 - Seismic Joint Clip - Main Beam, 1 inch x 4 inches, commercial quality cold rolled
hot dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A568, chemically cleansed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering and
painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out, unless expressly permitted by
manufacturer's printed recommendations. (Exception: HumiGuard Max Ceilings)
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply with
reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures.
B. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation
is specified in other sections.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance
of time needed for coordination of other work.
3.3 INSTALLATION (Category D,E,F)
A. Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the International Building Code, Section
1621, except as noted in Section 4.4.3.1 of ESR-1308, and with the authorities having jurisdiction.
B. ESR-1308, Section 4.4.3.1, Alternate Seismic Design Category D,E and F Installation:
Under this installation, the runners must be rated heavy-duty and have a minimum simple span
uniform load of 16.35 pounds per lineal foot (238 N/m); maximum ceiling weight permitted is 1.80
pounds per square foot (8.78 kg/m2).
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Specifications 09511-4
1. The BERC-2 clip is used to secure the main runners and cross runners on two adjacent
walls to the structure and the two opposite walls to the perimeter trim, as detailed below. A
nominal 7/8-inch (22 mm) wall molding is used in lieu of the 2-inch (51 mm) perimeter
supporting closure angle required by Section 9.6.2.6.2.2 (b) of ASCE-7 for Seismic Design
Categories D, E and F. Except for the use of the BERC-2 clip and the 7/8-inch (22 mm) wall
molding and elimination of spreader bars, installation of the ceiling system must be as
prescribed by the applicable code.
2. The BERC-2 clip is attached to the wall molding by sliding the locking lances over the hem
of the vertical leg of the wall molding. Clips installed on the walls where the runners are
fixed are attached to the runner by a sheet metal screw through the horizontal slot in the
clip into the web of the runner.
Alternate #2: If acceptable to architect, fixed attachment may be accomplished by
pop-riveting the runner to the wall molding.
3. Clips installed on the walls where the runners are not fixed to the runner allow the terminal
runner end to move 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) in both directions. BERC-2 clips installed in this
manner are an acceptable means of preventing runners from spreading in lieu of spacer
bars required in CISCA 3-4, which is referenced in ASCE 7, Section 9.6.2.6.2.2, which is
referenced in IBC Section 1621.
C. The SJCG Seismic Separation Joint Clip is to be installed per the manufacturer's instructions,
CS-3815.
D. The SJMR15 Seismic Joint Clip Main Beam is to be installed per the manufacturer's instructions,
CS-3955.
E. The presence of a hanger wire within 3 inches of an expansion relief joint as called for in ASTM
C636 shall be required in addition to the requirements of the International Building Code, Section
1621.2.5 and with the authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Only applies when using Prelude XL Fire Guard 15/16"; Prelude Plus XL Fire Guard
15/16"; and Suprafine XL Fire Guard 9/16" Exposed Tee Systems.
F. For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling panels at border areas and
vertical surfaces.
G. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on flanges of
main runner and cross tees. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting surfaces. Support edges by
wall moldings.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
• Suspended ceiling shall be subject to the special inspection requirements in Section 01 45 33
(01450) - Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Replace damaged and broken panels.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish
damage.
1. Ceiling Touch-Up Paint, (Item #5760, 8oz. bottles) (Item #5761, quart size cans), "global
white" latex paint should be used to hide minor scratches and nicks in the surface and to
cover field tegularized edges that are exposed to view.
C. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently
eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Specifications 09511-5
SECTION 09545
DECORATIVE METAL CEILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Divisions-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal ceiling panels.
2. Exposed grid suspension system.
3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, wall angle moldings and accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
2. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
3. Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements
C. Alternates
1. Prior Approval: Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract documents, proposed
product substitutions may be submitted no later than TEN (10) working days prior to the
date established for receipt of bids. Acceptability of a proposed substitution is contingent
upon the Architect's review of the proposal for acceptability and approved products will be
set forth by the Addenda. If included in a Bid are substitute products which have not been
approved by Addenda, the specified products shall be provided without additional
compensation.
2. Submittals which do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not be
considered. The proposed substitution must meet all requirements of this section, including
but not neccessarily limited to, the following: Single source materials suppliers (if specified
in Section 1.5); Factory Mutual classified acoustical performance, panel design, size,
composition, color, and finish; suspension system component profiles and sizes;
compliance with the referenced standards.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
2. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-
Dip Process.
3. ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
4. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation
Room Method.
5. ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
6. ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems
for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.
7. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
8. ASTM E 1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms
Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum.
9. ASTM E 1111 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceilings
Systems.
10. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
11. ASTM E 1477 Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical
Materials by Use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers.
B. International Code Council-Evaluation Services - AC 156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic
Qualification Testing of Non-structural Components
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility DECORATIVE METAL CEILING
Specifications 09545 -1
C. International Code Council-Evaluation Services - Evaluation Report, ESR-1308, Fire- and
Nonfire-Resistance-Rated Suspended Ceiling Framing Systems
D. ASCE 7 Standard - American Society of Civil Engineers, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures
E. CISCA Seismic Zones 3 & 4 - Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association Guidelines
for Seismic Restraint for Direct Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads in accordance with the
International Building Code, Section 1621 for Category D,E, and F.
1.5SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of ceiling unit and suspension
system required.
B. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions as referenced in Part 3,
Installation.
C. Samples: Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch long samples of
exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner and 4 foot cross tees.
D. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of ceilings. Show locations of items which are to be coordinated
with, or supported by the ceilings.
E. Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that system complies with specified requirements:
1. For seismic performance: International Code Council Evaluation Report, ESR-1308
2. For acoustical performance, each carton of material must carry an approved independent
laboratory classification of NRC, CAC, and AC.
F. If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have a Factory Mutual
classification of acoustical performance on every carton, subcontractor shall be required to send
material from every' production run appearing on the job to an independent or NVLAP approved
laboratory for testing, at the architect's or owner's discretion. All products not conforming to
manufacturer's current published values must be removed, disposed of and replaced with
complying product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide ceiling panel units and grid components by a single
manufacturer.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify ceiling components with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with
ASTM E 1264 for Class A products.
a. Flame Spread: 25 or less
b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less
C. Seismic Performance: Provide acoustical ceiling system that has been evaluated by an
independent party and found to be compliant with the 2003 International Building Code, Seismic
Category D, E, and F.
1. Tested per International Code Council - Evaluation Services - AC 156 Acceptance Criteria
for Seismic Qualification Testing of Non-structural Components as evidenced by
International Code Council Evaluation Report, ESR-1308.
D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate ceiling work with installers of related work including, but not
limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems,
and sprinklers.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store the ceiling panels in a dry, interior location and keep in cartons prior to installation to avoid
damage.
B. MetalWorks Vector panels are packaged with the face of the panel toward the outside of the carton.
Exercise care in moving and opening cartons to prevent damage to the panel face.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure:
1. HumiGuard Plus Ceilings: Building areas to receive ceilings shall be free of construction
dust and debris. Products with HumiGuard Plus performance and hot-dipped galvanized
steel, aluminum or stainless steel suspension systems can be installed up to 120°F (49°C)
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility DECORATIVE METAL CEILING
Specifications 09545 - 2
and in spaces before the building is enclosed, where HVAC systems are cycled or not
operating. Cannot be used in exterior applications where standing water is present or
where moisture will come in direct contact with the ceiling.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Ceiling Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or
replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to:
1. Ceiling Panels: Sagging and warping
2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects
B. Warranty Period:
1. Ceiling panels: One (1) years from date of substantial completion.
2. Grid: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.
3. Ceiling panels and grid systems with HumiGuard Plus or HumiGuard Max performance
supplied by one source manufacturer is fifteen (15) years from date of substantial
completion.
C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other
warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that
match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
appropriate labels.
1. Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 5.0 percent of amount installed.
2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed suspension
component equal to 10.0 percent of amount installed.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Ceiling Panels:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
B. Suspension Systems:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2.2.0 METAL CEILINGS PANELS
A. Ceiling Panels Type ACT-1:
1. Surface Texture: Smooth
2. Composition: Metal
3. Color: Gun Metal Grey
4. Size: 24in X 24in
5. Edge Profile: Vector for interface with Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee
6. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product
carton, 0.70.
7. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product carton,
33
8. Articulation Class (AC): ASTM E 1111; Classified with UL label on product carton .
9. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (FM)
10. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; White Panel: Light Reflectance: N/A.
11. Dimensional Stability: Standard .
12. Acceptable Product: MetalWorks Vector, 2118U6A2, as manufactured by Armstrong World
Industries.
B. Accessories: MetalWorks Vector Infill Panel (fiberglass infill) #820-01-00.
2.3.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Components: Main beams and cross tees In accordance with the International Building Code,
Section 1621 for Category D, E and F as described in ESR-1308.
1. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635, Heavy Duty.
2. Color: White and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted otherwise.
3. Represented Systems: Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee System as manufactured by
Armstrong World Industries.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility DECORATIVE METAL CEILING
Specifications 09545 - 3
B. Attachment Devices: In accordance with the International Building Code, Section 1621 for
Category D, E, and F.
C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: In accordance with the International Building Code, Section 1621.
D. Wall Moldings: In accordance with the International Building Code, Section 1621 for Category D, E.
and F or method as described in ESR-1308.
1. Nominal 7/8 inch x 7/8 inch hemmed, pre-finished angle molding
E. Accessories:
1. BERC2 - 2 inch Beam End Retaining Clip, 0.034 inch thick, hot-dipped galvanized
cold-rolled steel per ASTM A568 - used to join main beam or cross tee to wall molding.
2. SJCG - Seismic Joint Clip, 5 inches x 1-1/2 inch, hot-dipped galvanized cold-rolled steel
per ASTM A568. The two piece unit is designed to accommodate a seismic separation
joint. The clip is compatible with 15/16 inch and 9/16 inch grid systems including Prelude,
Suprafine, and Silhouette The SJCG is not suitable for use with Vector panel installations.
3. SJMR15 - Seismic Joint Clip - Main Beam, 1 inch x 4 inches, commercial quality cold rolled
hot dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A568, chemically cleansed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering and
painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply with
reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures.
3.3 INSTALLATION (Category D,E,F)
A. Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the International Building Code, Section
1621, except as noted in Section 4.4.3.1 of ESR-1308, and with the authorities having jurisdiction.
B. ESR-1308, Section 4.4.3.1, Alternate Seismic Design Category D,E and F Installation:
Under this installation, the runners must be rated heavy-duty and have a minimum simple span
uniform load of 16.35 pounds per lineal foot (238 N/m); maximum ceiling weight permitted is 1.80
pounds per square foot (8.78 kg/m2).
1. The BERC-2 clip is used to secure the main runners and cross runners on two adjacent
walls to the structure and the two opposite walls to the perimeter trim, as detailed below. A
nominal 7/8-inch (22 mm) wall molding is used in lieu of the 2-inch (51 mm) perimeter
supporting closure angle required by Section 9.6.2.6.2.2 (b) of ASCE-7 for Seismic Design
Categories D, E and F. Except for the use of the BERC-2 clip and the 7/8-inch (22 mm) wall
molding and elimination of spreader bars, installation of the ceiling system must be as
prescribed by the applicable code.
2. The BERC-2 clip is attached to the wall molding by sliding the locking lances over the hem
of the vertical leg of the wall molding. Clips installed on the walls where the runners are
fixed are attached to the runner by a sheet metal screw through the horizontal slot in the
clip into the web of the runner.
Alternate #2: If acceptable to architect, fixed attachment may be accomplished by
pop-riveting the runner to the wall molding.
3. Clips installed on the walls where the runners are not fixed to the runner allow the terminal
runner end to move 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) in both directions. BERC-2 clips installed in this
manner are an acceptable means of preventing runners from spreading in lieu of spacer
bars required in CISCA 3-4, which is referenced in ASCE 7, Section 9.6.2.6.2.2, which is
referenced in IBC Section 1621.
C. The SJCG Seismic Separation Joint Clip is to be installed per the manufacturer's instructions,
CS-3815.
D. The SJMR15 Seismic Joint Clip Main Beam is to be installed per the manufacturer's instructions,
CS-3955.
E. The presence of a hanger wire within 3 inches of an expansion relief joint as called for in ASTM
C636 shall be required in addition to the requirements of the International Building Code, Section
1621.2.5 and with the authorities having jurisdiction.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility DECORATIVE METAL CEILING
Specifications 09545 - 4
1. Only applies when using Prelude XL Fire Guard 15/16"; Prelude Plus XL Fire Guard
15/16"; and Suprafine XL Fire Guard 9/16" Exposed Tee Systems.
F. For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling panels at border areas and
vertical surfaces.
G. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on flanges of
main runner and cross tees. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting surfaces. Support edges by
wall moldings.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
• Suspended ceiling shall be subject to the special inspection requirements in Section 01 45 33
(01450) - Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Replace damaged and broken panels.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of ceilings panels, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility DECORATIVE METAL CEILING
Specifications 09545 - 5
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient sheet flooring.
B. Rubber flooring.
C. Resilient base.
D. Resilient stair accessories.
E. Installation accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs
and floors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM F 710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;
2008.
B. ASTM F 1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing; 2004.
C. ASTM F 1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2002.
D. ASTM F 1913 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing; 2004.
E. BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and
Sealant Products; www.baaqmd.gov; current edition.
F. FS RR-T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Nonmetallic, Skid Resistant; Federal Specifications and
Standards; Revision E, 1994.
G. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C. Verification Samples: Submit three samples, 4x4 inch (101.6 x 101.6 mm) in size illustrating
color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified.
D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,
and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (72
degrees C).
B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a
temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter,
maintain conditions above 55 degrees F (13 degrees C).
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide 10 sq ft of flooring, 20 lineal feet of base, and 5 percent of installed stair materials of each
type and color specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET FLOORING
A. Vinyl Sheet Flooring: Homogeneous without backing, with color and pattern throughout full
thickness, and:
1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 1303, Type II, without backing, or ASTM F
1913.
2. Total Thickness and Wear Layer Thickness: 0.080 inch (2.0 mm) nominal.
3. Heat welded seams. Color to match vinyl sheet flooring; WM419, Silver Gray.
4. Integral coved base with cap strip.
5. Pattern: 88419 Silver Gray.
6. Form: Sheet
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility RESILIENT FLOORING
Specifications 09650 -1
7. Width: 6 Feet
8. Length: 82.5 Feet
9. Light Reflectivity: 60-64%
10. Manufacturers:
a. Armstrong; Product Medintech.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. Vinyl Welding Rod: Solid vinyl bead produced by manufacturer of vinyl flooring for heat welding
seams, in color matching field color.
2.02 MATERIALS - RESILIENT BASE
A. Resilient Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS Rubber Wall Base, vulcanized thermoset Group 1; top
set Style B, Cove, and as follows:
1. Height: 6 inch (152 mm).
2. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick.
3. Composition: Thermoset Vulcanized Rubber Base
3. Length: Roll.
5. Color: 217 Charcoal.
6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Burke Mercer Burkebase SBR Rubber Wall Base Type TS
b. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.
B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required
by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168 and
the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51.
C. Moldings and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.
D. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that
might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners,
and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.
C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation
by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain
instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and
adhesive materials manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other
defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.
B. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
C. Clean substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION - SHEET FLOORING
A. Install in accordance-with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
C. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
D. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum
number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns
carefully at seams.
E. Double cut sheet at seams.
F. Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer unless otherwise indicated.
G. Finish seams in sheet vinyl by heat welding.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility RESILIENT FLOORING
Specifications 09650 - 2
H. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of
door.
I. Coved Base: Install as detailed on drawings, using coved base filler as backing at floor to wall
junction. Extend sheet flooring vertically to height indicated, and cover top edge with metal cap
strip.
3.04 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE
A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches (45 mm) between
joints.
B. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
3.05 INSTALLATION - STAIR COVERINGS
A. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility RESILIENT FLOORING
Specifications 09650 - 3
SECTION 09680
CARPET TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Carpet tile, fully adhered.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01732 - Waste Management: Reclamation/Recycling of new carpet tile scrap.
B. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs
and floors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a
Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2008.
B. ASTM E 662 - Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid
Materials; 2006.
C. ASTM F 710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;
2008.
D. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and
Rug Institute; 2002.
E. CRI (GLA) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Adhesive Products; Carpet and Rug
Institute; current listings at www.carpet-rug.org.
F. CRI (GLC) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Product Categories for Carpet; Carpet and
Rug Institute; current listings at www.carpet-rug.org.
G. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Carpet Testing Program - Approved Products; Carpet and Rug
Institute; current listings at www.carpet-rug.org.
H. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a
Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
C. Samples: Submit three carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color
selected.
D. Samples: Submit three carpet tiles (6x6 inch) illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet
color selected.
E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,
and suggested schedule for cleaning.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum five years
experience.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
B. Provide 1 complete box of carpet tiles of each color and pattern selected.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Shaw Contract Group, www.shawcontractgroup.com.
1. At all first floor spaces scheduled for carpeting provide color and pattern: Site Lines Tile
(59550), "Mine Your Past" (38505).
2. At all second floor spaces scheduled for carpeting provide color and pattern: Site Lines Tile
(59550), "Mine Your Past" (38505).
3. At the interior of the elevator cab provide color and pattern: Site Lines Tile (59550), "Mine
Your Past" (38505).
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility CARPET TILE
Specifications 09680 -1
B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Carpet Tile:, manufactured in one color dye lot.
1. Tile Size: 24 x 24 inch, nominal.
2. Thickness: 0.273 inch
3. Style Name: Site Line Tile
4. Style Number: 59550
5. Tile Pattern: Ashlar
6. Construction: Mulit-Level Pattern Loop
7. Dye Method: 80% Solution Dyed / 20% Yarn Dyed
8. Face Weight: 24.0
9. Gauge: 1/10
10. Stitches per Inch 12.0
11. Finished Pile Thickness: 0.138
12. Average Density: 6261
13. Primary Backing: Synthetic
14. Secondary Backing: Ecoworx Tile
15. Protective Treatments ssp shaw soil protection
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Edge Strips: Rubber, color as selected.
B. Adhesives: Acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer, compatible with materials being adhered;
maximum VOC of 50 g/L; CRI Green Label certified; in lieu of labeled product, independent test
report showing compliance is acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work
and are ready to receive carpet tile.
B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.
C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for flooring installation by testing
for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain instructions if test
results are not within limits recommended by carpet tile manufacturer and adhesive materials
manufacturer.
D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for carpet tile installation by testing for moisture
emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits:
1. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 Ib per 1000 sq ft (7.1 kg per 100 sq m) per 24
hours when tested using calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours.
2. Alkalinity: pH range of 5-9.
3. Provide test results to Owner and Architect.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and
other defects with sub-floor filler.
B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is
cured.
C. Vacuum clean substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CR1104.
B. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.
C. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
D. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building
lines.
E. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.
F. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.
G. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility CARPET TILE
Specifications 09680 - 2
H. Installation Method: Ashlar
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces.
B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility CARPET TILE
Specifications 09680 - 3
SECTION 09870
TAPE COATING SYSTEM WITH MORTAR SHIELD
FOR THE EXTERIOR OF STEEL WATER PIPELINES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The steel pipe shall be coated with polyethylene tapes in accordance with AWWA C214.
Fittings and specials shall be coated with cold-applied polyethylene tapes in accordance
with AWWA C209. A reinforced cement mortar shield shall be applied in accordance with
AWWA C205. Any modifications to the aforementioned standards are as stated herein.
1.2 RELATED WORK ELSEWHERE
The Contractor shall refer to the following specification section(s) for additional requirements:
A. Painting and Coating: 09900
B. Petrolatum Wax Tape Coating: 09902
C. Cement Mortar Lined Steel Pipe: 15061
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer to demonstrate a minimum of five years' successful application of tape
coating system on similar diameter steel water pipelines as specified herein.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. List of tape coating materials indicating manufacturer, product numbers, and thickness of
materials related to tape system for joints and repairs.
B. Certification of test results for each batch of liquid adhesive and each tape material
specified shall be in accordance with AWWA C214.
C. Tape application procedure approved by tape manufacturer.
1.5 COORDINATION WITH TAPE MANUFACTURER
A. The pipe manufacturer shall require the tape material manufacturer to furnish qualified
factory technical representative to visit the site for technical support at the beginning of
the pipe installation as may be necessary to instruct Contractor on appropriate tape
application methods in the field or to resolve problems. This visit shall be coordinated to
allow City Inspection and Maintenance Staff to participate in the instruction. The
Contractor shall allow time for representative to give field taping instructions to his
workforce.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 POLYETHYLENE TAPE COATING
A. Provide polyethylene tape coating in accordance with AWWA C214 with a reinforced
cement mortar shield in accordance with AWWA C205 and as specified herein. Plant
and field applied liquid adhesive, polyethylene tape, and plant and field applied repair
tape shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. The physical properties of tape
JUNE 2008 1 of 7 SECTION 09870
Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for
the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
materials shall meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C214 when tested in
accordance with the methods described in Section 5.3, "Coating System Tests".
B. The tape coating systems consist of an exterior polyethylene tape over the bare metal
surface of steel pipe with a reinforced cement mortar coating applied over the tape
system. Tape coating systems are specified for:
1. Normal plant cold-applied tape
2. Plant cold-applied tape for special sections, connections and fittings, and plant
repairs of cold-applied tape
3. Field joint, field coated fittings and repair of field cold-applied tape.
2.2 LIQUID ADHESIVE
A. Liquid adhesive shall consist of a mixture of suitable rubber and synthetic compounds
and a solvent in accordance with AWWA C214. The liquid adhesive shall be Polyken
#1039 primer or equivalent.
2.3 STORAGE PRIMER
A. Storage primer on the exposed steel at the tape cutbacks shall be Polyken #924 or
equivalent.
2.4 PLANT APPLIED POLYETHYLENE TAPE SYSTEM, POLYKEN, or equivalent (80 mil)
A. Liquid adhesive shall be Polyken #1039 primer.
B. Anti-corrosion inner layer tape shall be Polyken #989 (20 mil), black.
C. First mechanical outer layer tape shall be Polyken #955 (30 mil), gray.
D. Second mechanical outer layer tape shall be Polyken #956 (30 mil), white.
E. Reinforced cement mortar shield 3/4" thick.
F. Weld Stripping Tape shall be Polyken #933 (25 mil), if required.
2.5 PLANT COLD-APPLIED TAPE COATINGS FOR SPECIAL SECTIONS, CONNECTIONS AND
FITTINGS, AND PLANT REPAIR COLD-APPLIED POLYETHYLENE TAPE MATERIAL
A. Liquid adhesive shall be Polyken #1039 primer.
B. Anti-corrosion inner layer shall be Polyken #932-50 (50 mil), black.
C. Mechanical layer outer tape for plant fittings and plant repair cold-applied polyethylene
tape shall be Polyken #955 (30 mil), white.
D. Reinforced cement mortar shield 3/4" thick.
E. Weld stripping tape shall be Polyken #933 (25 mil), if required.
2.6 FIELD JOINT, FIELD COATED FITTINGS, AND FIELD REPAIR COLD-APPLIED
POLYETHYLENE TAPE
A. Primer shall be Polyken #1029.
JUNE 2008 2 of 7 SECTION 09870
Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for
the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
B. Joint filler tape to be Polyken #939 (125 mil), black.
C. Field joint, field fitting, and field repair outer layer tape shall be Polyken #932, (50 mil).
D. Mechanical layer outer tape for field joint, field fittings and field repair shall be Polyken
#932-50, continue inner layer with 50% overlap.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 POLYETHYLENE TAPE COATING
A. Apply polyethylene tape coating to pipe in accordance with AWWA C214. Apply
polyethylene tape coating to fittings and specials in accordance with AWWA C209. Apply
the reinforced cement mortar shield in accordance with AWWA C205. Any modifications
to the aforementioned standards are as stated herein.
B. Certificate of Compliance: Prior to shipment of pipe, furnish a certificate of compliance
stating that tape materials and work furnished hereunder will comply or have complied
with the requirements of these specifications and AWWA C214 and C209.
3.2 STRAIGHT RUN PIPE APPLICATION
A. For straight run pipe, plant applied conditions, the polyethylene tapes shall be a four
layer system consisting of: (1) liquid adhesive; (2) corrosion prevention tape (inner
layer); (3) mechanical protective tape (first outer layer); (4) mechanical protective tape
(second outer layer)
B. Perform the entire coating operation by experienced workers skilled in the application of
polyethylene tapes and cement mortar coating under qualified supervisors. After
completion of the tape system, all handling shall be by padded equipment to prevent any
damage of the tape system. Testing of tape system shall be performed per 3.5 of this
section.
C. All equipment for blasting and application of the tape coating system shall be of such
design and condition to comply with all the requirements of AWWA C214 and these
specifications. Immediately repair or replace equipment that, in the opinion of the
Engineer, does not produce the required results. Include equipment and a repair
procedure for correcting defective tape application for use under this specification in the
steel pipe fabrication plan. Make available for review a copy of this portion of the
fabrication plan, and any updates, at the location of the coating operation, and a repair
procedure for correcting defective tape application.
D. Remove the exterior weld bead along the entire exterior surface of the pipe. The exterior
weld bead shall be flush with the exterior surface of the pipe with a tolerance of plus 1/32-
inch.
E. Surface preparation shall conform to AWWA C214 and the following.
1. Bare pipe shall be clean of all foreign matter such as mud, mill lacquer, wax, coal
tar, asphalt, oil, grease, or any contaminants. Remove welding slag or scale from
all welds by wire-brushing, hammering, or other satisfactory means. Remove
welding splash globules prior to priming.
2. Prior to blast cleaning, inspect surfaces and, if required, preclean in accordance
with the requirements of SSPC SP-1, Solvent Cleaning, to remove oil, grease,
and all foreign deposits. Remove visible oil and grease spots by solvent wiping.
JUNE 2008 3 of 7 SECTION 09870
Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for
the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
Use only approved solvents that do not leave any residue. Include in the
manufacturer's fabrication plan the cleaning solvent applications procedure and
safety precautions.
F. Blast cleaning shall conform to AWWA C214 and the following.
1. Blast the pipe surface using a commercially available shot grit mixture to achieve
a prepared surface equal to that which is specified in SSPC SP-6, Commercial
Blast Cleaning.
2. For plant mortar lined pipe, perform blast cleaning of said exterior surfaces after
the initial curing of the spun mortar lining. Perform the exterior blast cleaning in
such a manner as not to endanger the mortar lining in the pipe. Completely
remove corrosion and foreign substances from the exterior of the pipe in the
cleaning operation, and apply liquid adhesive after completion of blast cleaning.
3. Achieve from abrasive blasting an anchor pattern profile a minimum of 1.0 mil,
but not exceeding 3.0 mils. Measure the anchor pattern or profile of the blasted
surface using comparator tape as specified herein.
4. Inspect the blast cleaned exterior pipe surface for adequate surface preparation
prior to application of the liquid adhesive. Surface comparator tapes are to be
used by the manufacturer in at least eight random areas, along any given 40-foot
length of pipe. The results of the surface comparator tapes are to be
documented on the quality control sheet for each pipe section.
5. Coat each pipe section with liquid adhesive and tape within the same day of
being blast cleaned. Do not allow blasted and/or blasted and primed pipe to sit
overnight. All blasted and primed pipe must be coated by the end of the day. No
coating will be permitted on pipe sections showing evidence of rust.
G. Liquid adhesive application shall conform to AWWA C214 and the following.
1. Prior to liquid adhesive application, clean the pipe surface free of foreign matter
such as sand, grease, oil, grit, rust particles, and dirt.
2. Apply the liquid adhesive in a uniform thin film at the coverage rate
recommended by the manufacturer. Meet the recommendations of the
manufacturer for the state of dryness of the liquid adhesive prior to the
application of the inner layer of tape.
3. Limit the application of liquid adhesive to that length of pipe which can be taped
within the same workday. Pipe coated with liquid adhesive that was not taped
within the same workday shall be rejected at the discretion of the Engineer. The
liquid adhesive shall be removed and the surface shall be re-primed.
4. Protect liquid adhesive coated pipe sections from moisture, dirt, sand, and other
potentially contaminating materials
5. Apply storage primer to the exposed steel pipe at tape cutbacks to prevent
oxidation of the cleaned metal surface. Apply minimum of 1.5 mils and maximum
of 2.5 mils of storage primer to exposed steel per the manufacturer's
recommendations.
H. Inner layer tape application:
JUNE 2008 4 of 7 SECTION 09870
Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for
the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
1. Apply the inner layer tape directly onto the primed surface using approve'd
mechanical dispensing equipment to assure adequate, consistent tension on the
tape as recommended by the tape manufacturer. Use rollers to apply pressure
on the tape as it comes in contact with the pipe. Make necessary adjustments to
mechanical application equipment to assure a uniform, tight coating. Maintain a
tight, smooth, mechanically induced, wrinkle-free coating throughout the
application process.
2. The application of tension shall be such that the width of tape will be reduced
between 114 to 2 percent of tape width prior to the pull. Provide a pressure
readout gauge and chart recorder, suitable to the Engineer, with the tape let-off
machine to document the tape tension during application.
3. Apply inner layer tape at a minimum roll temperature of 70°F. Continuously
monitor the temperature of the tape within 12 inches of the point of contact with
the pipe surface. Use a chart recorder, suitable to the Engineer, to document the
temperature of the tape during application. Sections where the tape application
tension and temperature is not maintained within manufacturer's
recommendations shall be rejected and the tape removed from the entire pipe
section and reapplied.
4. Continuously electronically test the inner tape layer at 6,000 volts immediately
following application of the tape by a holiday tester permanently mounted to the
tape application station and equipped with an indicator light and audio buzzer,
suitable to the Engineer to alert the workmen of the presence of holidays in the
coating system.
5. Spirally wrap the inner layer tape over longitudinally or spirally welded pipe.
Provide a 1-inch minimum tape overlap.
6. Splice each new roll by overlapping the new tape over the end of the preceding
roll by at least 6 inches. Perform this end lap splice by hand or by a mechanical
applicator so that the splice is wrinkle free and maintains the continuity of the
inner wrap coating. Maintain the wrapping angle of the new roll parallel to that of
the previous roll.
7. Provide tape cutbacks based on the joint type required, cutting the tape edge
parallel to the end of the pipe. Perform cutbacks using a cutting device that is
guided from the end of the pipe to insure a uniform, straight cutback.
Mechanical outer layer tape application.
1. Apply the first mechanical outer layer of tape over the inner layer tape using the
same type of mechanical equipment used in the application of the inner layer
tape. No overlap splice of the other layer coinciding with the overlap splice of the
inner layer will be permitted. Provide a minimum 6-inch separation between
overlap of splices. Apply two mechanical outer layers of tape as specified herein.
The inner layer tape shall be electrically tested, inspected, and approved prior to
the application of the first mechanical outer layer tape and the first mechanical
outer layer tape shall also be visually inspected and approved prior to the
application of the second mechanical outer layer tape. Ensure that both
mechanical outer layer tapes are smooth, tight and wrinkle-free.
JUNE 2008 5 of 7 SECTION 09870
Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for
the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
2. Apply mechanical outer layer tapes in accordance with the requirements for the
inner layer tape, except that the minimum tape roll application temperature shall
be 90° F. Monitoring for tension and temperature will be required for the
mechanical outer layer tapes. The use of rollers to apply pressure on the tape is
not required during application of the mechanical outer layer tapes. Holiday
testing of the mechanical outer layer tapes is not required during tape
application. Test the complete tape system prior to coating as specified herein.
J. Apply a reinforced cement mortar shield over the outer layer of tape in accordance with
AWWA C205. Cement mortar shall be per Section 15061.
K. Storage primer application shall conform to AWWA G214 as modified herein:
1. Prior to storage primer application, clean the pipe surface free from foreign
matter such as sand, grease, oil, grit, rust particles and dirt.
2. Apply primer only to a dry pipe surface. Whenever the ambient air temperatures
are cold enough to cause gelling of the primer, the use of heaters will not be
permitted to return the primer back to a fully liquid state. Use new primer at a
minimum of 40°F.
3. Apply storage primer to the exposed steel pipe at tape cutbacks to prevent
oxidation of the cleaned metal surface. Apply minimum of 1.5 mils and maximum
of 2.5 mils of storage primer to exposed steel per the manufacturer's
recommendations. Do not place storage primer on the edge of the steel plate.
3.3 FITTINGS COATED AT THE PLANT
A. Coat fittings that cannot be machine coated in accordance with AWWA C209 using
materials as specified herein. Weld bead preparation, surface preparation, blast cleaning
and liquid adhesive shall be as specified for straight run pipe. Apply an inner layer tape
of Polyken #932-50 with a 1-inch minimum tape overlap on all plant coated fittings. Apply
an outer layer of cold-appiied polyethylene tape as specified herein with a 55 percent
overlap on all plant-coated fittings. Provide a minimum thickness of 110 mils for the total
tape coat system for plant-coated fittings.
B. Test all completed tape coated fittings in the presence of the Engineer with an electrical
flaw detector prior to the application of the cement mortar coating. Applied voltage shall
be in the range of 11,000 to 15,000 volts. Repair any holidays found.
C. Repair cement mortar coating defects in accordance with the approved repair
procedures.
D. Apply cement mortar coating in accordance with AWWA C205, over the tape-coated
fittings after completion of tape coating, testing and inspections.
3.4 TAPE APPLICATION TO FITTINGS, SPECIALS AND PIPE JOINTS (Field)
A. Field cold applied plastic tape coating shall be in accordance with AWWA C209, as
modified herein.
B. Prior to welding any fieldjoints, wrap an 18-inch strip of heat resistance material over the
entire coated pipe section to avoid damage to the plant applied coating by the hot weld
spatter.
JUNE 2008 6 of 7 SECTION 09870
Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for
the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
C. Clean the pipe surface free of mud, mill lacquer, wax, tar grease, or any foreign matter.
The pipe surface shall be free of any moisture and all foreign matter prior to the
application of prime.
D. Pack irregularities in joint with elastameric joint filler.
E. Apply primer by brush or roller (4 mil wet, 1 mil dry).
F. After primer has dried, apply tape to the joint and extend a minimum of 3-inch onto
adjacent tape wrap. Maintain 55 percent overlap on all field joint tape to produce a
minimum thickness of 100 mils.
G. Apply tape with sufficient tension to conform with the surface. The finish wrap shall
produce a smooth, wrinkle-free surface.
H. The tape system for pipe joints is shown in Section 2.6.
3.5 INSPECTION OF TAPE COATING
Test the applied tape coating in the presence of the engineer with an electrical holiday detector,
as a part of the tape installation process. Repair all holidays and physical damage. If mortar
shield is applied at a different location than the tape coating system, a second electrical holiday
spark test shall be required after all transportation and handling to the mortar coating location
confirming the integrity of the tape undercoating. Upon completion of the mortar coating process
a continuity or spark test will again be preformed for the tape system. Repair any holidays and
physical damage and spark test, verifying repair.
3.6 MORTAR SHIELD
A. Apply mortar coating in accordance with Section 15061 cement. Mortar lined and coated
steel pipe and specials, over the tape coated pipe immediately upon completion of tape
wrapping, testing, and inspections.
3.7 PROTECTING COATED PIPE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect all coated surfaces from damage prior to and during the
pipe installation in accordance with these specifications.
B. In transporting the coated pipe, it shall rest in saddles shaped to the outside diameter of
the coated pipe. The saddles shall be in contact with the bottom of the pipe along an arc
of at least 60 degrees. Saddles shall be completely lined with adequate padding. No
nails or any other fasteners that may damage the coating will be allowed in the
installation of the padding of the saddles.
C. While laying tape coated steel pipe, the pipe shall not be rolled or skidded when it is in
contact with the ground at any point. Immediately before the coated pipe is lowered into
the trench the CONTRACTOR shall provide a visual and holiday inspection of the coating
on the entire pipe coating system. Coated pipe shall be lowered into the trench using
saddled, not choked, belt slings. The use of chains, hooks, or other equipment which
might damage the pipe coating will not be permitted. All other pipe handling equipment
and methods shall be approved by the ENGINEER. Pipe stored alongside of the trench
shall be supported on padded skids, sand bags, or rock-free sand berms.
END OF SECTION
JUNE 2008 7 of 7 SECTION 09870
Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for
the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines
SECTION 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Work Included - Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to:
A. Exterior and interior doors and frames
B. Interior gypsum board walls, ceilings, and soffits
C. Exposed piping and metal
D. Exterior cement plaster at trim and accent colors of building.
E. Exterior fascias
F. Exterior eaves, soffits, and mechanical roof walls
G. Exterior cement plaster eaves, soffits, and mechanical roof well walls.
H. All other exterior and interior attachments and accessories adjacent to painted surfaces
I. Contractor to coordinate all exterior paints with the anti-graffiti coating as specified.
B. Field application of paints, stains, and other coatings.
C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and
unless otherwise indicated, including the following:
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
6. Glass.
7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;
2007.
C. ASTM D 4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Base Materials; 1992 (Reapproved 2003).
D. GreenSeal GS-11 - Paints; 1993.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.
C. Samples: Submit three drawdown samples of selected colors for review.
D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.
E. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings do not contain any of the prohibited
chemicals specified; GreenSeal GS-11 certification is not required but if provided shall constitute
acceptable certification.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated
surfaces.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,
with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PAINTS AND COATINGS
Specifications 09900 -1
approved by manufacturer.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. See Section 01400 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.
B. Mock-up may remain as part of the work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a
maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's
instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the
humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) for interiors;
50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's
instructions.
E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) for interior
or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 Ix) measured mid-height at substrate surface.
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
B. Supply 1 gallon (4 L) of each color; store where directed.
C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer;
no exceptions.
B. Paints:
1. ICI Paints: www.icipaintsinna.com.
C. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and
capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer
categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D-National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of State in which the project is located.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PAINTS AND COATINGS
Specifications 09900 - 2
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at
project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Colors: As indicated on drawings
1. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without
additional cost to Owner.
2. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the
wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.
3. In utility areas, finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in colors according
to the color coding scheme indicated.
4. Color Schedules
a. The Architect will prepare a color schedule with samples for guidance in painting after
color selection from samples submitted.
Interior Color:
1. GBP1 -#81YY 81/016 Quiet Hideaway
2. GBP2-# OONN 53/000 Veil
3. GBPS - # 30BG 16/133 Berkeley Blue
Exterior Color:
1. EP1 -#OONN 53/000 Veil
2. EP2 - # OONN 13/000 Obsidian Glass
b. The Architect may select, allocate, and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the
work, subject to the following:
1) Exterior Work: A maximum of five (5) different colors will be used, with variations
for trim, doors, miscellaneous work and metal work.
2) Interior Work: A maximum of six (6) different pigmented colors will be used, with
variations for trim and wall surfaces and wainscots.
5. Paints at Wet Areas
a. In toilet rooms and contiguous areas, add an approved fungicide to paints.
b. For oil based paints, use 1% phenylmercuric or 4% tetrachlorophenol.
c. For water emulsion and glue size surfaces, use 4% sodium tetrachlorophenate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes
unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent.
3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
D. Remove surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
G. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PAINTS AND COATINGS
Specifications 09900 - 3
defects after repair.
H. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with
solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
I. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld
splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool
wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric
acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire
surface; spot prime after repairs.
J. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and
rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent.
Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
K. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks
after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks.
B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
to applying next coat.
G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01400 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PAINTS AND COATINGS
Specifications 09900 - 4
SECTION 09901
PAINTING AND COATING WATER PIPING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section described the requirements for the preparation of surfaces and subsequent
application of protective coatings. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and
equipment required for satisfactory completion of all items contained herein. The Contractor
shall furnish all necessary safety equipment and protective clothing, as well as be responsible
for proper instruction and supervision of their use. Requirements for steel storage reservoirs
are specified elsewhere in the Specifications.
1.2 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
The Contractor shall refer to the following Specification section(s) for additional
requirements:
A. General Piping System & Appurtenances: 15000
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of the GENERAL
PROVISIONS. The following submittals are required:
A. Submit a chart of the manufacturer's available colors for color selection well in
advance of painting operation.
B. Submit manufacturer's data sheets showing the following information:
1. Recommended surface preparation.
2. Minimum and maximum recommended dry-film thicknesses per coat for prime,
intermediate, and finish coats.
3. Percent solids by volume.
4. Recommended thinners.
5. Statement verifying that the selected prime coat is recommended by the
manufacturer for use with the selected intermediate and finish coats.
6. Application instructions including recommended application, equipment,
humidity, and temperature limitations.
7. Curing requirements and instructions.
C. Submit certification that all coatings conform to applicable local Air Quality
Management City rules and regulations for products and application.
JUNE 2008 1of10 SECTION 09901
Painting and Coating
1.4 PAYMENT
Payment for the Work in this section shall be included as part of the lump-sum or unit-
price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant thereto.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL
All materials shall be those of current manufacture and shall meet all applicable
regulations for the application and intended service. All coats of any particular coating
system shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be approved by the manufacturer
for the intended service. In the event that a product specified herein is no longer
manufactured or does not meet current regulations, the Contractor shall provide a
substitute, currently manufactured product of at least equal performance which meets all
applicable regulations subject to Engineer's approval, at no additional cost.
All materials shall be delivered to the Project Site in their original, unopened containers
bearing the manufacturer's name, brand, and batch number. Standard products of
manufacturers other than those specified will be accepted when it is proved to the
satisfaction of the Engineer they are equal in composition, durability, usefulness and
convenience for the purpose intended. Paint listed in the system refers to products of
the following manufacturers and distributors:
Ameron Corrosion Control Division, Brea, CA
I.C. Devoe, Louisville, KY
Engard Coating Corporation, Long Beach, CA
I. DuPont de Nemours & Company, Los Angeles, CA
Tnemec Company, Inc., Kansas City, MO 64141
All surfaces to be coated or painted shall be in the proper condition to receive the
material specified before any coating or painting is done. No more sandblasting or
surface preparation than can be coated or painted in a normal working day will be
permitted. All sharp edges, burrs, and weld spatter shall be removed. All concrete and
masonry surfaces shall cure 30 days prior to coating or painting.
Surface preparation, prime coatings, and finish coats for the various systems are
specified herein. Unless otherwise noted, all intermediate and finish coats shall be of
contrasting colors. It is the intent that the coating alternates specified herein serve as a
general guide for the type of coating desired.
2.2 VALVES
A. Exterior Coating: Coat metal valves focated above ground, in vaults or in structures
the same as the adjacent piping. If the adjacent piping is not coated, then coat
valves per this Specification section unless otherwise noted. Apply the specified
prime coat at the place of manufacture. Apply intermediate and finish coats in the
field. Finish coat shall match the color of the adjacent piping. Coat handwheels and
floor stands the same as the valves. Coat the exterior of buried metal valves at the
place of manufacture per this specification.
JUNE 2008 2 of 10 SECTION 09901
Painting and Coating
B. Coating (Devoe Alternate): Prime coat shall be BarRust 231 or Devran 200 applied
at 2 to 3 mils dry-film thickness. Intermediate coat shall be Devran 224H Epoxy
applied at 2 to 4 mils dry-film thickness. Finish coat shall be 379 Urethane applied
at 2 to 3 mils dry-film thickness.
C. Interior Lining: Valves 4-inches and larger shall be coated on their interior metal
surfaces excluding seating areas and bronze and stainless-steel pieces. Sandblast
surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP-10 (near white blast cleaning). Remove all
protuberances which may produce pinholes in the lining. Round all sharp edges to
be coated. Remove any contaminants which may prevent bonding of the lining.
Coat the interior ferrous surfaces using one of the following methods:
1. Apply powdered thermosetting epoxy per the manufacturer's application
recommendations to a thickness of 10 to 12 mils.
2. Apply two coats of polyamide epoxy to a dry-film thickness of 10 to 12 mils
total. Follow the manufacturer's application recommendations including
minimum and maximum drying time between the required coats.
3. Apply two coats of Tnemec Series 140 (for potable water) or Series 69 (for non-
potable water), or equal, to a dry film thickness of 10 to 12 mils total. Follow
manufacturer's application recommendations including minimum and maximum
drying time between required coats.
4. Apply two coats of Devoe Bar-Rust 233H Epoxy applied to a dry-film thickness
of 6 to 8 mils, each. Total dry-film thickness shall be 10 to 12 mils minimum.
All epoxy lining shall be applied at the factory by the manufacturer of the valve, and
shall meet current Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content regulations. Epoxy
lining for potable water valves shall also be listed by National Sanitation Foundation
(NSF) for contact with potable water.
Test the valve interior linings at the factory with a low-voltage holiday detector.
The lining shall be holiday free.
2.3 METAL, INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR, NORMAL EXPOSURE
A. General: The Contractor shall paint all exposed steelwork, non-galvanized
handrails, exposed pipework, fittings, all mechanical equipment, pumps, motors,
doors, door frames and window sash with this coating system. All metalwork
previously given a shop prime coat approved by the Owner's Representative shall
be touched up as required in the field with Tnemec Series 4 Versare Primer or
equal.
B. Surface Preparation: All exterior metal surfaces which are to be painted shall be
commercial blast cleaned per Specification SP-6 (commercial blast cleaning) except
as otherwise specified, in locations where sandblasting would damage previously
coated surfaces and installed equipment, and in locations where dry sandblasting is
prohibited. The above locations in which SP-6 commercial sandblasting is not
possible shall be given a SP-3 power tool cleaning. This sandblasting shall be done
not more than 8 hours ahead of the painting, subject to humidity and weather
conditions between the time of sandblasting and painting operations. If any rusting
or discoloration of sandblasted surfaces occurs before painting, such rusting or
JUNE 2008 3 of 10 SECTION 09901
Painting and Coating
discoloration shall be removed by additional sandblasting. Sandblasted surfaces
shall not be left overnight before painting.
C. Coating (Tnemec Alternate): Prime coat or spot prime coat as required shall be
Tnemec Series 4 Versare primer applied to a dry-film thickness of 2 to 3.5 mils.
Two or more finish coats of Tnemec Series 2H Tneme-Gloss enamel shall be
applied to a thickness of 1.5 to 3.5 mils. Total dry-film thickness of the complete
system shall be 7 mils, minimum.
D. Coating (Devoe Alternate): Prime coat or spot prime as required shall be 4140 Q.D.
Alkyd Primer. Two or more finish coats of Devshield 4328 Alkyd applied to a dry-film
thickness of 1.5 to 2 mils, each. Total dry-film thickness of the complete system
shall be 5 mils, minimum.
2.4 METAL, SUBMERGED OR INTERMITTENTLY SUBMERGED
A. General: All submerged metalwork, gates, equipment, valves, exposed pipework
and all other metalwork within areas which will be submerged, except as noted
hereinafter, shall be painted with this coating system.
B. Surface Preparation: All metal surfaces shall be field sandblasted according to
SSPC-SP-10 (near white blast cleaning).
C. Coating (Tnemec Alternate): Prime coat shall be Tnemec Series 69 Epoxoline II
applied to a dry-film thickness of 4 to 6 mils. Two finish coats of Tnemec Series 69
Epoxoline II shall be applied to a dry-film thickness of 4 to 6 mils each coat. Total
try-film thickness of the complete system shall be a minimum of 12 mils.
D. Coating (Devoe Alternate): Apply two coats of Bar-Rust 233H Epoxy applied to a
dry-film thickness of 6 to 8 mils each coat. Total dry-film thickness of the complete
system shall be a minimum of 12 mils.
2.5 METAL, SEVERE EXPOSURE TO MOISTURE OR CHEMICAL FUMES
A. Surface Preparation: All metal surfaces shall be field sandblasted according to
SSPC-SP-10 (near white blast cleaning).
B. Coating (Tnemec Alternate): Prime coat shall be Tnemec Series 104 H.S. Epoxy to
a dry-film thickness of 6 to 10 mils. One or more finish coats of Tnemec Series 104
H.S. Epoxy topcoat shall be applied. Total dry-film thickness shall be a minimum of
12 mils.
C. Coating (Devoe Alternate): Prime coat shall be Catha-Coat 304V Zinc, 2 to 3 mils
dry-film thickness. Intermediate coat shall be Devran 224H Epoxy applied at 4 to 6
mils dry-film thickness. Finish coat shall be Devthane 379 Urethane applied at 2 to
3 mils dry-film thickness. Total dry-film thickness shall be 8 mils minimum.
2.6 METAL, HIGH-TEMPERATURE EXPOSURE
A. General: Engine mufflers, exhaust systems and other metal surfaces subjected to
high temperatures shall be coated with this system.
JUNE 2008 4 of 10 SECTION 09901
Painting and Coating
B. Surface Preparation: Surface shall be field sandblasted in accordance with SSPC-
SP-10 (near white blast cleaning).
C. Coating (Tnemec Alternate): One coat of Tnemec Series 90-96 Tneme-Zinc to a
minimum total dry-film thickness of 2 to 3.5 mils.
D. Coating (Devoe Alternate): One coat of Catha-Coat 304V Zinc to a dry-film
thickness of 2 to 4 mils.
2.7 METAL, GALVANIZED, ALUMINUM, COPPER, OR BRASS
A. Surface Preparation: Surfaces shall be solvent cleaned in accordance with SSPC-
SP-1 (solvent cleaning) and SSPC-SP-2 (hand tool cleaning).
B. Coating: Pre-treatment prime coat shall be Tnemec Series 32-1215 Tneme-Grip or
Sinclair 7113 Wash Primer applied at n mil dry-film thickness. Next, apply
recommended coating or paint for the particular surface to be coated.
C. Coating (Devoe Alternate): Pre-treatment prime coat shall be Devoe BarRust 231
primer applied at 3 mil dry-film thickness. Next, apply recommended coating or
paint for the particular surface to be coated.
2.8 METAL, BURIED
A. General: The Contractor shall coat all buried metal which includes valves, bolts,
nuts, structural steel and fittings. It does not include steel storage reservoirs.
B. Surface Preparation: Sandblast to SSPC-SP-6 (commercial blast cleaning)
C. Coating (Tnemec Alternate): Prime none. Finish with two coats of Tnemec Series
46-465 H.B. Tnemecol or equal at 10 to 12 mils dry-film thickness, each. Total dry-
film thickness shall be 20 mils minimum.
D. Coating (Devoe Alternate): Prime with Devtar 221 (5A) Epoxy applied at 8 mil dry-
film thickness. Two coats of Devtar (5A) Epoxy applied at 8 mils dry-film thickness,
each. Total dry-film thickness shall be 24 mils, minimum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall arrange with the Owner's Representative so that all surface
preparation may be inspected and approved prior to the application of any coatings.
The Contractor is hereby notified that the Engineer will inspect the Work prior to the
expiration of the warranty period and all defects in workmanship and material shall be
repaired by the Contractor, at his own expense.
JUNE 2008 5 of 10 SECTION 09901
Painting and Coating
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
It is the intent of the Specifications that finishes shall be provided which meet standards
for best grades of painting. Drop cloths shall be placed where required to protect floors,
surfaces and equipment from spatter and dropping, not to receive paint or coatings.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect all adjacent Work and all
surrounding property and improvements from any damage whatsoever as a result of the
painting and coating operation.
Only good, clean brushes and equipment shall be used and all brushes, buckets, and
spraying equipment shall be cleaned immediately at the end of each painting period.
Each coat of paint shall be of the consistency as supplied by the manufacturer, or
thinned, if necessary, and applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Each
coat shall be well brushed, rolled or sprayed to obtain a uniform and evenly applied
finish. Work shall be free from "runs", "bridges", "shiners", or other imperfections due to
faulty intervals. Particular care shall be taken to obtain a uniform unbroken coating over
all bolts, threads, nuts, welds, edges and corners. Paint shall not be applied in extreme
heat, in dust or smoke laden air, or in damp or humid weather, unless written permission
of the Engineer is obtained.
If paint is applied by spray, the air pressure used shall be within the ranges
recommended by both the paint and spray equipment manufacturers. Spray painting
shall be conducted under controlled conditions and the Contractor shall be fully
responsible for any damage occurring from spray painting.
Care shall be exercised not to damage adjacent Work during sandblasting operations.
Stainless steel need not be sandblasted. Blasted surfaces shall not be left overnight
before coating. All dust shall be removed from the surface following sandblasting.
3.3 APPLICATION PROCEDURES
A. Surfaces to be Coated: All surfaces of materials furnished and constructed are to
be painted or coated per the Specifications except as indicated below.
B. Surfaces Not To Be Coated: The following surfaces shall not be coated unless
otherwise noted on the Plans and shall be fully protected when adjacent areas are
painted.
Aluminum grating Machined surfaces
Aluminum surfaces Metal letters
Bearings Mortar-coated pipe and fittings
Brass and copper tubing, submerged* Nameplates on machinery
Buried pipe Pipe interior*
Couplings Shafts
Grease fittings Stainless steel
Hardware Switch plates
Lighting fixtures
* unless specifically required on the Plans or elsewhere in the Specifications
C. Protection of Surfaces Not To Be Coated: Surfaces not intended to be painted shall
be removed, masked, or otherwise protected. Drop cloths shall be provided to
prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. Working parts
of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be protected from damage during
surface preparation and painting process. Openings in motors shall be safely
JUNE 2008 6 of 10 SECTION 09901
Painting and Coating
masked to prevent paint and other materials from entering the motors. All masking
materials shall be completely removed and surfaces cleaned at completion of
painting operations.
D. Weather Conditions: Paint shall not be applied in the rain, wind, snow, mist, and fog
or when steel or metal surface temperatures are less than 5°F above the dew point.
Paint shall not be applied when the relative humidity is above 80%, the air
temperature is above 90°F, or the temperature of metal to be painted is above
125°F.
Alkyd, chlorinated rubber, inorganic zinc, silicone aluminum, or silicone acrylic
paints shall not be applied if air or surface temperature is below 50°F or expected to
be below 50°F within 24 hours.
Epoxy, coal tar epoxy, acrylic latex, and polyurethane paints shall not be applied on
an exterior or interior surface if air or surface temperature is below 50°F or expected
to drop below 50°F within 24 hours.
3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Sandblast or prepare only as much surface area as can be coated in one
day. All sharp edges, burrs, and weld spatter shall be removed. Epoxy-coated pipe
that has been factory coated shall not be sandblasted.
B. SSPC Specifications: Wherever the words "solvent cleaning", "hand tool cleaning",
"wire brushing", or "blast cleaning" or similar words are used in the Specifications or
in paint manufacturer's specifications, they shall be understood to refer to the
applicable SSPC (Steel Structures Paint Council, Surfaces Preparation
Specifications, ANSI A159.1) Specifications listed below:
SP-1 Solvent Cleaning SP-6 Commercial Blast Cleaning
SP-2 Hand Tool Cleaning SP-7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
SP-3 Power Tool Cleaning SP-8 Pickling
SP-5 White Metal Blast Cleaning SP-10 Near White Blast Cleaning
Oil and grease shall be removed from aluminum and copper surfaces in accordance
with SSPC SP-1 using clean cloths and cleaning solvents.
Weld spatter and weld slag shall be removed from metal surfaces. Rough welds,
beads, peaked corners, and sharp edges including erection lugs shall be ground
smoothly in accordance with SSPC SP-2 and SSPC SP-3.
Welds shall be neutralized with a chemical solvent that is compatible with the
specified coating materials using clean cloths and chemical solvent.
C. Abrasive Blast Cleaning: Dry abrasive blast cleaning shall be used for metal
surfaces. Do not recycle or reuse contaminated blast particles.
Dry clean surfaces to be coated by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming to remove
residue from blasting. Apply the specified primer or touch-up coating within the
period of an 8-hour working day. Do not apply coating over damp or moist surfaces.
Reclean prior to application of primer or touch-up coating any blast cleaned surface
not coated within said 8-hour period.
JUNE 2008 7 of 10 SECTION 09901
Painting and Coating
Prevent damage to adjacent coatings during blast cleaning. Schedule blast
cleaning and coating such that dust, dirt, blast particles, old coatings, rust, mill
scale, etc., will not damage or fall upon wet or newly coated surfaces.
JUNE 2008 8 of 10 SECTION 09901
Painting and Coating
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR THE APPLICATION OF COATINGS
The recommendations of the coating manufacturer shall be followed, including the
selection of spray equipment, brushes, rollers, cleaners, thinners, mixing, drying time,
temperature and humidity of application, and safety precautions.
Coating materials shall be kept at a uniform consistency during application. Each
coating shall be applied evenly, free of brush marks, sags, runs, and other evidence of
poor workmanship. A different shade or tint shall be used on succeeding coating
applications to indicate coverage where possible. Finished surfaces shall be free from
defects or blemishes.
Only thinners recommended by the coating manufacturer shall be used. If thinning is
allowed, do not exceed the maximum allowable amount of thinner per gallon of coating
material.
Apply a brush coat of primer on welds, sharp edges, nuts, bolts, and irregular surfaces
prior to the application of the primer and finish coat. The brush coat shall be done prior
to and in conjunction with the spray coat application. Apply the spray coat over the
brush coat.
Apply primer immediately after blast cleaning and before any surface rusting occurs, or
any dust, dirt, or any foreign matter has accumulated. Reclean surfaces by blast
cleaning that have surface colored or become moist prior to coating application.
A. Paint Mixing: Multiple-component coatings shall be prepared using all the contents
of each component container as packaged by the paint manufacturer. Partial
batches shall not be used. Multiple-component coatings that have been mixed
beyond their pot life shall not be used. Small quantity kits for touch-up painting and
for painting other small areas shall be provided. Only the components specified and
furnished by the paint manufacturer shall be mixed. For reasons of color or
otherwise, additional components shall not be intermixed, even within the same
generic type of coating.
B. Field Touch Up of Shop-Applied Prime Coats: Organic Zinc Primer: Surfaces that
are shop primed with inorganic zinc primers shall receive a field touch up of organic
zinc primer to cover all scratches or abraded areas. Organic zinc coating system
shall have a minimum volume solids of 54% and a minimum zinc content of
14 pounds per gallon. Coating shall be of the converted epoxy, epoxy phenolic, or
urethane type and shall be manufactured by the prime coat and finish coat
manufacturer.
Other Primers: Surfaces that are shop primed with other than organic zinc primer
shall receive a field touch up of the same primer used in the original prime coat.
3.6 DRY-FILM THICKNESS TESTING AND REPAIR
A. Special Instructions to the Contractor: The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner at
no charge for use during execution of the Work, necessary dry-film thickness gauge
and electrical flaw detection equipment. The Contractor shall perform the holiday
(pinholes) inspection in the presence of the Owner's Representative, and the
JUNE 2008 9 of 10 SECTION 09901
Painting and Coating
Contractor shall monitor wet film measurements throughout the application of each
coat of coating.
B. Coating Thickness Testing: Coating thickness specified for steel surfaces shall be
measured with a magnetic-type dry-film thickness gauge. Dry-film thickness gauge
shall be provided as manufactured by Mikrotest or Elcometer. Each coat shall be
checked for the correct dry-film thickness. Measurement shall not be made until a
minimum of eight hours after application of the coating. Non-magnetic surfaces
shall be checked for coating thickness by micrometer measurement of cut and
removed coupons. Contractor shall repair coating at all locations where coupons
are removed.
C. Holiday Testing: The finish coat (except zinc primer and galvanizing) shall be tested
by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer for holidays and discontinuities
with an electrical holiday detector of the low-voltage, wet-sponge type. Detector
shall be provided as manufactured by Tinker, Rasor, K-D Bird Dog, or approved
equal.
D. Repair: If the item has an improper finish, color, insufficient film thickness, or
holidays, the surface shall be cleaned and top-coated with the specified paint
material to obtain the specified color and coverage. Visible areas of chipped,
peeled, or abraded paint shall be hand or power-sanded, feathering the edges. The
areas shall then be primed and finish coated in accordance with the Specifications.
Work shall be free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections.
3.7 CLEANUP
Upon completion of all painting and coating Work, the Contractor shall remove all
surplus materials and rubbish. The Contractor shall repair all damage and shall leave
the premises in a clean and orderly condition.
END OF SECTION
JUNE 2008 10 of 10 SECTION 09901
Painting and Coating
SECTION 09902
PETROLATUM WAX TAPE COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
This section covers the work necessary to furnish and install petrolatum wax tape
coating on buried ferrous materials including pipe flanges, bolted fittings and couplings,
valves and other buried pipeline appurtenances, complete, as shown or specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS DURING CONSTRUCTION
Submit manufacturer's technical product data, details, installation instructions and
general product recommendations.
1.3 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of
establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired only. Products of
other manufacturers will be considered in accordance with the Contract Documents.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL
Wrap all exposed surfaces of buried ferrous pipe, flanges, couplings and other pipeline
appurtenances (including bolts, nuts, etc.) with petrolatum wax tape, unless another
corrosion protection system (other than a factory-installed paint coating) is otherwise
specified or indicated by the Contract Drawings. Exposed piping shall be wrapped only
where specifically called out on the Drawings. Ductile iron pipe encased with
polyethylene sheathing shall not be wrapped with this product.
2.2 PRIMER
Exposed surfaces shall be prime coated with a blend of petrolatum, plasticizer, and
corrosion inhibitor having a paste-like consistency. The material shall have the following
properties:
Pour Point 400-100° F
Flash Point 350° F
minimum
Approximate Coverage 1 gal/100
square feet
Color Brown
The primer shall be Trenton Wax-Tape Primer or equivalent.
JUNE 2008 1 of 3 SECTION 09902
Petrolatum Wax Tape Coating
2.3 WAX TAPE
Two types of petrolatum wax tape shall be available from the manufacturer: one type for
buried installations and another type for above-ground installations.
Buried Installations: The covering material shall be a plastic-fiber felt tape, saturated with
a blend of petrolatum, plasticizers, and corrosion inhibitors that is easily formable over
irregular surfaces. The tape shall have the following properties:
Color: Brown
Saturant Pour Point 115° -125°F
Thickness 70-90 mils
Dielectric Strength 170 volts/mil
Tape Width 6 inches
Wax tape shall be Wax-Tape #1 as manufactured by The Trenton Corporation (Ann
Arbor, Michigan), or approved equal.
2.4 OUTER COVERING
The primed and wax-tape wrapped surface shall be wrapped with a plastic tape covering
consisting of three (3) layers of 50 gauge, clear, polyvinylidene chloride, high cling
membranes wound together as a single sheet. The material shall have the following
properties:
Width
6 inches
Thickness
1.5 mils
Dielectric Strength
2000 volts/mil
Water Absorption
Negligible
Color
Clear
The outer covering shall be Trenton Poly-Ply or approved equal.
2.5 OTHER PETROLATUM WAX TAPE SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Any components not listed above, but required for a complete petrolatum wax tape
coating system as recommended for this application by the manufacturer shall be
provided at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
The petrolatum wax tape system shall be installed in conformance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
JUNE 2008 2 of 3 SECTION 09902
Petrolatum Wax Tape Coating
END OF SECTION
JUNE 2008 3 of 3 SECTION 09902
Petrolatum Wax Tape Coating
SECTION 09986
PLASTIC COATED WALL PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wainscot plastic coated wall panels (fiberglass reinforced).
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's materials specification, installation and maintenance
instructions.
C. Manufacturer's color brochure for selection of color and finish by Architect.
1.03 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PLASTIC COATED WALL PANELS
A. Manufacturers
1. Marlite - Standard FRP
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. Materials
1. Wall Panels: Standard Marlite FRP Panels
Panel: 3/32" thick by 48" wide by 96" long
2. Color: Smooth Surface S-100 White
3. Trim and Corners: PVC Trim Molding
Length: 8'and 10'
Color: Standard Marlite FRP - White
4. Accessories: As required by manufacturer
5. Other Materials - All other materials, anchorages, adhesives, attachment accessories and
methods, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of wall
panels, as recommended by the manufacturer, subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrates are prepared and ready to receive new work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install wall panels' plumb, level and true to line without distortions.
1. Trim: Level and plumb, with tightly mitered corners, cut cleanly with fine saw or razor blade.
Caulk joint between trim and wall.
2. Panels: Caulked into trim, with proper clearances for expansion and contraction, adhered
to wall without distortions.
C. Use adhesives, attachment accessories and methods as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the work, remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from the wall
covering installation. Leave areas in neat, clean and orderly condition.
B. Repair or replace any damaged work.
C. Remove excess adhesives using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. Clean
plastic panels and accessories using a cleaning agent as recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PLASTIC COATED WALL PANELS
Specifications 09986 -1
SECTION 10100
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Markerboards and Tackboards.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports.
B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Wood frame and chalkrails.
C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Concealed supports in metal stud walls.
D. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Finishing of wood frame and chalkrail.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 1999.
B. ASTM A 424 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling; 2006.
C. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2008.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on markerboard, tackboard, trim, and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations, special anchor details.
D. Samples: Submit color charts for selection of color and texture of markerboard, tackboard,
tackboard surface covering, and trim.
E. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. ,
B. Provide five year warranty for markerboard to include warranty against discoloration due to
cleaning, crazing or cracking, and staining.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Product:
1. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc for Markerboards: www.claridqeproducts.com.
2. WallTalker Dry Erase for Tackboards: www.walltalkers.com
3. SMART Technologies for Visual Display Boards: www.smarttech.com
4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
A. Markerboards: by Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc
Porcelain enamel on steel, laminated to core.
1. Color: 75 LCS-II Low Gloss White.
. 2. Model #: 1300 Series -1-1/4" Face Trim 1348L by Claridge
3. Metal Face Sheet Thickness: 0.024 inch, 24 gage (0.61 mm).
4. Core: Particleboard, manufacturer's standard thickness, laminated to face sheet.
5. Backing: Aluminum foil, laminated to core.
6. Height: 48 inches (1220 mm).
7. Length: 8 feet (2440 mm), in one piece.
8. Frame: Stain Anodized Aluminum - 1-1/4" Face, Mitered Corners, with concealed
fasteners.
9. Accessories: Provide chalk tray.
B. Tackboards: by WallTalker Dry Erase Presentation Wall Covering
Uni-color resilient homogeneous tackable linoleum surface consisting of linseed
oil, granulated cork, rosin binders, and dry pigments calendered onto natural
burlap backing. Color shall extend through thickness of material.
1. Model: TacWall by WallTalker
2. Gauge: 1/4 inches (6 mm)
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
Specifications 10100-1
3. Length: 95 Lineal Foot (28.92 meter) Roll
4. Height: 48 inches (1220 mm)
5. Adhesive: Solvent-free, SBR type linoleum adhesive (L-910) or polyvinyl acetate dispersion
type (contact adhesive) when used in a press.
6. Color: # 62 Pewter
7. Caulk: C100-62: Acrylic caulk pewter
8. J-Trim: JT12-00: Clear satin, anodized aluminum, 1/4 inch (6 millimeter) trim
9. Q-Pins: WTQP-00: 24 Push Pins Black and White.
WTQP-01: 24 Push Pins Translucent.
C. Visual Display Board: by SMART Board Model # 685i3
1. 685 I nteractive Wh iteboard
a. Size: 77 1/2" W x 49 1/2" H x 5 1/8" D (196.9 cm x 125.7 cm x 13 cm)
b. Active Screen Area: 74" W x 46 1/8" H (188 cm x 117.2 cm)
87 1/8" (221.3 cm) diagonal
16:10 aspect ratio
2. UF55w Projector System
a. Total Size: 18 1/2" W x 15 1/2" H x 47 1/4" D (47 cm x 39.4 cm x 120 cm)
b. Extended Control Panel: 11" W x 7 5/8" H x 2 3/8" D (27.9 cm x 19.4 cm x 6 cm)
c. Remote Control: 1 5/8" W x 3 3/8" H x 1/4" D (4 cm x 8.6 cm x 0.7 cm)
d. Projector Box: 18 1/2" W x 15 1/8" H x 8 1/4" D (47 cm x 38.5 cm x 21 cm)
e. Accessory Box: 39 3/4" W x 9 1/2" H x 16" D (100.9 cm x 24.1 cm x 41.2 cm)
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Porcelain Enameled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 424, Type I, Commercial Steel, with fired-on vitreous
finish.
B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; wood chips, set with waterproof resin binder, sanded faces.
C. Foil Backing: Aluminum foil sheet, 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Temporary Protective Cover: Sheet polyethylene, 8 mil (0.2 mm) thick.
B. Cleaning Instruction Plate: Provide instructions for chalkboard cleaning on a metal plate
fastened to perimeter frame near chalkrail.
C. Chalk Tray: Aluminum, manufacturer's standard profile one piece full length of chalkboard,
molded ends; concealed fasteners, same finish as frame.
D. Mounting Brackets: Concealed.
PARTS EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as
indicated on shop drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure units level and plumb.
C. Butt Joints: Install with tight hairline joints.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Cover with protective cover, taped to frame.
C. Remove temporary protective cover at date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
Specifications 10100 - 2
SECTION 10170
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART-1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Steel compartment work includes the following:
1. Floor anchored toilet compartments partitions with powder coated metal.
B. Furnish all labor and materials necessary for the completion of work in this section as
shown on the contract drawings and specified herein.
C. Work in this section shall include but is not limited to:
1. Toilet compartments
2. Hardware for toilet compartments
3. Hardware for wall hung screen urinal
3. Shop drawings and working drawings
4. Manufacturer's guarantee
D. Related work specified elsewhere shall include accessories and anchorage/blocking for
attachment of compartments.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide all drawings and details for architect's approval.
D. Verification Samples: Submit three samples, 4x4 inch (101.6 x 101.6 mm) in size
illustrating color product specified.
E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance
materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials from damage by storing on end.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall and floor.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Global Partitions guarantees its powder coated steel units, properly maintained, against
corrosion or discoloration for 3 years from the date of receipt by the customer. If materials
are found defective during that period for the reasons listed above, the material will be
replaced free of charge. No credits or allowances will be issued for any labor or expenses
relating to the replacement of components covered under the warranty plan. All such
expenses are to be borne by the buyer.
PART-2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Toilet compartments to be supplied by Global Partitions, Eastanollee, GA 30538.
2.02 PRODUCTS
A. Type: Powder Coated Metal Floor Anchored Toilet Compartment
B. Color: From the manufacturer's standard colors.
1. Door Partition Color: Red #2145
2. Toilet/Urinal Partition Color: Charcoal # 2123
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Doors and panels shall be 1" thick, constructed of two sheets of 22-gauge galvanized,
stretcher-leveled quality steel formed and bonded under pressure with a non-toxic
adhesive to a resin-impregnated, sound-deadening honeycomb core.
B. Pilasters shall be 1-1/4" thick, constructed of two sheets of 18-gauge galvanized steel,
formed and bonded under pressure with a non-toxic adhesive to a full resin-impregnated,
sound-deadening full-face honeycomb core.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility TOILET COMPARTMENTS
Specifications 10170-1
2.04 CONSTRUCTION
A. Doors and panels shall be 1" thick. The perimeter shall be sealed with a 22-gauge steel
interlocking molding. Molding corners shall be welded to each other and to face sheets,
and ground smooth to form a rigid frame around the component.
B. Pilasters shall be 1-1/4", constructed of two sheets of 18-gauge galvanized steel, formed
and bonded under pressure with a non-toxic adhesive to a resin-impregnated,
sound-deadening full-face honeycomb core. Vertical edges shall be sealed with 20-gauge
steel interlocking molding. The top of each pilaster shall be sealed with 20- gauge steel
interlocking molding. An 11-gauge slotted stirrup bracket shall be integrally welded in to
base of each pilaster. Two 3/8" diameter cadmium-plated studs anchor the mounting
bracket to a concrete floor. A shoe shall conceal each floor mounting, having an internal
cross section conforming to the pilaster, and being formed of type 304 stainless steel #4
finish.
C. All units shall be cleaned prior to application of baked GLO-GARD hybrid powder coating of
at least 1.3 mil thickness.
2.05 HARDWARE
A. All exposed door hardware shall be of chromium-plated diecast Zamac and shall be as
noted:
1. Upper door hinge is recessed and interlocked in door and includes a nylon pin within
the plane of the door. Lower door hinge is recessed in door and includes mating box
and pintle nylon cams, which provide the bearing surface. The cams are adjusted to
allow the door to rest at any position within a 270-degree range.
2. Door hardware shall include coat hook, bumper, stop, keeper and a concealed latch
with emergency access.
B. Wall brackets shall be secured to walls with anchoring and/or expansion shields.
C. Pilaster shoes shall be of type 304 stainless steel #4 finish.
D. Fasteners shall be of chrome-plated steel; door hinges will be mounted with tamper
resistant barrel nuts and machine screws; hooks and handles will be mounted with tamper
resistant full-thread screws.
E. Installation of urinal screen to be wall hung screen.
PART-3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Examine areas to receive toilet compartments for correct height and spacing of
anchorage/blocking and plumbing fixtures that may affect installation of compartments.
Report any discrepancies to the architect.
B. Take complete and accurate measurements of toilet compartment locations.
C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of job.
D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
E. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install compartments in a rigid, straight, plumb and level manner as shown on the shop
drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. All doors and panels to be mounted at 12" above the finished floor unless otherwise
specified.
C. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch (9 to 13 mm) space between wall and panels and between wall
and end pilasters.
D. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.
E. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets.
F. Clearance at vertical edges of door shall be uniform top to bottom.
G. No evidence of cutting, drilling and/or patching shall be visible on the finished work.
H. Finished surfaces shall be cleaned after installation and be left free of all imperfections.
I. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or
scratched materials with new materials.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility TOILET COMPARTMENTS
Specifications 10170 - 2
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding
3/16 inch (5 mm).
B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return
out-swinging doors to closed position.
C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility TOILET COMPARTMENTS
Specifications 10170-3
SECTION 10210
WALL LOUVERS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Louvers, frames, and accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural
Manufacturers Association; 1998.
B. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control
Association International, Inc.; 2007.
C. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; Air Movement and Control
Association International, Inc.; 2007.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air
velocity, design free area, materials and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions,
tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blankout areas required, and
frames.
D. Test Reports: Independent agency reports showing compliance with specified performance
criteria.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wall Louvers:
1. Airolite Company, LLC: www.airolite.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements.
2.02 LOUVERS
A. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories;
AMCA Certified under AMCA 511.
1. Wind Load Resistance: Design to resist positive and negative wind load of 25 psf (1.2 kPa)
without damage or permanent deformation.
2. Intake Louvers: Design to allow maximum of 0.01 oz/sq ft (3.1 g/sq m) water penetration at
calculated intake design velocity based on design air flow and actual free area, when tested
in accordance with AMCA 500-L
3. Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutter
recessed into both jambs of frame.
4. Screens: Provide insect screens at intake louvers and bird screens at exhaust louvers.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M),.
1. Color Anodizing: AAMA 611 Class I, AA-M12C22A42/44.
B. Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of steel, 0.063 inch (1.6 mm) diameter wire, 1/2 inch (13
mm) open weave, diagonal design.
C. Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Screens: Frame of same material as louver, with reinforced corners; removable, screw
attached; installed on inside face of louver frame.
PARTS EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility WALL LOUVERS
Specifications 10210-1
are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install louvers level and plumb.
C. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion
of moisture to exterior.
D. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operable louvers for freedom of movement of control mechanism. Lubricate operating
joints.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Strip protective finish coverings.
B. Clean surfaces and components.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility WALL LOUVERS
Specifications 10210 - 2
SECTION 10350
FLAGPOLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum Flagpoles.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2006.
8. ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2007.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide flagpoles capable of withstanding the effects of wind loads as
determined according to NAAMM FP 1001-97.
B. Provide structural design by CA Engineer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on pole, accessories, and configurations.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate detailed dimensions, base details, anchor requirements, and imposed
loads.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Designer Qualifications: Design flagpole foundation under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed California.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Spiral wrap flagpole with protective covering and pack in protective shipping tubes or containers.
B. Protect flagpole and accessories from damage or moisture.
C. Ship to project site in one piece.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Flagpoles:
1. American Flagpole: www.americanflagpole.com.
2. Pole-Tech Co., Inc: www.poletech.com.
3. Morgan Francis: www.morgan-francis.com
2.02 FLAGPOLES
A. Flagpole: Aluminum.
1. Outside Butt Diameter: 5 inches.
2. Nominal Wall Thickness: 0.125 inches.
3. Nominal Height: 30 ft (9.144 m); measured from nominal ground elevation.
4. Mounting: Ground mounted type.
5. Design: Cone tapered.
6. Halyard: Internal type.
2.03 POLE MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Finial Ball: Clear Anodized, 6 inch (150 mm) diameter.
B. Cleats: 9 inch (230 mm) size, aluminum with stainless steel fastenings, two per halyard.
C. Halyard: 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter polypropylene, braided, white.
D. Haylard Flag Snaps: Provide two (2) swivel snap hooks per haylard as follows:
1. Stainless Steel
E. Collar: Heavy Duty Spun Aluminum
2.05 MOUNTING COMPONENTS
A. Foundation Tube: PVC foundation tube, Schedule 40 minimum, sized to suit flagpole and
installation.
2.06 FINISHING
A. Metal Finishes, General: Comply with NAAMM 'Metal Finish for Architectural and Metal
Products' for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility FLAGPOLES
Specifications 10350-1
B. Color: Anodized finish complying with American Aluminum AA M32-C22-A42. Finish to be Clear
Anodized.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that concrete foundation is ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Foundation Tube Installation: Install flagpole in foundation tube, seated on bottom plate
between steel centering wedges. Plumb flagpole and install hardwood wedges to secure
flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges.
Seal top of foundation tube with a 2" layer of elastomeric sealant and cover with flashing collar.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1 inch (25 mm).
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating devices so that halyard and flag function smoothly.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility FLAGPOLES
Specifications 10350 - 2
SECTION 10400
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior changeable modular signs, mounted on a perforated chassis.
B. Emergency evacuation maps.
C. Exterior wall mounted panel signs.
D. Exterior dimensional letters of cut metal construction.
E. Illuminated exit signs (refer to Division 16)
F. Dedication Plaque.
G. Traffic signs.
H. Exterior accessible parking signage as shown on Drawings.
I. Exterior accessibility signage as shown on the Drawings.
J. All attachments and accessories necessary to provide a complete installation.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 04200 - Concrete Masonry Units
B. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
C. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification.
D. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
E. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division I of these Specifications.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.
B. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2002.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comprehensive Signage Provider: Client is seeking one, comprehensive signage provider of
both interior and exterior signage.
B. Fabricator's Qualifications:
1. Fabricator shall have a minimum of 20 years full time experience producing signage of
similar scope and complexity to that indicated.
2. Fabricator shall provide ISO 9001 quality control standards.
C. Installer's Qualifications:
1. Work to be performed only by workers who are completely familiar with the published
recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being used.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Products shall meet requirements of the Americans With Disabilities
Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) and local amendments and modifications.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit product data for specified products. Include material details for each sign
specified.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components,
including dimensions, anchorage, and accessories.
D. Samples: Submit supplier's standard color chart for selection purposes and selected colors for
verification purposes.
E. Installation: Submit supplier's installation instructions.
F. Closeout Submittals:
1. Submit Operation and Maintenance Data for installed products, including precautions against
harmful cleaning materials and methods.
2. Submit warranty documents specified herein
G. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication,
including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, overall
dimensions of each letter and colors.
1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
Specifications . 10400-1
drawing room number on schedule.
2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from
Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit
preliminary schedule.
3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.
B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.
C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by
authorized company official.
1. Project Warranty:
• Sign fabricator shall guarantee work for a period of three (3) years from the date of
acceptance covering all static (non-digital) interior and exterior signage provided by the
fabricator, agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed as a result of defects in
materials, workmanship or installation. Upon notification of such defects, within the
warranty period, fabricator will make necessary repairs or replacement at the
convenience of Owner's Representative.
2. 5-Year Supplemental Guarantee:
• Five (5) years from product ship date, sign fabricator guarantees to be able to make
supplementary deliveries of static (non-digital) interior and exterior signage provided by
the fabricator with a similar functionality and design (shape, color, typography and
graphics) as delivered under the original order, unless otherwise specifically stated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SIGNAGE SYSTEMS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. ASI Signage Innovations
• Design is based on use of standard products manufactured by ASI Signage
Innovations, 3860 W. Northwest Highway, Suite 350, Dallas, Texas 75220, and trade
names of that manufacturer are used herein, (www.asisignaqe.com)
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements.
B. Interior Modular Interchangeable Signs:
1. Acceptable Product: Infinity Sign Series, composed of the following mounting types:
• Wall Mounted with installation clip/spacer
2. Chassis:
• Material: Stainless steel, die perforated 18 ga. sheet with natural finish.
• Module Attachment: LocTab™: Tamper resistant attachment, injection molded black
nylon.
• Manufacturing tolerance: +/- 0.008 in.
• Size:6"x6"
3. ADA-Ready™ Panels:
• Material: Provide tactile copy and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch minimum from plaque
first surface by manufacturer's phenolic photopolymer bonded process. Signface of
single material, tactile characters and Braille integral to photopolymer. Adhesive-fixed
characters are not acceptable.
1. Finish: Two-component high temperature cured polyester coating per
manufacturer's standard for phenolic photopolymer material.
2. Panel size: (1) 3"x3" and (1) 1 Y2"x6"
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
Specifications 10400 - 2
3. Panel color: Lead SC-914
4. Text or graphic color: White SC-901
5. Letter style, letter size and layout position:
• Century Gothic, all capital letters; 5/8" at room name, 1" at room number
6. Text or graphic schedule: See room schedule.
4. Graphic Panels:
• Logo Panel:
1. Material: Aluminum alloy per manufacturer's standard.
2. Finish: Two-component polyester coating per manufacturer's standard
3. Size: 3"x3"
4. Panel color: White SC-901
5. Graphic technique: Screen process - image to be provided by Owner
• Linear Accent:
1. Material: Aluminum alloy per manufacturer's standard.
2. Finish: Two-component polyester coating per manufacturer's standard
3. Size: 3/4"x6"
4. Panel color: Tomato Red SC-203
5. Type: A-Square
6. Graphic technique: Screen process - image to be provided by Owner
• Accessory Trim Panel:
1. Material: Aluminum alloy per manufacturer's standard.
2. Finish: Two-component polyester coating per manufacturer's standard
3. Size: (2) 3/8"x3"
4. Panel color: Orange SC-301, Yellow SC-401
5. Type: A with chassis edge cover
6. Graphic technique: Screen process - image to be provided by Owner
Room Name
Elev. Machine Room - Room
102
Hallway -Room 113
General Storage - Room 104
Range Master's Office - Room
105
Armory/Secured Weapons
Storage- Room 106
Tele/Data - Room 107
Uni-Sex Shower- Room 108
Janitor's Room - Room 110
Conference Room - Room
114
Storage -Room 115
Vestibule - Room 117
Range Control Room - Room
118
Weapons Cleaning Area -
Room 1 1 1
Vestibule -Room 120
PRISM Room -Room 122
Range Equip. Storage II -
Room 128
25-Yard Range - Room 130
Divisible Training Classroom -
Room 201
Lettering and Braille
Elevator Machine Room
Hallway
General Storage
Oil Storage
Armory + Secured Weapons
Storage
Telephone + Data
Locker Room
Janitor's Room
Conference Room
Storage
25-Yard Shooting Range
Range Control Room
Weapons Cleaning Room
100-Yard Shooting Range
PRISM Room
Range Equipment Storage II
25-Yard Shooting Range
Training Classroom I
Floor
Level
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
Second
Quantity
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
Door # on
Plans
03
04
06,07
05
08,09
10
11
14
16
17
19
22,23
21
24
18
34
32
51,52
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
10400-3
Divisible Training Classroom -
Room 201
Classroom Storage I - Room
202
Vestibule - Room 203
Janitor Room - Room 204
Classroom Storage II - Room
205
Training Classroom II
Training Classroom Storage I
Stair
Janitor's Room
Training Classroom Storage II
Second
Second
Second
Second
Second
2
2
1
1
1
53,54
55,56
61
60
59
5. Restroom Signs:
• Size: 12" triangle and 12" circle complying with the pertinent requirement of Title 24 of
California Administrative code
• Pictograms: Identify the names "MEN", "WOMEN" and "UNI-SEX", and braille
• Thickness: 1/4"
• Panel Color: Lead SC-914
• Text Color: White SC-901
• Trim/Edge Color: White SC-901
• Text Style: Century Gothic
• Margins: Center/Center
• Mounting: Screw mounting - 60" high above finish floor to centerline of sign.
Room Name
Women's Restroom - Room 109
Men's Restroom - Room 1 1 1
Uni-Sex Restroom I - Room 132
Uni-Sex Restroom II - Room 133
Women's Restroom - Room 207
Men's Restroom - Room 208
Lettering and Braille
Women's Restroom
Men's Restroom
Uni-Sex Restroom
Uni-Sex Restroom
Women's Restroom
Men's Restroom
Floor
Level
First
First
First
First
Second
Second
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
Door # on
Plans
15
13
43
44
57
58
C. Exterior Wall Mounted Panel Signs
1. Acceptable Product: COMPASS Exterior Panel Sign System
• Wall Mounted Panel:
1. Material: Aluminum alloy per manufacturer's standard.
2. Finish: Two-phase, high temperature cured polyester color coating per
manufacturer's standard
• Primer: 2 mil thick chromium layer for optimum surface coat adhesion and
weatherability.
• Top Coat: Two-component, water-based, non-toxic, lead-free, zero emissions,
high temperature cured polyester coating of 2-3 mil thickness.
3. Panel Size: 6"x6"
4. Panel Thickness: Regular Panel, 1" (25mm) wide
5. Panel color: Lead SC-914
6. Text or graphic color: White SC-901
7. Letter style and size:
• Century Gothic, all capital letters; 5/8" high for room name, 1" high for room
number.
8. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard injection molded mounting clips.
• Minimum of four (4) per sign.
• Sign Materials and Components:
1. Aluminum Panels: Meeting ASTM B209, alloy EN 5052 H12, minimum 0.05"
(1.25mm) thick.
2. Aluminum Extrusions: Meeting ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
10400-4
3. Accessories: Provide end caps, couplings, coupling fittings, mounting fittings,
interchangeable fittings, and other hardware and accessories for a complete
installation.
Room Name
Elec. Room - Room 123
Air Compressor/Fire Riser Room
-Room 125
Range Equip. Storage I - Room
127
Range Equip. Storage II - Room
128
Fire Training Storage - Room 129
Bullet Trap
Bullet Trap
Lettering and Braille
Electrical Room
Air Compressor + Fire Riser
Room
Range Equipment Storage I
Range Equipment Storage II
Fire Training Storage
25- Yard Range Bullet Trap
100-Yard Range Bullet Trap
Floor
Level
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
Quantity
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
Door # on
Plans
27
28
31,33
35
36,37
38/39
41/42
D. Dimensional Cut Metal Letters - Building Identification and Address
1.Acceptable Product: Series IPS Cut Metal Dimensional Letters
Material: Aluminum with Polished Face, Satin Sides
Fabricated Letters:
1.
2.
Letterstyle: Century Gothic
Text and Letter Cap Height:
3.
• 10" high:
8" high:
8" high:
• 24" high:
Letter Depth:
"CITY OF CARLSBAD"
"JOINT FIRST RESPONDERS"
"TRAINING FACILITY"
"2560"
1"
• Mounting Method: Projected Stud Mount
• See Drawings for location of signage.
E. Dedication Plaque
1. Acceptable Product: Sign Etch™ II Series
• Material: Stainless Steel
• Size: 18"x24" - Portrait Orientation
• Usage: Exterior
• Thickness: 3/8"
• Edge Detail: Square
• Edge Finish: Brushed
• Raised Surface Finish: Brushed
• Recessed Surface Finish: N/A
• Installation Method: Mechanical Fasteners (MH)
1. Concealed mounting with threaded rods; contractor to coordinate mounting with
adjacent surfaces.
• Text Letterstyle: Century Gothic
2. Contractor to provide a template for the City of Carlsbad to review and provide language.
3. After provided language is received, camera ready artwork from the manufacturer will be
submitted for review and final approval.
-. Emergency Evacuation Maps:
1. Allow for one map per locations specified below.
2. Use clear plastic panel silk-screened on reverse, in brushed aluminum frame,
screw-mounted.
Room Name Floor I Quantity | Location
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
10400-5
Lobby -Room 101
Check-in Gathering Space - Room
116
Vestibule - 203
Second Floor Lobby - 209A
Level
First
First
Second
Second
1
1
1
1
To the left of the elevator door.
To the right of the door #09.
To the right of the door #61 .
To the left of the elevator door.
G. Site Signage - Refer to Drawings
1. Exterior Parking Signage:
• Provide the following signs:
1. Visitor Parking Sign
2. Van Accessible Parking Sign
3. Handicap Parking Sign
2. Exterior Accessibility Signage
3. Provide Architect with sign color charts, type styles and color and sizes
4. Mounting: Center mount; base mounting by direct embedment in concrete footings
H. Low-Level Self-Illuminated Exit Signs:
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Light Panel Technologies
2. Exit signage as described in the Drawings.
3. Illuminated directional exit signs:
• Die cast aluminum series
• Black housing with brushed aluminum face
4. Low-level self illuminated exit signs.
Location
Lobby -Room 101
Hallway -Room 112
Hallway -Room 124
Stair -Room 126
Vestibule - Room 124
Range Equipment Storage I -
Room 127
Fire Training Storage - Room 129
25- Yard Range - Room 130
100-Yard Range- Room 131
Second Floor Lobby - Room 209A
Vestibule - Room 203
Stair -Room 126
Floor
Level
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
First
Second
Second
Second
Quantity
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
Door # on Plans
01,02
12
26
29
30
33
37
20,32
25,50
Above egress stair down to 1st Floor
61
62
I Owner Provided Signage:
1. Contractor to coordinate the location and mounting of all Owner provided signage.
2. The following is a listing of the Owner provided signage:
• Vinyl Art work - see Section 12100
• All shooting range safety signage
PARTS EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct
conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations as
approved by the Owner, using only the approved mounting materials, and locating all components
firmly into position and plumb.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
Specifications 10400-6
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.
D. Locate signs where indicated:
1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60
inches (1525 mm) above finished floor.
2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions.
E. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.
3.03 CLEANING, PROTECTION AND REPAIR
A. Repair scratches and other damage which might have occurred during installation. Replace
components where repairs were made but are still visible to the unaided eye from a distance of
10 feet.
B. Remove temporary coverings and protection to adjacent work areas. Clean installed products in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's acceptance.
C. Remove construction debris from project in accordance with provisions in Division 1.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
Specifications 10400 - 7
SECTION 10500
LOCKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Locker units with hinged doors.
B. Double Tier Lockers.
C. Pistol Lockers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood base construction.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on locker types, sizes and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan and combination lock code.
D. Samples: Submit two samples 3x6 inches (75 x 150 mm) in size, of each color scheduled;
applied to specified base metal.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate component installation assembly.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Double Tier Locker
1. Company: Tennsco Lockers
a. Model #: Double Tier Ventilated Locker (3-Wide Unit)
b. Locks: Recessed Combination Padlock/Masterkeyed Combination Padlock
c. Material: 16-ga steel, painted
d. Color: Medium Grey
e. Attachment: Wall Anchored (No legs)
f. Size: Opening size of 12", Locker depth of 18"D
g. Accessories: Provide (2) coat hooks per locker
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. Pistol Locker
1. Company: Fasco Security Products
a. Model #: FL 714-6 6 COMP Pistol Locker Medium Duty
b. Locks: Grooved key cam lock
c. Material: 14 ga steel; piano hinge w/ non-removable hinge
d. Color: Medium Grey
e. Mounting: Recessed
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FINISHING
A. Clean, degrease, and neutralize metal; prime and finish with one coat of baked enamel.
1. Provide manufacturer's corrosion resistant finishing
a. All doors, frames and parts are to be cleaned and treated with a multi step detergent/
iron phospate coating, cold water rinsed and sealed with an environmentally sound non
chrome treatment.
b. A prime coat of modified epoxy to be applied through an elecrostacially charged dip
process.
c. A finish top coat of high solids polyester paint to be applied over the prime coat through
an electrostatically charged spray process.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility LOCKERS
Specifications 10500-1
B. Verify embedded anchors are properly sized.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install lockers plumb and square.
C. Place and secure on prepared base.
D. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 Ib
(445 N).
E. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation.
F. Install accessories.
G. Replace components that do not operate smoothly.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility LOCKERS
Specifications 10500-2
SECTION 10523
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association; 2007.
B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions.
C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination
requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories:
1. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable
codes, whichever is more stringent.
1. Provide extinguishers labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose specified
and indicated.
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Provide fire extinguisher cabinets to match number of extinguisher specified.
1. Semi-recessed cabinets shall be Larsen's Architectural Series, model #2409-R3
Semi-Recessed Architectural Series Fire Extinguisher Cabinet with Glass Door.
Style model # Vertical Duo 2409R3-VD.
2. Surface mounted Fire Extinguisher Hanger with Satin Finish provided with fire extinguisher
B. All fire extinguisher cabinets shall have a factory Satin Finish. All cabinets to be from the same
manufacturer.
C. Door Style: Vertical DUO with Larsen LOG
D. Door Glazing: Clear Acrylic
E. Door Trim & Material: Aluminum (AL)
F. Die Cut Lettering Style & Color: Vertical, Black
PARTS EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure rigidly in place.
C. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets.
3.03 SERVICE
A. Determine the approximate completion date of the work and then inspect, charge and tag the fire
extinguishers at a date not more than ten (10) days before nor less than one (1) day before
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
Specifications 10523 -1
SECTION 10651
OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Rigid panel operable partitions.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Partition support members.
B. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Partition support members.
C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustical closure above suspended ceilings.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method; 2001.
B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2001.
C. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 1999.
D. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 1987 (Reapproved 1999).
E. ASTM E 557 - Standard Practice for The Installation of Operable Partitions; 2000.
F. FS CCC-W-408 - Wall Covering, Vinyl-Coated; Revision D, 1994; cancelled 2001, no
superceding document.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, elevations, supports and anchorage, conditions at jambs and
intersections with permanent walls, hardware, joints, and connections.
1. Operators: Show location of operator, controls, and wiring diagrams.
D. Selection Samples: For each partition finish specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Verification Samples: For each partition finish specified, two samples, minimum size 6
inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
F. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance criteria.
G. Certification: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products installed comply with Contract
Documents.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include methods of operating, troubleshooting, and
maintaining the specific partitions installed, with recommended methods of cleaning,
especially finishes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements of openings by field measurement prior to
fabrication; show measurements on shop drawings.
B. NRC Ratings: Substantiate by tests made in accordance with ASTM C 423.
C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in performing work of the type specified.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
C. Protect from exposure to harmful weather conditions, at temperature and humidity conditions
recommended by manufacturer.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's standard 2 year warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Panelfold, Inc., which is located at: 10700 N.W. 36th Ave. P. O. Box
680130 ; Miami, FL 33168-0130; Tel: 305-688-3501; Email: request info
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
Specifications 10651-1
(sales@panelfold.com): Web: www.panelfold.com
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
C. Obtain all operable partitions from a single manufacturer.
2.2 RIGID PANEL PARTITIONS
A. Partitions: Rigid panel partitions, top supported with track, suspension carriers, and
accessories; dimensions and layout as indicated on drawings.
1. Style: Individual panels, manually operated, that move only into preprogrammed
positions on tracks (suffix PP).
2. Final Closure(s): Jamb hinged communicating door panel.
3. Height: As indicated on drawings.
4. Acoustical Rating: STC as specified under panel construction, based on ASTM E 90
test on fully assembled partition 168 inches (4267 mm) high by 111 inches (2819 mm)
wide.
5. Panels: 3 inch (76 mm) thick aluminum framed construction, with interlocking vertical
edges and sound seals on all 4 edges; Panelfold Series 400.
a. Frames: Top frame reinforced at trolley locations.
b. Faces: Gypsum panel or medium density fiberboard (MDF) laminated to frame,
without face trim on vertical edges.
c. Width: 49 inches (1245 mm), nominal.
d. STC Rating: 50; 9.0 Ib/sq ft (43.9 kg/sq m) hanging weight (mass), maximum.
e. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard butt hinges.
f. Bottom Seal Height: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
g. Finish: Fabric.
6. Sound Seals: Continuous extruded vinyl shapes.
a. Top and Bottom Seals for Stack Pocket Doors:. Continuous contact type.
7. Suspension System: Complete with hanger brackets, adjustable steel hanger rods,
switches, diverters, and corners as required to suit layout.
a. Track Material: Aluminum or steel as required by manufacturer.
b. Trolleys attached with adjustable steel pendant bolts with locks to prevent panel
misalignment.
c. Trolleys for Multidirectional Panels: Multidirectional carrier assemblies of nylon
capped steel discs or dual rotating, ball bearing horizontal wheels; two per panel.
d. Trolleys for Preprogrammed Panels: Preprogrammable carrier assemblies of
radial-type steel wheels with steel ball bearings and nylon or carbon fiber fill tires;
two per panel.
e. Trolleys for Hinged Pairs: Carrier assemblies of radial-type steel wheels with
steel ball bearings and nylon or carbon fiber fill tires; one per panel.
f. Trolleys for Continuously Hinged Panels: Carrier assemblies of radial-type steel
wheels with steel ball bearings and nylon or carbon fiber fill tires; one for every
two panels.
8. Stack Pocket Doors: Same construction and finish as panels; butt hinges.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Fabric: Maharam Tekwall with acrylic backing.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index 25 or less, smoke developed
index 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 (Class A).
2. Color: 1001 Dove Grey.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
Specifications 10651-2
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E 557.
B. Provide the services of the manufacturer's field representative to advise on proper installation
procedures and inspect the finished work.
C. Install and adjust as required to achieve acoustical separation between adjacent areas.
D. Adjust locking hardware for proper operation.
E. Install operators and controls, make electrical connections and verify proper operation.
F. Clean exposed surfaces after installation.
G. Clean up work area and adjacent areas and dispose of debris legally off site.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate operation and instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance
procedures.
B. Deliver keys and operation and maintenance data to Owner.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
Specifications 10651-3
SECTION 10800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Accessories for toilet rooms.
B. Grab bars.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09300 - Tile: Ceramic washroom accessories.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003.
B. GSA CID A-A-3002 - Mirrors, Glass; U.S. General Services Administration; 1996.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function,
attachment methods.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate mounting heights and locations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products listed are made by Bobrick and called out on construction document drawings.
B. Provide all toilet room accessories from one manufacturer.
C. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FINISHES
A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.
B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations, as indicated on
drawings, and as follows:
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
Specifications 10800-1
SECTION 11132
MOTORIZED PROJECTION SCREENS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the provision of two (2) recessed motorized projection screens in
within the following room:
1. Divisible Classroom #201
B. This Section includes all labor and materials for the installation of motorized front-
projection screens as shown on the drawings. Work to include, but not limited to the
following:
1. Coordination with Audio/Visual System subcontractor (Specification Section
17000) for integration and operation using the wireless A/V control system.
2. Coordination and provision for required power and control conduits.
C. See Division 16 and 17 Sections for electrical wiring, connections, and installation of
remote-control switches for electrically operated projection screens.
D. Locations: Refer to Schedule in Part 3 of this section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide the following product data for screen specified.
1. Installation Procedures
2. Screen Performance Characteristics
3. Electrical wiring diagrams.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide floor plan showing location of each screen to the centerline of
the unit relative to ends of screen case, mounting brackets and wiring connections.
1. Contractor coordinate location of recessed screens with Audio-Visual
subcontractor.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Motorized Projection Screens
Specifications 11132-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The Basis of Design: The basis of Design manufacturer for the specified screens is
listed below. Substitutions will be considered in accordance with the requirements of
this section and Specification Section 01030.
1. Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc. 3100 North Detroit Street, P.O. Box 137 Warsaw
Indiana 46581 Tele (800) 622-3737 Website www.da-lite.com
2. Approved Equivalent:
2.2 ELECTRIC FRONT-PROJECTION SCREENS
A. Basis of Design: Tensioned Advantage® Deluxe Electrol® as manufactured by Da-Lite
Screen Co.
1. Size: Viewing Area 69" High x 92" Wide (Video Format). Locate where shown
on drawings.
2. Motor Operation: Peak gain of 2.0, and half-gain angle of at least 25 degrees.
a. Two (2) Motors, one for door operation and one for screen
b. Power: 120volt (60hz)
c. Automatic Thermal overload cutout
3. Viewing Surface: High Contrast Da-Mat®
4. Controls:
a. Key Operated Wall switch
b. Interface with wireless A/V Control system: Refer to section 17000
5. Seamless Construction: Provide screens without seams.
6. Drop: Standard 12" Black Drop
7. Edge Treatment: Black masking borders.
B. General: UL-labeled units with case, screen, motor, controls, mounting accessories,
and other components necessary for a complete installation and with remotely
controlled operation of each screen.
1. Single-Station Control: 3-position control key-switch with metal device box and
cover plate for flush wall mounting and for connection to 120-V, ac power supply.
C. Electrically Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure: Units fabricated for
recessed installation with bottom of case composed of two panels; one panel designed
to open and close automatically, and the other panel removable or openable.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Motorized Projection Screens
Specifications 11132-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF SCREENS
A. Provide a quantity of recessed motorized screens in rooms listed below.
1. Classroom #201: Two (2) Screens
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. As part of the shop drawing preparation, conduct meeting with electrical contractor and
A/V system installer to verify provisions and locations for power and control conduits.
B. Install front-projection screens in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
Screens to be installed with all appropriate mounting hardware and supports.
C. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and relationship to
adjoining construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner
that produces a smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing
surface flat when screen is lowered.
D. Coordinate installation and operation controls with the A/V system installer per
Specification Section 17000.
3.3 FINAL TESTING AND START-UP.
A. Electrically Operated Units: Test to verify that other operating components are in
optimum functioning condition.
B. Electrically Operated Units: Coordinate operation activation with computer controlled
wireless A/V system controller. Refer to Specification Section 17000.
3.4 TRAINING
A. Provide a minimum of two (2) hours training in the operation and maintenance of
Electrically Operated screen Units: Schedule training with Owner Representative and
A/V System installer.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Motorized Projection Screens
Specifications 11132-3
SECTION 11450
RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Ice Machine
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping: Plumbing connections for appliances.
B. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical connections for appliances.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of
each piece of residential equipment specified.
C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA standards.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPLIANCES
A. Ice Machine: Manitowoc Q-Model Series 210 Free-Standing Ice Cube Machine.
1. Production: 220 Ibs. of ice cubes daily
2. Size: 26" W x 26.5" D x 38.5 H on 6" legs
3. Finish: Stainless Steel
4. Storage: 80 Ib. of ice cubes total storageEnergy
5. Operation: R-404A CFC-free refrigerant
6. Usage: Minimum 20% Energy Efficient by Energy Efficiency Standards
7. Features:
a. Glass shelves
b. Automatic icemaker
c. Light in freezer compartment.
PARTS EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify utility rough-ins are present and correctly located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Upon completion of installation and hookup to utilities, put each operating component of each
appliance through at least five complete operating cycles, adjusting as needed to secure optimum
operational level. Replace defective appliances at no cost to the Owner.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Remove packing materials from equipment.
B. Wash and clean equipment.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT
Specifications 11450-1
SECTION 11890
SHOOTING RANGE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide and install all shooting range equipment as shown on drawings and
as specified herein. Include all necessary accessories to assure a complete
and totally operable installation.
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01110 -
Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and
information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other
Documents.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Metal Fabrications: Division 5 section
2. Painting: Division 9 section
3. Ventilation: Division 15 section
4. Electrical Service for Controls and Drive Units: Division 16 section
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All equipment specified in this section shall be by manufacturer listed. Equipment
of other manufacturers may be substituted in the installation provided that those
manufacturers fulfill same qualifications as listed manufacturer. Manufacturer shall
be responsible for all equipment and parts.
B. Manufacturers shall have minimum five years experience in the manufacturing of
shooting range equipment of similar type facilities and shall be an established
specialist.
C. Installation shall be by the prime manufacturer or the prime manufacturer shall
furnish a Technician to supervise and inspect installation and make final
adjustments. The Technician shall remain on site a minimum of 4 days for the
purpose of inspecting the installation, making final adjustments, and minimum one
day for instructing the Owner in systems service, use and operation.
D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: This work shall be done in strict accordance
with all applicable local, state, and federal codes that may govern the installation.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Shooting Range Equipment
Specifications 11890-1
E. Permits and Inspections: Contractor shall obtain and pay for necessary federal,
state or local inspections or permits.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Contractor shall submit complete detailed shop drawings, product
data specs, and equipment list to the Architect for review prior to fabrication or
ordering of materials. Shop drawings shall indicate all mounting heights, rough
opening requirements, anchorage devices, etc.
B. Operation Instructions: Provide three sets of operation and service manuals
including safety procedures, instructions on proper operation of all equipment,
parts listing, recommended parts inventory, purchase source listing, copies of
warranties and certificates, etc.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials properly packaged and protected. Protect equipment and
exposed finishes during transportation and erections against any damage and
stains.
B. The manufacturer shall provide spare parts for two years of normal operation to the
extent required by each of the subsequent sections. These shall be tagged or
otherwise identified and cross-referenced to a parts list.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Contractor shall coordinate phasing of construction to accommodate installation of
shooting range equipment, baffles, traps, etc.
1.07 WARRANTY AND SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Warranty and Service Agreement: Provide special project warranty and service
agreement, signed by Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer, agreeing to adjust /
repair / restore defective or damaged materials and workmanship of shooting
range equipment and work during warranty period provided range has been
properly operated and serviced. "Defective and damaged" is hereby defined to
include, but not by way of limitation, operation or control system failures,
performances below required minimums, excessive wear, unusual deterioration or
aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need for excessive
maintenance, abnormal noise or vibration, and similar unusual, unexpected and
unsatisfactory conditions. Defective and damaged materials shall be removed by
the Contractor, shipped prepaid to the manufacturer, replaced and returned by the
manufacturer at no cost to the Owner and reinstalled by the Contractor.
1. The Warranty period shall be for 24 months, starting on the date of
Substantial Completion.
2. During the Warranty Period, the manufacturer shall, in a timely manner at no
charge to the City, send a Technician to service the range as many times as
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Shooting Range Equipment
Specifications 11890-2
may be required for its successful operation provided that the Owner's
required minor service has been performed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Bullet Traps
1. Requirements:
a. A rubber media type bullet trap shall be provided to terminate the travel
of bullets required for the conduct of a range. It shall extend from wall
to wall and from the floor to the height shown on the plans.
b. Trap shall be "Inclined Granular Bullet Trap", as manufactured by
Range Systems, Minneapolis, MN (877) 423-1785, or approved equal.
Contact: Troy Shores (208) 263-4316
c. The trap shall be suitable for heavy duty service with all standard
ammunition for handguns and shotguns in 25 yard range and rifles in
100 yard range. This is understood to include standard magnum loads
and jacketed ammunition.
d. Manufacturer shall provide a list of no less than five clients who have
the same equipment that is being bid and of equal or greater size (prior
installations of the identical assembly, steel type and application
meeting all specifications listed below.) No unapproved prototypes
(defined as product which has been in service for less than five years)
will be allowed for safety reasons.
e. Manufacturer must provide a toll free telephone number and access to a
customer service representative.
f. The manufacturer must have a minimum of five years experience
supplying berm traps. Manufacturing shall not be subcontracted out but
must be done on-site on manufacturer's property.
g. Trap shall be installed by the manufacturer, with the installation
supervisor also having five years experience installing range equipment.
2. Physical Requirements:
a. The primary impact area of the trap shall extend to minimum height of
10'-0" above the floor, and shall have a maximum mean angle to the
horizontal of 30 degrees. Dimension from front to back shall be 12'-0".
b. The impact plates of the primary impact area shall be of 3/8" thickness
and be constructed of AR 500 steel.
c. The berm trap shall decelerate bullets in a shredded rubber material
that has an average diameter of 9 millimeters.
d. The rubber material shall be treated with a fire prevention and adhesion
promotion material.
e. The berm framework shall be of hot dipped galvanized sheet metal.
f. The berm trap shall require no rear access for cleaning or service.
g. The berm framework shall be of sufficient strength to support rubber
medium which is a minimum of 2 feet thick.
h. The berm framework shall be coordinated with wall openings and MEP
systems as shown on the drawings,
i. The berm trap shall be inclusive of all hardware necessary for assembly
of the trap,
j. Manufacturer shall provide Encapsulator ballistic rubber blocks along
front lower facing of trap as shown on drawings.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Shooting Range Equipment
Specifications 11890-3
B. Baffle System (if manufactured by Range Equipment vendor) shall meet the
requirements as shown on the drawings and specified in Section 05505.
C. Ballistic Tile Wall Protection
1. Product
a. Provide rubberized wall panel and AR steel wall protection system, 1'-2
3/8" thick minimum over CMU walls where shown on drawings. System
shall equal to "Encapsulator Bloc-Trap Bullet Containment System" as
manufactured by Range Systems, Minneapolis, MN (877) 423-1785.
D. Mechanical Ductwork Acoustical Isolation
1. Product
a. Provide duct wrap, in 1" & 2" thicknesses, as shown on the drawings,
equal to "PA" Absorption Material, as manufactured by Kinetics Noise
Control, Inc., Dublin, OH (877) 457-2695.
b. Provide loaded vinyl limp mass barrier, as shown on the drawings,
equal to "KNM-100B", as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.,
Dublin, OH (877) 457-2695.
c. Coordinate with ballistic enclosures as specified in Section 05500 and
duct silencers, as shown on the mechanical drawings and
specifications.
E. Control Room to Range Communication System
1. Product
a. Provide intercom intermixable open voice system, equal to "LEF-3" as
manufactured by Aiphone Corporation, Bellevue, WA (800) 692-0200.
F. Range Bleacher Seating
1. Product
a. Provide 3-tier, 24-seat, tilt and roll bleachers, as shown on the
drawings, equal to "TNR-0312S" as manufactured by
BuiltRiteBleachers.com, Southington, CT (866) 281-5337.
G. Ultrasonic Cleaning System
1. Product
a. Provide Ultrasonic Cleaning System, equal to "HCS-200" as
manufactured by L&R Manufacturing Co., Kearney, NJ (201) 991-5330.
H. Weapon Clearing Trap
1. Product
a. Provide (2) free standing Weapon Clearing Traps on rolling casters,
equal to the "Guardian" model, as manufactured by Range Systems,
Minneapolis, MN (877) 423-1785. Provide one for the Range area, and
one for the Weapons Cleaning Area.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Shooting Range Equipment
Specifications 11890-4
I. Turning Target System, Single-Oscillating, One Actuator Per Lane, to be mounted
overhead on target line as shown in drawings.
1. Manufacturer shall provide a list of no less than five clients who have the
same equipment that is being bid and of equal or greater size (prior
installations of the identical assembly, steel type and application meeting all
specifications listed below.) No unapproved prototypes will be allowed for
safety reasons. Target System shall be equal to "lnverse-90" by Action
Target, Provo, Utah (888) 377-8033. Contact: Layne Ashby.
2. Manufacturer must provide a toll free telephone number and access to a
customer service representative.
3. The manufacturer must have a minimum of five years experience
manufacturing target systems according to the specifications. Manufacturing
shall not be subcontracted out but must be done on site on manufactures
property.
4. Target system shall be installed by the manufacturer, with the installation
supervisor also having five years experience installing similar ranges.
5. Actuator shall be capable of turning a cardboard type target from edge to face
and back to edge again. The turning action shall be 90 degrees of rotation.
6. Actuator shall be self-armoring. That is, the structure of the actuator shall
inherently protect itself from bullet hits coming from a direction within +-25
degrees of perpendicular (where the shooter stands). The armor shall be of
sufficient strength to protect the actuator from standard loads (.38, .357,
9mm, .45 etc.) as required for the use of each range bay.
7. Actuator shall provide for attachment of replaceable "bullet absorbing" facade
so as to cover the primary steel structure and prevent possible ricochets.
Replacement of facade shall require only a screwdriver and shall not take
more than about 1 minute per actuator to accomplish.
8. Actuator shall contain the means to fully control both the edge-to-face time
and the face-to-edge time of the target separately. The range of control shall
extend from 0.25 seconds at the fastest to at least 5 seconds at the slowest.
9. Actuator shall use as its power source compressed gas (air, CO2 etc.) to
facilitate the turning of the target.
10. Actuator shall be capable of being triggered completely by air pressure
without the use of electricity. As an option, actuator shall also be able to be
triggered by a 12V signal of less than 90mA. The conversion between air
and electric triggering shall not take more than 1 minute average in field
operation.
11. Actuators shall not require the use of tools to make air connections. All such
connections must be able to be made by hand.
12. Actuator shall have the ability to develop at least 31.0 ft-lbf of torque.
13. Actuators shall be capable of independent operation as well as operation in
tandem.
14. Actuator shall be totally field repairable such that a complete field rebuild
operation may be done in less than 10 minutes by standard range personnel
(without any special training).
15. Actuator shall consume no more than 5.5 cubic inches of air per actuation.
(Test conditions assume electric triggering.) Total compressor power
required for typical range installation not exceed 2 HP. (Assuming about 100
actuators)
16. Actuators shall weigh no more than 35 Ibs each. Overall height (not including
target frame or mounting stands) shall not exceed 9". Overall width (target
faced) shall not exceed 6". Overall length (target edged) shall not exceed
6.5".
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Shooting Range Equipment
Specifications 11890-5
17. Each actuator shall have the capability to operate "slave" target devices.
This means that air connections shall be available to operate additional
pneumatic devices which do not have their own inherent air interface logic.
18. The actuator shall utilize a "proportional force" lever action system to assure
even reaction times in both the edge and face direction.
19. The actuator shall contain computer interface capability to allow multiple units
to operate in a pre-programmed scenario.
20. The actuator must have the options of being controlled by software that
supports either modula technology or ethernet TCM controls. In addition,
software must support video and sound if required and run on Windows XP
Professional. Software must be able to control range fan systems, HVAC
and lights if required.
21. Provide laptop computer to operate Turning and Running Man Target
Systems, 1 per range bay. Provide minimum features as follows: dual
processor, 4 GB memory, 200 GB Hard Drive, DVD / CD RW, 15.4" screen.
Provide wireless PDA-style handheld controller (two per range) capable of
executing multiple program scenarios.
22. The mechanism shall be protected from splatter at all angles and shall
provide for protected routing of hose and control wires which are in a
protective sheath. The actuator shall provide for interface to EMT carrier for
simple installation.
23. Actuator body shall be constructed of solid steel plate.
24. All inner parts (hoses, piston, valves and access ports) shall be covered by a
removable aluminum.
25. Actuator shall not employ any permanent target frame which extends upward
in the area surrounding the target. Rather, the actuator shall employ a clamp
mechanism to hold a disposable wood frame so no steel extends down in the
area of the target.
26. Clamp mechanism shall facilitate easy lumber changing such that in actual
use, the frame may be changed in less than 30 seconds.
27. Clamp mechanism shall hold 2 sections of standard 2x4 lumber at a width of
16.5" (inside measurement). Clamp mechanism shall alternately
accommodate standard 2x2 lumber at the same spacing.
28. Clamp mechanism shall use hand-tightened clamps (without special tools) to
hold lumber in place so tools are not necessary to attach the target frame
material.
29. Actuator shall attach to overhead structure with supplemental framing as
required. Mounting structure shall be available in custom heights so the
actuator may be placed at any desired operating level.
30. Actuator shall have a pressure operating range of 20 psi to 100 psi.
31. Actuator shall provide for interface with electronic hit sensing systems for
interface to computer logic in a "tournament grade" environment.
32. The actuator shall be capable of turning a military style, plastic "E" target or
equivalent.
33. Actuator main pivot shall accommodate at least 500 ft-lbf of radial torque
without damage of any kind and without impeding the normal turning action in
any way.
34. Actuator shall employ an adjustable, internal cushioning system which will
effectively buffer inertial loads of at least 250 Ibs on center with the turning
axis.
35. Actuator shall not utilize ball bearings or any ferrous bearing surfaces in any
part of its mechanism. Rather, any bearings shall employ permanently
lubricated thrust surfaces for reliable, maintenance-free operation.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Shooting Range Equipment
Specifications 11890-6
36. Proposed substitutions shall be submitted prior to the bid date. Allow
sufficient time for review. No substitutions will be reviewed later than 10
working days prior to the bid date.
37. All substitution proposals shall list equipment proposed and an item by item
comparison stating why the items are equal to the specified item. Proposals
shall include the Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, and other data
needed to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements.
J. Target System, Track Runner, "Running Man", One Per Range Bay, to be mounted
overhead on the firing line side of the turning target system.
1. Manufacturer shall provide a list of no less than five clients who have the
same equipment that is being bid and of equal or greater size (prior
installations of the identical assembly, steel type and application meeting all
specifications listed below.) No unapproved prototypes will be allowed for
safety reasons. Target System shall be equal to "Track Runner Version II" by
Action Target, Provo, Utah.
2. Runner track shall be able to be mounted overhead and coordinated so as to
avoid conflict with turning target system and lighting / baffles / CCTV
cameras.
3. The run of the target shall be width of the bays as shown on the drawings.
Ancillary drive components will require no more than 5 ft. of the track.
4. Trolley shall be easily serviced with the use of standard hand tools.
Replacement parts shall be easily serviced using only standard hand tools.
5. Runner shall have a computer control system, as described in 2.01.G.21
above. System shall be capable of computerized position control in 1 ft.
increments. System shall also be capable of computerized speed control,
enabling forward, reverse and distance motion emulating human speeds of
walk, jog, or run. The system shall be intelligent enough to not run into the
ends causing damage to the runner.
6. Runner shall operate from a standard 120 VAC supply and have a
continuously adjustable speed control knob. The controls shall feature a
target shuttle mode that allows the instant control of the target direction from
a single switch on the control console.
7. System shall be capable of operating without limit switches, ie; the end
bumper shall withstand full inertial load of the trolley traveling at full speed
with no damage.
8. Runner drive unit and idler unit are interchangeable allowing motor drive to
be installed on either end of the track.
9. Runner shall employ an electrical brake option which will enhance stopping.
Runner shall not use a mechanical brake.
10. Runner shall have the capability to reverse directions while moving.
11. Runner trolley shall provide for the mounting of target holders that are wood.
12. Runner shall be able to hold steel targets, ie; Portable Target Stands,
Rockers, Swingers, and other steel target systems.
13. Runner shall allow for multiple trolleys to run in tandem on a single track if so
desired. Runner drive unit will move up to four trolleys in a series.
14. All surface-mounted components shall be "hot-dip" galvanized for corrosion
resistance.
15. Runner will retro fit to existing ATI "l-Beam" track mounts with appropriate
adapter brackets. Track shall be mountable to a standard TR2 hole pattern,
ie; 3/8" holes on 2" centers.
16. Track must be electroplated 2" tube steel for reduced pulley resistance.
17. Runner wheel bolts shall be accessible for quick trolley removal and
replacement.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Shooting Range Equipment
Specifications 11890 - 7
18. Runner shall function with either steel cable or nylon rope.
19. Manufacturer shall provide a list of no less than five clients who have the
same equipment that is being bid and of equal or greater size (prior
installations of the identical assembly, steel type and application meeting all
specifications listed below). No unapproved prototypes will be allowed for
safety reasons.
20. Manufacturer, upon request, must provide a factory tour to representatives,
demonstrating compliance with specifications.
21. Manufacturer must provide a toll-free telephone number and a dedicated toll-
free customer service number with access to a customer service
representative.
22. Manufacturer shall stock all components for the Track Runner Version II such
that they are available for shipment within 24 hours of order. Service shall be
promptly performed by a factory authorized, factory trained and certified
technician. Proposed substitutions shall be submitted prior to the bid date.
Allow sufficient time for review. No substitutions will be reviewed later than
10 working days prior to the bid date.
23. All substitution proposals shall list equipment proposed and an item by item
comparison stating why the items are equal to the specified item. Proposals
shall include the Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, and other data
needed to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements.
K. Range Master's Console, Turret Type
1. General Description - There shall be a console to contain and organize the
controls required by these specifications.
a. The console shall be a turret type and essentially of the size, shape and
location as shown on the plans.
b. Turret type console defines an enclosure with sloping face on which the
control panel is mounted, and the whole enclosure resting on a surface
such as a desk or countertop.
c. The general requirements for the control panels are listed under Control
Panel. The supporting surface is not included in this specification.
2. Functional Description - For comfortable viewing the console shall support
the control panel at an angle of 30 degrees to the horizontal.
a. The console shall have one or more compartments for separation of
functions.
b. For convenience in servicing, the control panels shall be hinged.
3. Hardware Details - The console shall be constructed to cabinetmaker
standards of seasoned wood with plastic laminate veneer on all external
surfaces. All corners are internally reinforced, and a piano hinge shall be
provided for attachment of the control panel.
a. Multiple compartment consoles shall have bulkheads to separate and
isolate the separates sections.
b. The standard finish shall be provided unless otherwise specified. This
is textured black.
L. Master Control Panel
1. The master control panel shall provide a functional grouping of the manual
controls and displays necessary for the proper functioning of the shooting
range. They shall include but not be limited to the control elements defined
by these specifications.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Shooting Range Equipment
Specifications 11890-8
a. The master control panel shall be of suitable size and shape to occupy
the space shown for it on the plans or it shall be of suitable size and
shape to mount in the standard console if such is specified.
b. The master control panel shall match the control panels for other control
elements that may be required by these specifications.
2. Functional requirements - The master control panel shall be of the front
access type so that it may be removed from its mounting by lifting out.
Thereby it shall not be necessary to have rear access for installation or
service.
a. All legends shall be in one family of compatible type faces of various
sizes and weight.
b. All type faces shall be of sufficient sizes and weight to be readable from
a distance of 18 inches by a person of normal eyesight when the panel
is illuminated to 40 MFC. The primary controls shall have legends
similarly readable with 15 MFC illumination.
c. The legends for control categories or groups shall be no smaller than
ten point and bold face. The legends for secondary controls shall be no
smaller than eight point and bold face. Primary controls shall be
understood to signify those controls used to initiate and terminate range
functions, whereas secondary controls are those that program activities.
Numeration of shooting points shall be in bold face display type no
smaller than eleven point. Instructional and informational legends shall
be in medium face type from eight to eleven point.
3. Hardware requirements - The panel shall be constructed of 0.090 inch
thickness (min.) aluminum plate in control panel grade and finish. The
surface shall be clear anodized; and the legends shall be photo-engraved
and black filled.
a. The panel shall provide a power panel which shall contain a master
power switch, key operated, power on indicator light and surface
mounted fuse receptacle. It shall also provide separate power switches
and fuses for each of the separate systems required by these
specifications.
b. All switches with maintained positions shall be first-quality heavy-duty
low voltage toggle switches. They shall all be matching and all switches
for the same function shall have the same color.
c. Momentary contact switches (push buttons), indicator lights and jacks
shall be low voltage with quality and style compatible with the toggle
switches specified.
d. In so far as practical, the separate control systems shall be mounted
complete behind the master panel using suitable shelves affixed to the
panel and or under the desk millwork.
e. All electrical connections to the master control panel shall be to
numbered barrier strips affixed to the rear side of the panel.
f. The control panel shall provide fields for the target lighting dimmer
controls, general illumination, and remote ventilation control. These
shall be prepared by the range equipment manufacturer to match the
other controls. These controls are specified in these specifications and
are not furnished by the range equipment manufacturer. Typical control
elements and/or specification sheets shall be furnished to the range
equipment manufacturer for the preparation of the fields.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Shooting Range Equipment
Specifications 11890-9
M. Range Timer Control (multiple cycle) - functionality via computer control)
1. Range Timer Control - A control shall be provided that will enable the range-
master to preset timed shooting courses so that target actuation will be
automatic after cycle start and will not depend upon human variables. The
control shall also be used to measure the elapsed time required to
accomplish events.
a. Type of Timer - The timer shall be an electronic type with manually
selected time intervals. The time displays shall be by electronic digital
counters without mechanical parts. It shall provide an electrical output
during the duration of the shooting interval.
2. Functional Requirements - The timer shall enable the range-master to preset
the desired target actuation times and command delays, to commence and
terminate the courses at will, and to keep track of the progress of the
courses. These signals conne from manual inputs or from event-start and
termination signals.
a. The range timer shall provide a choice of either the standard command-
delay interval or instantaneous operation. The standard command-
delay interval shall maintain the pre-shooting interval for 3 seconds after
the command switch is closed and before the first shooting interval
begins.
b. The range timer shall provide single-cycle courses with shooting
intervals form 1 to 999 seconds. It shall provide multiple-cycle courses
with the same shooting intervals as for single-cycle courses. It shall
provide a selection of courses from 1 through 99 cycles, plus
continuous cycling until manually terminated. It shall provide a selection
of non-shooting intervals (from 1 to 99 seconds) between shooting
intervals.
c. The range timer shall enable the range-master to manually switch from
shooting to non-shooting states (expose to conceal) and shall provide
visual indication of the following: power on and off, shooting or non-
shooting state and course-in-progress or course-not-in -progress.
d. The range timer shall allow a course to be started with the range in
either the shooting or the non-shooting state and return it to that state at
the end of the course. The range timer shall enable the non-shooting
interval, the shooting interval and the number of cycles to be changed at
any time, including when a course is in progress.
e. All timing intervals shall be accurate and repeatable to 0.1 seconds
regardless of length of elapsed time.
f. The system shall be provided with a radio-operated, remote-controlled
command control.
3. Hardware Requirements - The timing and logic functions of the range timer
shall operate from a low-voltage (27-vdc maximum) regulated power supply.
Its output shall be the opening and closing of the ground side of the low-
voltage supply. All intercabling (excepting the command-control cord) shall
be to a connector fitting on the chassis.
a. All time control modules shall be on printed circuit boards and shall
consist of military-grade components.
b. Electronic-type digital-count displays shall show the elapsed time
without the use of mechanical counters. The numerals shall have a
minimum height of 0.375 inch. A toggle switch shall locate the decimal
point either at units or at tenths of seconds. When in tenths of seconds,
the range is reduced by one tenth (elapsed time may be either 999 in
seconds or 99.9 in tenths of seconds).
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Shooting Range Equipment
Specifications 11890-10
c. Switches shall be provided for setting the expose time, the conceal time
and the number of cycles. Other controls shall be by toggle switches.
A jack shall be provided on the panel to receive the command-control
cord.
N. Course Selection Panel - functionality via computer control)
1. General Description - A field shall be provided so that the range timer may be
used to control two or more functions.
2. Typical functions that might be controlled are: target oscillation, target
lighting, horn or bell. However, the inclusion of this feature does not imply
that any of these functions are included unless they are specified.
3. Functional Description - The field provides a series of single throw,
maintained contact toggle switch functionality. The timer signal is bussed to
all switches. Placing any switch in the "on" position directs the timer signal to
that respective function. More than one function may be enabled at the same
time.
4. Hardware Details - This field is compatible in functions and appearance to the
master control console panel and shall essentially meet the requirements of
this specification.
O. Low Voltage Power Supply
1. Regulated Power Supply - The power supply shall provide the low voltage (27
vdc max.) required for operation of the range control console and drive unit,
a. The power supply shall be installed approximately in the location shown
on the drawings and shall be provided with an enclosure suitable for this
mounting.
2. Functional requirements - the power supply shall operate from a 115 vac
electrical power service and supply a regulated low-voltage service.
a. The load regulation shall be plus or minus two percent no-load to full-
load. The line regulation shall be plus or minus 1 percent for a 10
percent change in line voltage. The output shall have 100 milli-volt
maximum ripple.
b. The power supply shall incorporate automatic current limiting.
3. Hardware requirements - The power supply input shall be grounded twist-lock
connector and appliance cord of suitable length to reach the 115 vac outlet
provided for the range-master's station. The output shall be a low voltage
cable for connection to the drive units, range timer and activities panel (as
required) and a 2 conductor, 115 vac cable for connection to the range timer
or other on-off power switch. All cables shall be provided with stress relief
fittings.
a. The power supply shall provide an internal voltage adjustment of
approximately five volt range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION
A. Bullet Traps
1. Constructional Requirements:
a. All members shall be fabricated according to field dimensions so that
they may be erected on the job without field cutting or welding and
without the use of special tools.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Shooting Range Equipment
Specifications 11890-11
b. All field securing of members to each other shall be by means of
threaded connectors and all such connectors are to be provided with
locking by Loctite, No. 271 or approved equal.
c. All connections of the trap members to the floor and walls shall be by
means of anchor bolts as required by structural calculations provided
with the shop drawings.
d. The framework and top plate shall be a smooth consistent angle. There
shall be no staircase or platforms built into the framework.
e. The berm trap shall require no on-the-job cutting or welding of materials
to assemble the trap.
f. The berm trap shall incorporate depth veins to help ensure that the
rubber medium is maintained at the same level from floor to ceiling.
g. The berm trap shall include no less than 2 cubic feet of rubber medium
for each square foot of trap plate.
h. No ballistic panel shall be subjected to flame cutting (oxygen fuel
cutting, such as acetylene, propane or MAPP gas, etc.). All ballistic
panel cutting must be done on computer-controlled plasma equipment.
i. Installation by factory trained installers and in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Baffle System (if manufactured by Range Equipment vendor) shall meet the
requirements as shown on the drawings and specified in Section 05500.
1. Constructional Requirements:
a. All members shall be fabricated according to field dimensions so that
they may be erected on the job without field cutting or welding and
without the use of special tools.
b. All field securing of members to each other shall be by means of
threaded connectors and all such connectors are to be provided with
locking by Loctite, No. 271 or approved equal.
c. All connections of the baffle members to the walls, ceiling, roof and roof
structure shall be by means of anchorage as required by structural
calculations provided with the shop drawings.
d. The baffle system shall require no on-the-job cutting or welding of
materials to assemble the baffles.
e. No ballistic panel shall be subjected to flame cutting (oxygen fuel
cutting, such as acetylene, propane or MAPP gas, etc.). All ballistic
panel cutting must be done on computer-controlled plasma equipment.
f. Installation by factory trained installers and in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Target Systems
1. Constructional Requirements:
a. All members shall be fabricated according to field dimensions so that
they may be erected on the job without field cutting or welding and
without the use of special tools.
b. Installation by factory trained installers and in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Shooting Range Equipment
Specifications 11890-12
SECTION 12100
VINYL ART WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Vinyl Art Work
2. Products supplied in this section are to be installed by others.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and specifications,
including color samples of material for selection, as applicable for approval.
B. Submit full size sample vinyl art work of type, style and color specified including method
of attachment.
C. Manufacturers must submit 3 references showing comparable products for projects
completed within the last 5 years.
D. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty information.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MOUNTING SYSTEM
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. C.R. Laurence Co.
• Design is based on use of standard products manufactured by C.R. Laurence Co.,
Inc., 2503 E. Vernon Avenue, Los Angeles, California 90058, and trade names of
that manufacturer are used herein, (www.crlaurence.com)
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. Edge Grip Glass Display System
1. Acceptable Product: CRL Edge Grip EG12BS
• Finish: Brushed Stainless
• Length: 1 1/8" (28 mm)
• Diameter: 1 1/4" (31.8 mm)
2. The edge grip is designed to receive 1/2" (12mm) thick material
2.02 VINYL ART WORK
A. Vinyl Art Work:
1. Signs shall be of one piece construction; added-on characters are unacceptable.
2. All letters, numbers and/or symbols shall contrast with their background - either light
characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background. Characters
and background shall have matte finish.
B. Vinyl Art Work corners shall be square.
C. Size of the Vinyl Art Work: 3'x6'
D. Owner to provide imagery for artwork.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate Vinyl Art Work piece and accessories where indicated, using mounting
methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated.
3.02 DAMAGED MATERIAL AND CLEANING
A. Damage caused by the manufacturer or Vinyl Art Work contractor shall be repaired or
replaced.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Vinyl Art Work
Specifications 12100-1
B. The general contractor shall inspect and approve each completed Vinyl Art Work area
and be responsible for protecting finished work from damage by other trades.
C. The Vinyl Art Work contractor shall remove all protective materials and labels from the
wall components as they are installed.
D. The general contractor shall be responsible for final cleaning of the Vinyl Art Work due to
any conditions that occur after the Vinyl Art contractor has completed an area. Cleaning
is to be done in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Vinyl Art Work
Specifications 12100-2
SECTION 12366
QUARTZ SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Quartz surfacing for Countertops.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry - Provide framing and blocking to support quartz surfacing
within specified tolerances and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry
C. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork
D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealers between quartz surfacing and work of other Sections
which are not specified in this Section.
E. Section 09260 - Plaster and Gypsum Board
F. Templates showing cutouts required for installation of items installed on or penetrating through
quartz surfacing shall be provided under Sections where items are specified. Sink cutouts are
under cabinet installation.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C97-Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone.
B. ASTM C99- Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone.
C. ASTM C170- Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone.
D. ASTM C482- Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement.
E. ASTM C484- Thermal Shock Resistance of Glazed Ceramic Tile.
F. ASTM C501- Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser.
G. ASTM C531- Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant
Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes.
H. ASTM C880- Flexural Strength of Dimension Stone.
I. ASTM C1028- Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the
Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.
J. ASTM D2299- Relative Stain Resistance of Plastics.
K. ASTM E84- Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Quartz Surfacing: Submit manufacturer's product data, and fabrication and installation
instructions.
C. Accessories: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.
D. Shop Drawings: Show field-verified dimensions, quartz surfacing dimensions, locations and
dimensions of cutouts, required locations of support and blocking members, edge profiles, and
installation details and methods. Identify color and finish.
E. Samples: Submit two sets of manufacturer's standard colors and finishes.
1. Samples 10x10 inches (250 x 250 mm) for color and finish selected.
2. Stone Adhesive: Submit two samples of an adhesive joint for color quartz surfacing selected.
Show color match of adhesive.
F. Fabricator Qualifications: Submit evidence of fabricator's qualifications.
G. Closeout Submittals: Submit completed warranty form.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Observe manufacturer's recommendations and
handle in manner to prevent breakage or damage. Brace parts if necessary. Transport in the
near-vertical position with finished face toward finished face. Do not allow finished surfaces to rub
during shipping or handling.
B. Storage and Protection: Store in racks in near-vertical position. Prevent warpage and breakage.
Store inside away from direct exposure to sun. Store between 25 and 130 °F (4 and 54 °C). Store
with finished face toward finished face.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's ten-year limited warranty against product defects when fabricated and
installed by a CaesarStone certified fabricator.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility QUARTZ SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
Specifications 12366-1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be ISO 9002 and ISO 14001 certified.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Provide CaesarStone Quartz Surfacing distributed by U.S. Quartz
Products Inc (CaesarStone U.S.A., Inc.); Van Nuys, CA; phone 877-9-QUARTZ
2.02 QUARTZ SURFACING
A. Composition: 93 percent crushed quartz aggregate combined with resins and pigments and
fabricated into slabs using a vacuum vibro-compaction process.
B. Dimensions:
1. Thickness: Nominal 3/4 inch (20 mm)inches (30 mm)
2. Size: Slabs shall be not less than [56.5 x 120 inches (1.44 x 3.05 m)] to minimize number of
joints in installation.
C. Identification: Material shall be labeled with batch number and imprinted on back with
manufacturer's identifying mark.
D. Performance:
1. Flexural Strength: 7,420 psi, ASTM C880.
2. Compressive Strength: ASTM C-170
3. Dry: 10,430 psi average.
4. Wet: 11,265 psi average.
5. Izod Impact Strength: 0.361ft. Ibs. /inch of notch average; ASTM D256.
6. Bond Strength: 205 psi; ASTM C482 modified.
7. Modulus of Rupture: 2,110 average, ASTM C99.
8. Mohs Hardness: 6.5-7.5; scratch test.
9. Absorption: 0.022%; ASTM C97.
10. Stain and Acid Resistance: Not affected; ASTM D2299.
11. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread = 10, smoke density = 195; ASTM E84.
12. Thermal Shock Resistance: Passes 5 cycles, 75°F-295°F; ASTM C484.
13. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 1.36x10 inch per °F.; ASTM C531.
14. Weathering Resistance: Not affected after seven days in 1% sulfuric acid; ASTM C217.
15. Freeze-Thaw Resistance: No visible damage or discoloration after 25 cycles (-45°C to
23°C); S.L.P. with ASTM C62 as guide.
16. Wear Resistance: 36.12 gram average; ASTM C501, tested with 1 kg. load, 1000 cycles at
70 r.p.m.
17. Static Coefficient of Friction:
a. Polished Finish: 0.68 average by ASTM D2047, James Machine; 0.87 average (dry)
and 0.54 average (wet) by ASTM C1028, Dynamometer Pull Method.
b. Honed Finish: 0.69 average by ASTM D2047, James Machine; 0.73 average (dry) and
0.68 average (wet) by ASTM C1028, Dynamometer Pull Method.
E. Color and Finish:
1. Color from manufacturer's stocked standards.
2. Provide Blizzard - Fresh White, Color No. 2141 with Polished Finish.
a. Polished Surface shall have gloss greater than or equal to 35% at 50°.
3. Exposed Edges and Corners:
a. Countertops:
1) Edge Treatment: Square, See Interior Elevations for length of edge facing.
2) Outside Corners: Miter Edge profile, double layer thick.
b. Backsplash:
1) Edges: Square.
2) Outside Corners: Square butt joints.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Adhesives:
1. Provide structural-grade silicone or epoxy adhesives of type recommended by manufacturer
for application and conditions of use.
2. Acceptable Silicone Manufactures:
a. Dow Corning.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility QUARTZ SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
Specifications 12366-2
b. GE Sealants and Adhesives.
3. Acceptable Epoxy Manufacturers:
a. Akemi North America.
b. Bonstone Material Corporation.
c. Tenax USA.
4. Provide spacers, if required, of type recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
B. Stone Adhesive:
1. Provide epoxy or polyester adhesive of type recommend by manufacturer for application and
conditions of use.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Akemi North America.
b. Bonstone Material Corporation.
c. Tenax USA.
3. Color: Adhesive which will be visible in finished work shall be tinted to match quartz
surfacing.
4. Clear silicone sealant of type recommended by manufacturer for application and conditions
of use.
a. Acceptable Manufactures:
1) Dow Corning.
2) GE Sealants and Adhesives.
C. Solvent: Product recommended by adhesive manufacturer to clean surface of quartz surfacing to
assure adhesion of adhesives and sealants.
D. Cleaning Agents: Non-abrasive, soft-scrub type kitchen cleansers.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Fabricator: Firm shall have five years experience fabricating architectural stone and shall have
water-cooled cutting tools. Firm shall be authorized in writing by manufacturer.
B. Shop Assembly: Observe proper safety procedures and comply with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Layout: Layout joints as shown on Drawings to minimize joints and to avoid L-shaped pieces of
quartz surfacing.
D. Inspect Material:
1. Inspect material for defects prior to fabrication.
2. Color Match: Materials throughout Project shall be from the same batch and shall bear labels
with same batch number. Visually inspect materials to be used for adjacent pieces to assure
acceptable color match. Inspect in lighting conditions similar to those on Project.
3. Variation in distribution of aggregates in quartz surfacing which are within manufacturer's
tolerances is not a defect.
E. Tools: Cut and polish with water-cooled power tools.
F. Cutouts: As with any type of stone, smaller radii increase potential for crack propagation at
inside corners; in no case should radius less than 3/8 inch be used.
1. Cutouts shall have 3/8 inches (10 mm) minimum inside corner radius. Inside corners shall be
reinforced in an acceptable manner to prevent cracking.
2. Where edges of cutout will be exposed in finished work, polish edges.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLER
A. Installer: Firm shall have five years experience installing architectural stone.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification:
1. Verify dimensions by field measurements prior to fabrication.
2. Verify that substrates supporting quartz surfaces are plumb, level, and flat to within 1/16 inch
in ten feet (1.6 mm in 3000 mm) and that necessary supports and blocking are in place.
3. Base Cabinets: Cabinet units shall be securely fixed to adjoining units and back wall.
B. Inspect finished surfaces for damage. Do not install until damage materials have been repaired in
an acceptable manner or replaced.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Protect finished surfaces against scratches. Apply masking where necessary. Guard against grit,
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility QUARTZ SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
Specifications 12366-3
dust, and other trades.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance to manufacturer's recommendations. Lift and place to avoid
breakage.
B. Preliminary Installation and Adjustment: Position materials to verify that materials are correctly
sized and prepared. Make necessary adjustments.
1. If jobsite cutting, grinding, or polishing is required, use water-cooled tools. Protect jobsite and
surfaces against dust and water. Perform work away from installation site if possible.
2. Countertops: Gypsum drywall back walls which are not fire or acoustically rated may be
routed up to half the thickness of the drywall to allow countertop to fit.
3. Allow gaps for expansion of not less than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) per five feet when installed
between walls or other fixed conditions.
4. Drainage: Adjacent to sinks and where drainage is required, shim countertops slightly to
insure positive drainage.
C. Permanent Installation:
1. After verifying fit, remove quartz surfacing from position, clean substrates of dust and
contamination, and clean quartz surfacing back side and joints with solvent.
2. Apply sufficient quantity of mounting adhesive in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's
recommendations to provide permanent, secure installation.
3. Spacing of mounting adhesive shall not exceed:
a. Horizontal Surfaces: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) on center.
b. Vertical Surfaces: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) on center; provide temporary shims until adhesive
cures.
4. Install surfacing plumb, level, and square and flat to within 1/16 inch in ten feet (1.6 mm in
3000 mm).
D. Joints:
1. Joints between Adjacent Pieces of Quartz Surfacing:
a. Joints shall be flush, tight fitting, level, and neat.
b. Securely join with stone adhesive. Fill joints level with quartz surfacing.
c. Clamp or brace quartz surfacing in position until adhesive sets.
2. Joints between Backsplashes and Countertops: Seal joints with silicone sealer.
3.05 REPAIR
A. Repair or replace damaged materials in a satisfactory manner.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove masking and excess adhesives and sealants. Clean exposed surfaces.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect surfacing from damage by other Sections.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility QUARTZ SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
Specifications 12366-4
SECTION 12486
FLOOR MATS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Recessed Floor Mat and Frame.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating properties of walk-off surface, component dimensions and
recessed frame characteristics.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and details for recessed frame.
1. For recessed frames located within a dimensionally restricted area, show dimensions of
space within which the frame will be installed.
D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12x12 inches in size illustrating pattern, color, finish, edging.
E. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning instructions, stain removal procedures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Recessed Floor Mats:
1. CIS Group Pedisystems; Product Pedigrid SA (G8). www.pedisystems.com
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATS
A. Recessed Mounted Frame: 1-13/16 inches deep aluminum rail with one inch vinyl cushions
spaced 10 inches O.C. on the under rail protect the aluminum rails from clanging on the concrete
pit surface.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Construct recessed mat frames square, tight joints at corners, rigid. Coat surfaces with
protective coating where in contact with cementitious materials.
B. Fabricate mats in single unit sizes; fabricate multiple mats where indicated.
C. Finish: Clear Anodized (C)
D. Wheel Rolling Load Maximum Capacity: 400 Ibs. per wheel
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that floor opening for recessed mat frames are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Verify size of floor recess before fabricating recessed mat frames.
B. Vacuum clean floor recess pit.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install recessed mat frames to achieve flush plane with finished floor surface.
B. Install recessed mat frames in floor recess flush with finish floor after cleaning of finish flooring.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Gap Formed at Recessed Mat Frame From Mat Size: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility FLOOR MATS
Specifications 12486 -1
SECTION 12490
WINDOW TREATMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formed steel track.
B. Nylon carriers, cords, and accessories.
1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate location and installation of concealed blocking for support of tracks.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials
to Fungi.
B. NFPA 701 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide track profiles, acceptable load data, and finishes available.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate end track location, width of window opening, location of blocking for
anchors, appurtenances and interferences, adjacent construction, operating hardware, and
support bracket details.
D. Selection Samples: One set of shade cloth options and aluminum finish color samples
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Verification Samples: One complete set of shade components, unassembled, demonstrating
compliance with specified requirements. Shadecloth sample and aluminum finish sample as
selected. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures, perimeter conditions requiring
attention.
G. Maintenance Data: Include shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, control adjustments, spare
part sources.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Control Cords/Wands: Two of each type installed.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer
with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products comparable to those
specified in this section.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten
years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701 small and large-scale vertical burn.
Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.
D. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC
9644, ATCC9645.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up of one roller shade assembly for evaluation of mounting,
appearance and accessories.
B. Locate mock-up in window designated by Architect.
1. Do not proceed with remaining work until, mock-up is accepted by Architect.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name,
fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations
indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is
complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Window Treatments
Specifications 12490-1
A.09 WARRANTY
A. Roller Shade Hardware and Chain Warranty: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating
twenty-five year limited warranty.
B. Standard Shadecloth: Manufacturer's standard twenty-five year warranty.
C. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including
scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Drapery Track:
1. MechoShade Systems, Inc., 42-03 35th St. ; Long Island City, NY 11101; Tel:
718-729-2020; www.mechoshade.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Tracks: Formed steel, side stacking operating traverse rods, regular duty channel track.
B. Track Brackets: Formed steel ceiling type, for surface installation, with screws and inserts for
attachment.
C. Product: Suburban/2 Shade System by MechoShade Systems, Inc.
D. Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop, free end weighted.
2.03 ROLLER SHADE TYPES
A. Manually Operated Shades:
1. Mounting: Recess mounted without ceiling pocket or fascia.
2. Configuration: Single solar shadecloth.
3. Solar Shadecloths:
a. Fabric: ThermoVeil 0900, 0-1 percent visually translucent extra-dense linear weave
pattern.
b. Color: 0903 Grey.
b. Shade Cloth: ThermoVeil series, single thickness non-raveling 0.030-inch (0.762 mm)
thick vinyl fabric, woven from 0.018-inch (0.457 mm) diameter extruded vinyl yarn
comprising of 21 percent polyester and 79 percent reinforced vinyl.
B. Shade Band: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem-pocket, shade
roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem
pockets are not acceptable.
1. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF-welded seams (including
welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of appropriate size
and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a sealed hem
pocket. Hem pocket construction and hem weights shall be similar, for all shades
within one room.
2. Shade Band and Shade Roller Attachment:
a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness
required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less
than 1.55 inch (39.37 mm) in diameter for manual shades, and less than 2.55
inches (64.77 mm) for motorize shades are not acceptable.
b. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive / brake mechanism.
c. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade
band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-on" snap-off' spline
mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets.
d. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples,
and/or rivets.
3. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of: adhesive,
adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets are not acceptable.
2.04 SHADE FABRICATION
A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
B. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling
of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (W:H)
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Window Treatments
Specifications 12490-2
ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be
responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the
shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or
tempered steel, as required.
2.05 COMPONENTS
A. Access and Material Requirements:
1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from
brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center
supports to be removed.
2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade
bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets.
3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade
hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be
acceptable.
B. Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets:
1. Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall
at front, rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be
adjustable for future change.
2. Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular
and/or reverse roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any
kind.
3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse
roll fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without
requiring exposed fasteners of any kind.
4. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated
steel or heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.
C. Drive Bracket / Brake Assembly:
1. M5 drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8
inch (9.525 mm) steel pin.
2. The brake shall be an over-running clutch design which disengages to 90 percent
during the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of 50
Ibs. (22 kg) in the stopped position.
3. The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to which the
brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes an articulated
brake assembly, which assures a smooth, non-jerky operation in raising and lowering
the shades. The assembly shall be permanently lubricated. Products that require
externally applied lubrication and or not permanently lubricated are not acceptable.
4. The entire M5 assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and
fully independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled
without effecting the roller shade limit adjustments.
5. Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 Ib. (41 kg) minimum
breaking strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Exposed Surfaces: Baked enamel, white.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that concealed anchors are in correct position.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install drapery tracks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mount track support brackets on solid backing. Where mounting location does not align with
solid backing, provide expanding anchors for each screw hole location.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Window Treatments
Specifications 12490-3
C. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written
instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of
glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware.
D. Anchor tension pulley to wall.
E. Set cord pulls so that cord pull is 12 inches (300 mm) below window sill in full open position.
F. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
G. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller
shade systems.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust drapery hardware for smooth operation.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Window Treatments
Specifications 12490 - 4
SECTION 13000
INTERIOR STRUCTURAL FIRE TRAINERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This specification defines the functional and performance characteristics of the
computer-controlled interior propane gas-fueled live fire training system for the
Carlsbad First Responders Training Facility in Carlsbad, California. Fire Training
Equipment Supplier (FTES) shall be responsible for the complete provision, installation,
testing and start-up of the structural live fire trainers.
B. The purpose of the live fire trainers is to meet both the minimum requirements for the
live fire training certification of entry level fire service personnel, as specified in the
NFPA 1001, and advance training scenarios to provide refresher skills and meet
ongoing training requirements for the seasoned veteran.
C. Scope of Work:
1. Provide all required reference material and product certifications upon
submission of bid for verification by contract awarding agency.
2. Provide complete review of contract documents for conflicts and coordination
requirements. All discrepancies shall be identified prior to award of contract. If
contractor fails to notify; all costs incurred to correct or modify structures based
on the requirements shall be the responsibility of the Fire Training Equipment
Supplier.
3. Procure all necessary regulatory agency permits for the work performed outside
the base contract permit.
4. Provide field verification for system integration, coordination and installation
requirements.
5. Provide and install fully-integrated gas fired props as listed in Paragraph 2.01.D
of this Section.
6. Provide and install fully-integrated emergency exhaust ventilation system.
7. Provide and install system control and diagnostic control units for each fire
trainer.
8. Provide complete testing and certification of each fire trainer.
9. Provide manuals and training for each fire trainer and system diagnostics.
10. Provide system and equipment maintenance for designated period.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Interior Structural Fire Trainers
Specifications 13000-1
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each gas fired prop and affiliated equipment as indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include; plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
Work and to building structure.
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by the system manufacturer certifying that Installer is
approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install system.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified Third party testing agency, for components
of system
E. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section
F. Inspection Report: Final inspection acceptance and start-up report signed by system
vendor certifying completion and proper working order.
G. Training Information: Provide training course outline of goals and materials to be
covered.
1.04 INSTRUCTIONS
A. Each bidder shall carefully read the included specifications and examine all documents
for the equipment requested prior to submitting an offer. All offers shall be in
compliancy with current codes and standards for this type of equipment. Current codes
shall supersede errors in specification.
B. If any exceptions are taken to any portion of the bid document, the supplier must clearly
indicate the exceptions taken and include a full explanation on the Alternative
Document Sheet attached. Failure to identify exceptions or proposed changes with a
full explanation will constitute acceptance by the vendor to deliver the product as
specified.
C. The work to be included in this proposal consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials,
equipment, tools, and services, and all costs related for installation of gas fired training
props in a new concrete training building. Any cost that may be necessary to complete
the work, in accordance with the specifications and drawing documents, shall be
furnished by the vendor, at the cost quoted in the subsequent contract.
D. All equipment utilized shall conform to all applicable codes and standards. All electrical
equipment/components shall be UL approved electrical control equipment. All State
and Local code requirements shall be observed and adhered to.
E. The successful respondent shall use qualified and licensed personnel capable of
performing the tasks required for a successful and timely completion. The contractor
shall furnish workers who perform quality work and who are experienced and
knowledgeable in regards to projects of this nature and scope.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Interior Structural Fire Trainers
Specifications 13000-2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Fire Training System Supplier must be a qualified company that
possesses the following requirements. Failure to comply with requirements may be
cause for rejection.
1. Company history including all business names that the company has offered live
fire training equipment under. The history must include any and all business
names (including acquisitions) that the company has done business as (DBA).
Demonstrated experience in coordination, design, installation and training of
computerized environment training systems using propane gas fuel for interior
applications as specified.
2. Company history including a minimum of 10 years offering computerized live fire
training systems utilizing natural and propane gas fuels.
3. Five (5) Customer References that include completed projects, of equal or
greater size, that utilize computer controls and LPG as a fuel source. Must use
form provided in section 3.04.
4. A complete history of any accidents or incidents, whether they resulted in injury
or not, that occurred within or around a training unit produced by the manufacture
offering the equipment. Failure to include all incidents, including operator error or
system failures, will be considered non responsive and may result in rejection.
The list shall include any and all equipment produced under any business name
(including acquisitions) that the company has done business as (DBA).
5. Written documentation of the equipment certification for the completed live fire
training equipment offered:
a. Certification from a Nationally Recognized testing Laboratory (NRTL)
(Dated within the last 12 months) in compliancy to UL 508A, NFPA 54, 58,
86, and 1402. The NRTL must meet the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR
1910.7.
b. A compliancy letter from an Independent Engineering firm of a completed
safety analysis and flame failure analysis of the operational system. The
FTA and FFA must be in compliancy with MIL-STD 882D at a minimum.
6. Each prequalification package shall also include the following:
a. Published promotional literature of the proposed equipment that is a
standard off the shelf item currently offered in the industry.
b. A written detailed list of conflicts with the manufactures ability to offer any
portion of the proposed bid specification package.
B. Trainer equipment shall be designed and installed in accordance with the latest version
of the following standards:
1. NFPA 54: Propane Fuel Gas Code
2. NFPA 58: LP Gas Code
3. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code
4. NFPA 1402: Guide to Building Fire Service Training Centers
5. NFPA 86, the Standard for Ovens and Furnaces, Sixteenth Edition
6. UL 508A, the Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
7. ANSI Z21 & 83: Series Standard for Gas Utilization Equipment
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Interior Structural Fire Trainers
Specifications 13000-3
C. Live structural fires shall be compliant and meet the criteria for training as specified in
the following NFPA manuals:
1. NFPA 1001: Standard for Fire Fighter Professional Qualifications
2. NFPA 1403: Standard on Live Fire Training Evolutions
3. NFPA 1500: Standard on Fire Department Occupational Health & Safety.
D. All work performed at the construction site shall be by qualified personnel licensed to
perform work in the State of California.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Warrant the system to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of
two (2) years after the final system acceptance date. Provide a replacement part for
any part that fails in normal use. The supplier will provide a toll free customer service
telephone number that can be used by the Owner 24 hours per day, 7 days per week to
contact the suppliers customer service department.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers for the provision and installation of the live fire interior fire
trainers are listed below, he Basis-of-Design is the following product model and
manufacturer:
1. Structural Fire Trainer Model "Hawk" as manufacturer by
Fireblast451
4131 Tigris Way
Riverside CA 92503
(800)716-1977
Website: www.fireblast.com
B. Contractor shall submit a brief explanation of props, operations and features as part of
the initial bid process. Refer to paragraph 3.04 of this Section for format and questions
to be addressed.
C. The live fire training system for the facility shall consist of multiple gas fired props as
listed within the table below. Locations of props shall be as located within the Drawings.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Interior Structural Fire Trainers
Specifications 13000-4
D. Table 2.1 listing prop description and location:
NATURAL GAS FIRED PROP
LOCATION
Building Room No.
TRAINING FIRES &
FIRE EFFECTS
Description
COMMERCIAL TOWER BURN PROP "C"
WAREHOUSE #109
BEDROOM #207
HALLWAY #210
OFFICE #301
Storage Rack Fire
Bedroom Fire
Ceiling Flashover/Rollover Effect Fire
Office Desk Fire with Extension
RESIDENTIAL BURN PROP BUILDING "R"
GARAGE #103
KITCHEN #105
OPEN TRAINING #201
Portable Car Fire Prop
(Refer to Section 13080)
Concealed Kitchen Cabinet Fire with
Extension
Bedroom Fire with Flashover/Rollover
Fire
Fire
Effect
E. General Prop Descriptions:
1. Warehouse Storage Rack Fire
a. The storage fire shall simulate a class A industrial fire. The fire structure
shall consist of a mockup of a typical warehouse storage rack unit with
boxes and equipment.
b. The control system shall allow the selection of the start point of the fire,
flame-spread sequence, and flame spread as selected by the operator.
c. Upon initialization by the operator, smoke shall be emitted and the fire shall
begin to grow according to parameters set by the instructor at the scenario
control panel. The fully involved fire shall reach above 10'-0".
2. Kitchen Range Top Fire with Concealed Fire Extension:
a. The kitchen fire shall simulate a class B grease" spill fire and a class A
countertop fire. The fire structure shall consist of a mockup of a kitchen
countertop with a range top at one end. Class A and B fires shall be
simulated simultaneously.
b. The kitchen range-top fire shall be designed for automatic flame-spread to
concealed cabinet fire above the countertop. The control system shall allow
the selection of the start point of the fire, flame-spread sequence, and
flame spread as selected by the operator.
c. The concealed fire shall consist of an overhead kitchen cabinet with an
internal flame element controlled through the prop control system. The
flame can be initiated independent of the range fire or as part of the
automated fire extension simulation.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Interior Structural Fire Trainers
13000-5
d. Upon initialization by the operator, smoke shall be emitted and the fire shall
begin to grow according to parameters set by the instructor at the scenario
control panel. The fully involved fire shall reach the ceiling and shall cover
the majority of the countertop area.
3. Bedroom, and Office Fires:
a. The bedroom and office fires shall simulate a class A fire in a residential or
commercial building. The fire structure shall consist of a mockup of a bed,
sofa or desk.
b. The structural training fire shall be designed for automatic flame-spread to
other training fires within the room (where occurs). The control system
shall allow the selection of the start point of the fire, flame-spread
sequence, and flame spread as selected by the operator.
c. Upon initialization by the operator, smoke shall be emitted and the fire shall
begin to grow according to parameters selected by the instructor at the
scenario control panel. The fully involved fire shall reach a height of four to
six feet above the mockup and shall cover the majority of the bed or desk
surface.
4. Portable Car Fire Prop (Refer to Section 13080)
a. The portable car is planned to also be used as in interior structural fire
trainer with the Garage of the Residential Prop Building. All required
equipment and elements defined within the Specification Section shall
apply.
b. The car fire prop as defined elsewhere shall be equipped with its own
independent flame devices which are to be connected to the building's
natural gas fuel supply.
c. The control system shall allow the selection of the start point of the fire,
flame-spread sequence, and flame spread as selected by the operator.
5. Flashover/Rollover Effect Fire:
a. The Flashover/rollover effect burners shall be controlled by a single device
concurrently or independently in locations with multiple fire simulators as
the instructor chooses.
b. Flashover/rollover fires shall be controlled only by the instructor using the
Mobile Touch Panel (MTP) within the rooms below the fire as a response to
observe incorrect procedure in dealing with a flashover or rollover situation.
When the instructor initiates flashover/rollover, it shall provide a burst of
flame that engulfs the ceiling area in the burn room.
c. The flashover/rollover effect burner shall be mounted near the ceiling level
and shall be mounted in such a way as to be inconspicuous to the trainees.
The flashover/rollover fire shall have its own pilot. The flashover/rollover
effect shall not rely on any training fire's main flame or pilot flame for
ignition.
F. The system shall utilize a direct wired industrial PC controller with a 19" touch panel
operator interface. The PC based system shall include the ability to integrate additional
props in future expansions. PC controller shall have the capability of wireless
connectivity to the master control.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Interior Structural Fire Trainers
Specifications 13000-6
G. The system shall include a programmable logic controller (PLC) for each burn room
control rack. The PLC shall monitor all safety devices and operational controls while
recording and archiving message logs and event data. The PLC shall be programmed
to place the system in fail safe shut down in the event of safety device activation,
manual E-stop depressed or system inaccuracy.
H. The burn props shall be constructed of corrosion resistant steel. The props must be
factory tested prior to delivery. Each burner must include stainless steel pilot and
burner assemblies.
I. The flashover units shall be equipped with an independent pilot and burner system as
specified in NFPA 1402. The flashover units shall be controllable by the operator and
produce controlled bursts of flames across the ceiling representative of pre flashover
conditions. The flashover units must provide flame duration of at minimum 15 seconds.
J. The system shall include a smoke generation machine capable of up to 10,000 cfm
distribution minimum. The system shall utilize nitrogen for operation and purging of the
distribution unit. The smoke generation machine shall be programmable with an
operator controlled timer system that is displayed on the operator control mobile TP.
The timer must provide the operator the ability to vary discharge duration and intervals
between cycles from the main control unit without the use of any external equipment.
K. The system shall include a nitrogen generation unit with the ability to produce one (1)
250cu ft nitrogen cylinder every 4 hours. The generation system must be designed to
integrate with the offered live fire training system. A storage tank shall be supplied with
the unit.
L. The system shall include a gas detection unit that is based on infrared absorption
principle incorporating a heated double-compensated optical bench (2 lamps, 2
detectors) with non-focusing optics design in two locations. The sensor must be
temperature compensated and able to operate within an ambient temperature range of
-40°F to 150°F and within ambient humidity conditions of 0 to 100%. Optics and
electronics shall be hermetically sealed.
1. The gas detection units shall verify a safe atmosphere within the burn room prior
to and during all burn operations. The system shall verify a safe atmosphere
prior to system operation. These units shall be interlocked with additional safety
features.
2. The gas concentration levels must constantly be displayed on the industrial
computer and the operator mobile Touch Panel device screen.
3. The systems shall be preset to a 15% LEL warning level and 25% LEL alarm and
shut down. A purge cycle shall then activate automatically. The gas monitoring
unit features are interlocked to gas delivery and exhaust fan systems. An audible
and visual alarm is activated during all elevated LEL conditions.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Interior Structural Fire Trainers
Specifications 13000-7
M. Each burn prop room shall include temperature monitoring. Constant temperature
monitoring shall exist whenever power is supplied to the system. Temperature sensors
shall be located 60-inches above the finish floor level and initiate warning and
automatic compartment ventilation at predetermined levels within the PLC program.
1. Training room temperature activation shall occur when the room temperature
reaches 450°F 60-inches above the floor level. The system shall activate the
ventilation system and display on the PC and MTP a color indicator that
represents to the operator that an over temperature shut down is approaching.
2. Training room temperature shutdown shall occur when the room temperature
reaches 500°F 60-inches above the floor level. The systems shall activate an
emergency shut- down. All gas delivery system functions and smoke machine
operation must cease. A full cycle purge shall then activate automatically
through interlocks in the safety system and provide compartment ventilation until
the temperature is reduced below the warning point.
N. The system shall include an exhaust ventilation system. The exhaust system shall be
designed to remove heat and by product of combustion from the training environment.
The system design shall provide for a compartment air exchange every 60 seconds.
The system shall be programmed upon start up of the equipment, the facility shall
begin to exchange air and establish a safe training environment. Upon a system safety
fault (over temperature, high gas level, system malfunction status) or manual activation
of an emergency stop, automatic activation of the exhaust system shall initiate. The
purge cycle shall continue until predetermined safety levels have been reached and
reset. Safety reset parameters shall insure that a complete air exchange is provided
prior to reactivation of the training equipment. This system shall include fan controls.
O. Independent constant monitoring of flame propagation at each pilot burner shall be
supplied. The pilot burner shall be designed to be inextinguishable. In the event that
there is a failure of adequate pilot flame production, the fuel delivery system and all
inline safety valves, shall close. Display status messaging shall activate on the
industrial computer and the mobile Touch Panel device.
P. The fuel delivery system shall be installed within an approved cabinet. The fuel
delivery system shall be equipped with fail-safe, safety shutoff valves that are UL listed
and FM approved for gas use. A proof of closure switch and position status shall be
included on all prop valves. The gas valve train shall include a secondary safety valve
for all operational valves per NFPA 86. All gas pipe installation shall be compliant with
NFPA 54 and 58. The fuel delivery system shall utilize stainless steel piping.
Q. All electronic components shall be UL approved for the application in which they are
utilized. Control panels shall be designed, manufactured and certified to UL 508A
compliancy. The NEC (NFPA 70) shall be utilized for all electrical installations.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Interior Structural Fire Trainers
Specifications 13000-8
R. The Mobile Touch Panel (MTP) controller at minimum, must include the following
functions and visual display features:
« Handheld password protection
• E-stop
• Burner enable
• Pilot and burner flame activation
• Pilot visual verification
• Burner flame visual verification
• Flame mode selection of Fixed-Button-Joystick
• Joystick control unit
• Smoke distribution and duration controls
• Smoke interval controls
• System reset
• Flashover/flame spread activity
• Exhaust fan activity
• Gas monitoring readout with color indicator
• Temperature monitoring readout with color indicator
• System messaging
S. The system shall include multiple levels of operator password protection. Each level
shall provide varied levels of operator access. The system administrator level shall
allow access by the fire agency to create and assign training officers to the varied
levels of system operation.
T. The system shall include data tracking and system monitoring of all system functions.
Functions stored shall include operator commands as well as PLC functions and safety
device inputs. Recording of data must include password logging, event messaging,
system messaging, alarm messaging, operator display notes, run timers and counters
and fault counters. All operation events shall be stored for retrieval. The information
shall be stored in the hard drive of the operating system in addition to a compact flash
card that can be removed for data retrieval. The information shall be viewable from the
main operator control screen at any time by selecting the appropriate icon on the
Windows® based operational screen.
Information shall be tracked by time, date, event, action and operator. Each log shall
be designated by a number for file retrieval. The system shall integrate the data
tracking within the industrial operating system and not require the use of additional
external equipment for data removal, viewing or storage.
U. The operating system must have remote access capabilities. The manufacture shall
include a remote diagnostic program for internet servicing and system upgrades as
they are available.
V. The burn room and hallway, where specified on the drawing, shall include thermal
lining that is rated to withstand temperatures in excess of 2000°F and thermal shock
from the continuous heating and cooling typically found in live fire training exercises.
The thermal lining shall include a minimum 5 year warranty for all components of the
lining system. (Example: lining, shielding fasteners etc.).
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Interior Structural Fire Trainers
Specifications 13000-9
W. The thermal lining shall include a temperature monitoring system in compliancy with
NFPA 1403 to be located behind the lining system, and include a tracking system to
verify temperatures do not exceed NFPA 1403 requirements. Refer to Specification
Section 13020 High Temperature Lining System for additional information.
X. Training fires and effect fires shall be instructor controlled. The control system shall,
however automatically monitor all trainer safety systems, and shall stop all training fires
and begin building ventilation as appropriate for the specific safety system alarm or
malfunction. A Mobile Touch Panel (MTP) shall be used to control the training fires.
Y. The training fire's main flame shall be extinguishable by using the Mobile Touch Panel
(MTP).
Z. A Mobile Touch Panel (MTP) unit shall control the training fire, fire effects, smoke
generation, and ventilation system as required for the look and timing of the training
scenario.
2.02 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
A. Electrical Supply: As shown on Drawings.
B. All components in this system shall perform to the following minimum standards:
1. Compartment Equipment:
a. Temperature: 32 deg F to max. (Operating); -20 to 125 deg F (Storage)
b. Humidity: 0 to 100 percent
2. Mechanical: All training compartment equipment shall withstand direct hose
pressure of 100 PSI at 100 GPM from a distance of three feet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The fire training system supplier shall manufacture, provide, install, integrate and test
the live fire training system defined in this specification.
B. Prior to shipping the system and equipment to the site, an inspection team from the fire
training equipment supplier shall perform a final site inspection to determine the
readiness of the work to accept the system. The fire training system supplier shall be
responsible for all costs associated with shipping and storage of their equipment.
C. The fire training system supplier shall provide and extend propane gas supply from
noted points of connection to terminus points as required for operation of the fire
training equipment.
D. The fire training system supplier shall provide and extend electrical service from noted
points of connection to terminus points as required for operation of the fire training
equipment. Conduit between electrical panel and system PLC unit shall be provided by
electrical contractor. All other power and conduit shall be provided by fire training
system installer, unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Interior Structural Fire Trainers
Specifications 13000-10
E. The mechanical contactor shall calculate and verify required exterior ventilation louvers
based on room size and use. The general contractor shall install the louvers.
F. The fire training system supplier shall provide three (3) copies of an Operator and
Maintenance Manual to the Owner. The manual shall fully describe the delivered
system and shall include sections on system operation, troubleshooting and
maintenance, associated diagrams and drawings, and replaceable spare parts listing.
G. The fire training system supplier shall conduct an operational readiness test with facility
personnel in observance. The goal of this test shall be to show reliable operation of the
system. Once this test has been completed the system shall be signed off by the
Owner and be officially designated ready for training (RFT).
H. The fire training system supplier shall provide a three (3) day operator's training course
for up to ten (10) facility staff members. The course shall cover operation, calibration,
and maintenance of the system. There shall be ample opportunity for hands-on use of
the system during the training course.
I. Supplier shall provide two (2) years of semi-annual maintenance for a total of four (4)
site visits. This maintenance does not serve as a substitute for the operational and
preventive maintenance that is to be performed by the Owner. This maintenance shall
be performed quarterly starting six (6) months after the date of Owner acceptance.
3.02 START-UP AND TRAINING
A. Conduct an operational readiness test with facility personnel in observance. The goal
of this test shall be to show reliable operation of the system. Once this test has been
completed the system shall be signed off by the Owner and be officially designated
ready for training (RFT).
B. Provide a three day operator's training course for up to ten facility staff members. The
course shall cover operation, calibration, and maintenance of the system. There shall
be ample opportunity for hands-on use of the system during the training course
3.03 FINAL CLEANING AND CLOSE-OUT
A. Provide three copies of an Operator and Maintenance Manual to the Owner. The manual shall
fully describe the delivered system and shall include sections on system operation,
troubleshooting and maintenance, associated diagrams and drawings, and replaceable spare
parts listing.
B. Contractor shall clean all areas of work free of debris and materials.
C. Fire training equipment shall be cleaned using approved cleaning materials prior to
training.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Interior Structural Fire Trainers
Specifications 13000-11
3.04 REFERENCES
Customer References
The supplier must utilize this form to supply customer references for each unit. This
document should be copied for each reference offered. A minimum of five (5) units must
be supplied.
Department name:
Address:
Contact name:Contact phone #:
Model name/number:
Type of equipment:
Delivery date:
Number of props:
List all props installed including options:
Prop #1
Prop #6
Prop #2
Prop #7
Prop #3
Prop #8
Prop #4
Prop #9
Prop #5
Prop #10
NRTL certifying agency:
No
Yes Contact Name:Contact Number:
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Interior Structural Fire Trainers
13000-12
Explanation Document
The supplier must utilize this form to clarify the following sections as specified in the bid
documents. Failure to explain the following section of the bid on this document, with a
full explanation, will be considered non responsive and will cause bid rejection.
Specification
Section
Number
2.01 -F
2.01 -I
2.01 -J
2.01 -L
2.01 -L.2
2.01 -L.3
2.01 -M.1
2.01 -M.3
2.01 -R
201 -S
2.01 -T
2.01 -W
Explanation
Explain expansion capabilities and number of burners available on this
system:
Explain flame duration of Flashover burner:
Explain smoke discharge duration and interval controls.
Explain gas detection capabilities:
Explain gas detection display:
Explain gas detection audible alarm and display:
Explain temperature warning activation levels and display features:
Explain temperature shutdown activation levels and display features:
Explain operator control mobile touch panel function:
Explain individual operator password capacity:
Explain data tracking system capabilities:
Explain tracking and monitoring system for behind lining:
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Interior Structural Fire Trainers
13000-13
Alternative Document Sheet
The supplier must utilize this form to note any exceptions that are being taken to any
portion of the bid document. The supplier must clearly indicate the section to which they
are taking exception or offering an alternative and include a full explanation. Failure to
identify exceptions or proposed changes on this document, with a full explanation, will
constitute acceptance by the supplier to deliver the product as specified.
Specification
Section
Number
Specification
Alternative/Clarification
This document may be copied if additional pages are required
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Interior Structural Fire Trainers
13000-14
SECTION 13020
HIGH TEMPERATURE LINING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The installation of the specified high temperature lining systems shall include all
associated work required for proper installation including, but not limited to attachments
to walls and ceilings, metal support framing infrastructure and coordination with
disciplines of adjacent work.
B. Work in This Section includes the following:
1. Installation of High Temperature Padgenite® Panels on Walls
2. Installation of High Temperature Padgenite® Panels of Ceilings
3. Installation of Cold Formed metal framing and furring for the support of High
Temperature panels.
4. High Temperature Padgenite® Battens
5. Full-Height protective wall angles for all Padgenite® corners.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 3: Cast in Place Concrete
B. Division 4: Concrete Masonry Units
C. Division 13: Structural Live Fire Trainers.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Material product and performance data and installation accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide complete drawings showing; locations, fabrication, and
installation of all joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and
attachments to other units of Work.
C. Samples: Provide samples of material, framing accessories and wall angel protection:
Full-size sample in for each trim accessory indicated.
D. Warranty and Maintenance manuals
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Employ only installers familiar with the application and installation of high temperature
lining materials for fire training buildings.
B. Installers must display a minimum of five (5) years experience in the provision and
installation of high temperature lining systems.
C. Provide full product data and certification certifying product for application and
performance specified herein.
1.06 REFERENCE
A. NFPA 1403: Standard on Live Fire Training Evolutions
B. NFPA 1500: Standard on Fire Department Occupational Health & Safety
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and
other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.08 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE
A. Provide written instructions for the proper required maintenance and replacement of
high temperature panels.
1.09 ADDITIONAL PRODUCT
A. Upon completion of installation, contractor shall provide to the owner in manufacturer
packaging a minimum of the following additional materials
1. Five (5) full size high-temperature lining panels (24" x 48")
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility High Temperature Lining Systems
Specifications 13020-1
2. Ten (10) high temperature battens. (3-3/4" x 48")
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Cold Formed Galvanized Framing and Furring:
1) Cemco Systems.
2) Dietrich Industries, Inc.
3) Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems.
4) Approved Equivalent
2. Padgenite® High Temperature Lining Material
1) WHP Training Towers: 9121 Bond, Overland Park, Kansas 66214,
Telephone (800) 351-2525, FAX (913) 385-7078 Website:
www.trainingtowers.com
2) Approved Equivalent
2.02 METAL FRAMING AND FURRING
A. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of
18-guage, a minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange, with manufacturer's standard corrosion-
resistant zinc coating.
B. Furring Channels: Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip
galvanized] manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating.
C. 18-gauge Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. Minimum
Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
D. Resilient Furring Channels: 3/i-inch deep members designed to reduce sound
transmission. Configuration: Asymmetrical, with face attached to single flange by a
slotted leg
E. Fasteners: Battens attached with #6 x 1-7/8" Tek fasteners. Panels attached with #8 x
3" Tek fasteners with % x 1-1/4" flat washers.
2.03 HIGH TEMPERATURE PANELS & BATTENS
A. Proprietary Thermal Ceiling Liner Panels: Comply with the following:
1. Basis of Design Product: WHP "Super Padgenite"
2. Core: 1 inch thick, consisting of calcium silicate, reinforcing filler and natural
organic fiber.
3. Panel Size: 24" x 48"
4. PCF Density: 65 PCF.
5. Flex Strength: 1,400psi.
6. Continuous Service Temperature: 2,000° F.
7. K-factor: 1.92 at a mean temperature of 800° F.
8. Waterproofing: Two-part process on all sides
9. Location: Refer to Schedule paragraph 3.02 of this section, and as indicated on
drawings.
B. Proprietary Thermal Wall Liner Panels: Comply with the following:
1. Basis of Design Product: WHP "Duraliner HT"
2. Core: 1 inch thick, consisting of calcium silicate, reinforcing filler and natural
organic fiber.
3. Panel Size: 24" x 48"
4. PCF Density: 98 PCF.
5. Flex Strength: 3,000 psi.
6. Continuous Service Temperature: 2,000° F.
7. K-factor: 2.35 at a mean temperature of 800° F.
8. Waterproofing: Two-part process on all sides
9. Location: Refer to Schedule paragraph 3.02 of this section, and as indicated on
drawings.
C. Proprietary Thermal Batten Panels: Comply with the following:
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility High Temperature Lining Systems
Specifications 13020-2
1. Basis of Design Product: WHP "Padgenite I"
2. Core: 1 inch thick, consisting of calcium silicate, reinforcing filler and natural
organic fiber.
3. Batten Size: 3-3/4" x 48"
4. PCF Density: 46 PCF.
5. Flex Strength: 800 psi.
6. Continuous Service Temperature: 1,200° F.
7. K-factor: 0.81 at a mean temperature of 800° F.
8. Waterproofing: Two-part process on all sides
9. Location: Refer to Schedule paragraph 3.02 of this section, and as indicated on
drawings.
2.04 PROTECTIVE TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Galvanized Metal Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Aluminum, Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel.
2. Shapes as follows:
a. 2" x 2" Full-Height Corner Protection: Use at all outside corners within
burn room areas and adjacent spaces.
b. 18-gauge trim channels at all doors and windows in burn areas.
2.05 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide all auxiliary materials for installation and attachment of thermal panels
in accordance with the published guidelines for "Installation of Padqenite® Panels
and Accessories" provided by WHP Training Towers as the basis for installation.
B. Galvanized Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use #8 x %" HWH T-2 Tek screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening
2.
3.
PART 3 - PRODUCTS
panels to steel members.
Use 2-1/4" "Tapcon" concrete anchors for attachment CMU walls
Use 5/8" S-12 screws for attaching angles.
3.01
3.02
EXAMINATION
A. Conduct meeting at site to examine all areas and substrates to receive the thermal liner,
with Installer and fire training prop supplier present, to verify completeness of work and
coordination of installation process requirements with all disciplines.
Coordinate requirements of adjacent trades and disciplines.
Notify architect of any discrepancies that would affect the proper installation of the
thermal lining material. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
Proceed with installation of thermal lining materials only upon verification that all
discipline trade work adjacent to area has been completed and will not require removal
and re-installation of panels.
SCHEDULE OF THERMAL LINING LOCATIONS
A. Commercial Burn Tower Prop, Building "C":
B.
C.
D.
Room
Warehouse
#109
Bedroom
#207
Hallway #210
Off ice #301
Walls
Partial North Wall
West Wall
Partial South Wall
All walls
All walls: Extend 24"
minimum below
finished ceiling
Partial North Wall
Partial East Wall
Partial South Wall
Ceilings
Entire high ceiling
area
Entire Ceiling
Partial Ceiling
Area: Refer to
Drawings
Partial Ceiling
Area: Refer to
Drawings
Notes
Provide lining on
interior face of
storefront system
Provide lining on
interior face of doors
and windows
Provide lining on
interior face of north
storefront
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
High Temperature Lining Systems
13020-3
B. Residential Burn Prop Building, Building "R":
Room
Kitchen #105
Garage #103
Open
Training #201
Walls
Partial South Wall
West Wall
All walls in garage
space
Partial North Wall
Partial West Wall
Partial South Wall
Ceilings
Partial Ceiling
Area: Refer to
Drawings
Entire Ceiling
Partial Ceiling
Area: Refer to
Drawings
Notes
Provide lining on interior
face of door Coordinate
with Concealed Fire
Cabinet Installation
Provide lining protection
at coiling door enclosure
Provide lining on interior
face of window north
wall.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF HIGH TEMPERATURE WALL LINING
A. Install wall grid system using metal furring and framing system in strict accordance with
the guidelines provided by the product manufacturer.
B. Install high temperature wall battens to framing in accordance with guidelines provided
by the product manufacturer. Direct attachment of panels and battens to the structure is
not permitted.
C. Install high temperature wall panels to battens in accordance with specifications and
guidelines provided by the product manufacturer.
D. Install trims and accessories including protective wall edges and trims.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF HIGH TEMPERATURE CEILING LINING
A. Install ceiling grid system using metal furring and framing system in strict accordance
with the guidelines provided by the product manufacturer.
B. Install high temperature ceiling battens to framing in accordance with guidelines
provided by the product manufacturer. Direct attachment of panels and battens to the
structure is not permitted.
C. Install high temperature ceiling panels to battens in accordance with specifications and
guidelines provided by the product manufacturer.
D. Coordination the installation of the ceiling lining at the first floor of Building "B" ceiling
with the ceiling framing and openings described in the contract drawings.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Upon completion of work, properly dispose of all trash, debris and materials.
B. Clean all high temperature panels free from markings, dirt and smudges. Use only
approved manufacturer cleaning agents on panel surfaces.
C. Protect all panels in place for the duration of construction. Remove prior to testing and
start-up of fire training simulators.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
High Temperature Lining Systems
13020-4
SECTION 13030
ELECTRICAL PANEL FIRE SIMULATOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. General Description: The electrical panel fire simulator shall consist of two primary
enclosures located in close proximity as indicated on Construction Documents and
specified in this section.
B. Work to include, but not limited to the following:
1. Manufacture and install a commercial electrical service fire training prop at the
Commercial Tower Prop Building, Room 114.
2. Provide and install supporting equipment and infrastructure for proper operation
including but not limited to:
a. Primary control enclosure for equipment and smoke generation
b. Secondary control enclosure for service distribution prop simulation
c. Wireless Control device
d. Coordination of installation and infrastructure requirements with discipline
trades.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 13000 - Structural Fire Trainers
2. Division 16000-Electrical
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit properly identified manufacturer's product literature, operations and installation
guidelines.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Electrical Panel Fire Simulator
Specifications 13030-1
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Warrant the system to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of
two (2) years after the final system acceptance date. If for any reason, other than
misuse and abuse, a part supplied should fail, the training simulator supplier shall
supply a replacement part to the Owner. The contractor will provide a toll free
customer service telephone number that can be used by the Owner during normal
business hours to report system problems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The basis of design is the following product model and manufacturer:
1. Electrical Panel Simulator (Non-Fire Effect) as manufactured by:
FireBlast451, Inc.
4131 Tigris Way
Riverside, CA 92503
(951)277-8319
Website: http://www.fireblast.com
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Enclosure 1 shall represent a mockup of a commercial electrical load center that is
approximately 32-inches wide by 74-inches high by 9-inches deep. The commercial
electrical load center shall contain the following built-in components:
1. Speakers: Produce intermittent electrical arcing and burning sounds associated
with a class C fire effect.
2. Multiple Strobe Lamps: Simulate the visual effects of electrical arcing and fire.
3. Ventilation Louvers: Serve as smoke outlet ports.
B. Enclosure 2 shall represent a safety disconnect switch panel that is approximately 38-
inches wide by 48-inches high by 12-inches deep. This panel shall be NEMA 4 rated
and shall contain the following components
1. Power Indicator: Indicates that power (120 VAC, 20 AMPS) has been applied to
the simulator.
2. Two-Position, Safety Disconnect Switch - Works in conjunction with a position
sensor. The disconnect switch shall be used as an active training devise to
secure simulated "POWER" to the commercial load center.
3. Smoke Generator Assembly: Capable of a minimal smoke output of 500 CFM.
4. Sound Generator Control System: Generate various sound effects.
5. Wireless Control System: Used to operate the training simulator.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Electrical Panel Fire Simulator
Specifications 13030-2
2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The simulator shall start and stop using a small wireless transmitter.
1. When started the simulator shall produce, in response to trainee action, the
following visual and audio effects using multi-colored strobe lamps and sound
generator:
2. Simulated electrical arcing when the disconnect switch is closed. Effects shall be
generated using random, intermittent activation of appropriately colored and
paired strobe lamps in synchronization with sound generator.
3. Simulated flame state when the disconnect switch is opened. Effects shall be
generated using random, intermittent activation of appropriately colored and
paired strobe lamps in synchronization with sound generator.
4. Simulated audible alarm effect when agent is applied with the disconnect switch
closed.
B. Smoke shall be produced and present when the simulator is started and cease when
the simulator is turned off by the operator.
C. Simulator visual and audio effects shall change automatically in response to trainee
action.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Examine areas and conditions with installer present for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of connections to
building and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only
after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
B. Simulator shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and
guidelines.
3.02 START-UP AND TESTING
A. Upon completion of installation, simulator contractor shall test system and operation.
3.03 TRAINING
A. Simulator contractor shall provide a training of system operation.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Electrical Panel Fire Simulator
Specifications 13030-3
SECTION 13050
SMOKE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 General
A. The work described within this section shall include the provision and installation of a
DMX controlled smoke generation system in structures shown. The system contractor
shall review the scope of services described herein and within the contract drawings for
required reference, coordination efforts and infrastructure to be provided. It is
recommended that the affected subcontractors conduct a pre-construction meeting
with to discuss, review and address the installation requirements for the smoke
distribution systems described prior to beginning construction.
B. The "smoke generation system" is comprised of multiple smoke generator units
installed throughout the building. Each unit requires a power outlet, and are
interconnected using standard data cables in a 'daisy chain' terminating at the central
DMX controller. The training officer can activate any of the smoke generator units
independently from the central control device as well as monitor the unit's activity.
C. Contractor shall provide and install an independent smoke generation and distribution
system for each of the project buildings
1. Building "S": Shooting Range
2. Building "C": Commercial Burn Prop Building
3. Building "R" Residential Burn Prop Building.
D. The terms "fog" and "smoke" are used interchangeably.
E. The smoke/fog machines shall be installed at various noted locations through the
buildings as shown on the drawings. The units shall be an aerosol generator that
converts a water & glycol solution to an aerosol using heat. Refer to contract drawings
and Schedule of Locations in Paragraphs 3.05 & 3.06 of this section for quantities and
locations of units.
F. The smoke/fog machines shall operate using an independent universal DMX controller
from a central location within each building that will allow remote operation and
monitoring of the individual smoke generators.
1. Building "S": Range Control Room #118
2. Building "C": Control Room #106
3. Building "R" Smoke and Prop Equipment Room #104.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Smoke Distribution System
Specifications 13050-1
1.02 Work Included - Contractor shall provide all Work required for the proper installation
and operation of a smoke generations systems and distribution which includes, but is not
necessarily limited to:
A. Provide multiple fog/smoke generation units with integral DMX controller. Refer to
drawings and Schedule Smoke Generator Units, Paragraphs 3.05 and 3.06 for
quantity and location of units.
B. Provide separate conduits for communication cable between smoke generator and
remote located DMX controller unit. DMX controller units to be centrally located in
each building. Power to be provided by General Contractor.
C. • Provide and install manufacture standard generator support shelf at each smoke
generator location to support smoke generator unit and integral fluid reservoir.
D. Provide and install a wall mounted stainless steel shelf, approximately 24" wide
and 12" deep to support the central DMX controller in each of the noted locations.
E. Provide all connections and hook-ups to equipment in accordance with the
manufacturer's specific instructions and specifications
F. Coordinate and direct requirements of work by other trades including, mounting
racks, power and conduit
G. Upon completion of installation, conduct full start-up and testing in the presence of
the Owner's representative prior to conducting training
H. Provide laminated floor plan depicting smoke generator locations for each building.
1.03 Related Work Described Elsewhere
A. Section 04200 Unit Masonry
B. Section 07900 Joint Sealants and Caulking
C. Division 16 Electrical
1.04 Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer - As specified by Architect or approved equivalent
B. Installer - Work to be performed only by workers who are completely familiar with
the published recommendations of the manufacturer.
1.05 Submittals
A. Product Data - Submit full material specifications, manufacturer's installation,
and maintenance instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Provide complete shop drawings indicating smoke generator locations, conduit
and control wiring routing and control room equipment locations.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Smoke Distribution System
Specifications 13050-2
1.06 Product Handling
A. Protection
1. Materials to be stored at the job site in a safe, dry place with all labels intact
and legible at time of installation.
2. Use all means to protect materials before, during, and after installation. Do
not allow products to become wet or damp.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, including water intrusion, immediately
make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and
at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.07 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
A. Submit a minimum of seven (7) copies of the manufacturer operation and
maintenance manuals as described in Section 01700 of these specifications.
1.08 Additional Materials
A. Contractor shall provide the owner with a minimum of twenty (20) gallons of
specified smoke fluid in factory sealed containers for future use.
1.09 Warranty
A. Warranty for equipment shall be a minimum of two (2) years from the date of
acceptance. Submit copies of manufacturer's warranty for parts and equipment.
B. Contractor shall warrant the smoke distribution system including piping, controls
and reservoirs for a period of not less than two (2) years from the date of
acceptance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Basis of Design: The selected materials listed within this section are based on the
products from the following. Substitutions shall be considered under the provisions of
Section 01030 of these specifications.
1. Machine: VIPER II Professional Fog Machine
2. Distributer:
Theater Effects, Inc.:
11707ChesterdaleRoad
Cincinnati, OH 45246
Telephone (800) 791-7646 FAX (513) 772-3579
Website: www.theatrefx.com.
2.02 Laminated Floor Plan Diagram
A. Each building shall be provided with laminated floor plans of the building (Minimum
size 24" x 36") depicting smoke unit locations and numeral designations which
correlate with the Central DMX controller. Plan to be wall mounted near controls.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Smoke Distribution System
Specifications 13050-3
2.03 Smoke/Fog Generator
A. Smoke Generator Unit
1. Smoke Generator: Model "Viper II" Professional Fog machine w/
Addressable DMX512 interface control
2. Controls: Wired Remote
3. Protection: Heater Block - Thermostat
Pump - Thermal Switch
4. Alarms: Low Fluid sensor with LED warning light on unit
and on remote DMX control unit.
5. Unit Dimensions: 9.75" H x 9.25" W x 19" L
6. Weight: 19 lib (Empty of Fluid).
7. Interface: 0-10V Analog
B. Power Requirements
1. Unit Voltage: 120v, 60Hz.
2. Power: 1300 watts.
3. All parts shall be UL or ETL listed.
C. Fog Fluid and Use
1. Safe water/glycol based fig fluid
2 Fog Duration: Continuous at 50%, 40 second max burst at 100%.
3. Contractor shall fill all reservoirs full upon completion of testing and start-
up with approved brand "Fog Fluid".
4. Consumption Rate of Unit: 3.5 oz per minute at maximum output
2.04 Analog DMX Controls
A. Contractor shall provide and connect together all smoke units within each building
separately which would allow full operation of the smoke generation units from a single
location shown on the drawings.
1. Central Control for Building "B" shall be within Control Room #107.
2. Central Control for Building "C" shall be within Prop Equipment #102.
3. Each building shall be supplied with wall-mounted master DMX control box.
4. All control wiring to be within rigid conduit provided by system installer.
B. DMX Analog Control:
1. The fog machine shall operate from a remote control that plugs into the machine
using an RJ-45 connector and Category 5 cable.
2. System installer shall provide 1" rigid conduit throughout building for
communication cablings from control rooms to source.
3. The remote control shall have a power button, a 3-pole fog switch, a timer button,
a potentiometer to control fog volume, a potentiometer to control on time, and a
potentiometer to control off time.
4. The remote control shall have a red LED indicating heating, a green LED
indicating ready, and an amber LED indicating low fluid.
5. The controller will allow the smoke generation equipment to be operated from
timers; from DMX control; or from a 0-10 volt signal. The timers will allow
production of fog for up to 2 minutes with intervals of up to 4 minutes between
bursts. The controller has a series of rotary switches to set the DMX channel.
The DMX Controller LEDs indicate when the reservoir is running low on fluid or
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Smoke Distribution System
Specifications 13050-4
when there is a DMX signal. Each building shall have an independent control
panel that will have a DMX Remote Control for smoke generators. Control Panel
will show the location of each smoke generator room location for each floor in the
training building
2.05 Smoke Generator Mount
A. Smoke generation unit shall be supplied with manufacturer universal mounting bracket.
B. Manufacturer shelf to be mounted approximately 18" below floor/roof structure above in
Buildings "C" and "R". Shelf to be mounted behind protective baffle in Building "S".
C. Coordinate location of shelf unit with electrical contractor for provision of duplex power.
2.06 Smoke Generator Mount
A. Each DMX master controller shall be supported on a 12" Deep x 36" Long stainless
steel wall mounted shelf unit. Maximum supporting weight 35 pounds. Zesco Model
#012-0-326 WS-12-36 or equivalent
B. Shelf to be mounted approximately 66" above the finish floor surface, unless noted
otherwise. Refer to plans for locations.
C. Coordinate location of shelf unit with electrical contractor for provision of duplex power
and termination of control conduits.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Site Conditions
A. Contractor shall inspect the site and verify completion work of all other trades
complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
B. In the event of discrepancies notify the Owner's representative immediately. Do not
proceed until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.
C. Verify all requirements are complete and power is available for testing and start-up.
3.02 Installation
A. Install support shelf and mount smoke generator units and fluid reservoirs in strict
accordance with manufacturer guidelines and recommendations.
B. Install conduits and communication cabling between units and DMX controls. Make
appropriate connections to equipment. All penetrations through walls shall be fully
sealed with caulking and covered with stainless steel escutcheon plates
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Smoke Distribution System
Specifications 13050-5
C. Ensure all connections are made and system is properly grounded before connecting
to power.
D. Start each unit separately and verify proper operation.
E. Mount DMX control units as described within the electrical drawings and make all
appropriate cable and power connections.
3.03 Cleaning and Protection
A. Clean all areas of installation free from debris and trash. Dispose of waste in
appropriate receptacles.
B. Wipe and clean all equipment follow manufacturer's guidelines for proper materials and
cleaning agents to be used so as not to damage or mar surfaces.
C. Protect all units and system in place.
3.04 Testing, Training and Start-Up
A. Fully test all units in place for proper operation and dispersion of smoke.
B. Test remote operation and monitoring of units through DMX controls
C. Provide two (2) separate training sessions of four (4) hours each for the City of
Carlsbad Police and Fire personnel. Schedule training with owner's representative at
least ten (10) days prior.
D. Upon completion of testing and training, fill all smoke reservoirs full of smoke fluid.
E. Store additional fluid provided in location designated by owner.
3.05 Schedule of Smoke Generators and Control Location: Shooting Range Bldg. "S"
Bldg
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Room Name
25-Yard Range
25-Yard Range
25-Yard Range
100- Yard Range
100-Yard Range
100-Yard Range
100- Yard Range
Room
Number
130
130
130
131
131
131
131
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remote Control
Room Location
118
118
118
118
118
118
118
Comments
Mount behind baffle at 3-Yard
Firing Line
Mount behind baffle at 10-Yard
Firing Line
Mount behind baffle at 25-Yard
Firing Line
Mount behind baffle at 3-Yard
Firing Line
Mount behind baffle at 20-Yard
Firing Line
Mount behind baffle at 50-Yard
Firing Line
Mount behind baffle at 100-Yard
Firing Line
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Smoke Distribution System
13050-6
3.06 Schedule of Smoke Generators and Control Locations: Buildings "C" & "R".
Bldg
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
R
R
R
R
R
$1* -*!&•
Room Name
Lobby/Entry
Bedroom
Retail
Retail
Open Training
Hallway
Office
Bedroom
Open Training
Stairway
Stairway
Office
Garage
Living Room
1SI Floor Attic
Open Training
2na Floor Attic
-<V|-*e y,^;^..
Room
Number
101
107
112
111
115
116
201
204
205
106
104
401
"n&t&f.
103
107
—
201
—
r tl^r-*
Quantity
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1mi ',•11111*fo%.*i=.
Central Control
Location Room
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
ACi^fa?-?*; f
104
104
104
104
104
"£j&f$*;ier ~ " '
Comments
Mount 1 unit in Attic Space
Mount 1 unit in Attic Space
Mount unit in Attic Space
Mount Unit at 3ra Floor Level
Mount units at 2na @ 4in Floor Levels
•*"»*f4f
Mount Unit in Roof Attic Space
Mount Unit in Roof Attic Space
v> - irfJ-y ' :<* .-„*-• C'"Tt^e» ~. •« -"^ «*£•»*» s«s,5 ^"SJ«*.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Smoke Distribution System
13050-7
SECTION 13070
EXTERIOR GAS METER TRAINING PROP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section
1.02 SUMMARY
A. General Description: The gas meter leak trainer shall provide training in the safe
approach, of a live flange fire residential gas meter and leaking commercial gas meter.
B. Work to include the following:
1. Manufacture and install a residential gas meter training prop at Residential Prop
Building south wall where shown.
2. Manufacture and install a commercial gas meter training prop at Commercial
Tower Prop Building west wall where shown.
3. Provide and install supporting equipment and infrastructure for proper operation
including but not limited to:
a. Air compressor for pressurizing system
b. Wireless Control device
c. Conduit and wire for air and power: Extend service at exterior of building
from Control Room #104 and Control Room #106 to point of connection at
exterior building wall to be verified by prop installer.
d. Coordination of installation and infrastructure requirements with discipline
trades.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 13000 - Structural Fire Trainers
2. Division 16000 - Electrical
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Warrant the system to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of
two (2) years after the final system acceptance date. If for any reason, other than
misuse and abuse, a part supplied should fail, the training simulator supplier shall
supply a replacement part to the Owner. The contractor will provide a toll free
customer service telephone number that can be used by the Owner during normal
business hours to report system problems.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Exterior Gas Meter Prop
Specifications 13070-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The basis of design is the following product model and manufacturer:
Gas Meter Leak Simulators as manufactured by:
1. FireBlast451,lnc.
4131 Tigris Way
Riverside, CA 92503
(951)277-8319
Website: http://www.fireblast.com
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Air Compressor: Small 1107208v, or compressed air tanks, with remote activation
capability.
B. Gas Meter mockup complete with simulated pipe fittings.
2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The mockup shall consist of a gas piping assembly with an integrated commercial gas
meter. The structure shall be designed to position the gas meter prop approximately 5
feet above the surface of the training area. The gas piping, near the body of the gas
meter, shall be charged with air to create the simulated gas leak effect. The piping
near the gas meter shall continue to leak until the operator commands the gas leak to
cease in response to correct trainee techniques.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Examine areas and conditions with installer present for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of connections to
building and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only
after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
B. Simulator shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and
guidelines.
3.02 START-UP AND TESTING
A. Upon completion of installation, simulator contractor shall test system and operation.
3.03 TRAINING
A. Simulator contractor shall provide training of system operation and maintenance.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Exterior Gas Meter Prop
Specifications 13070-2
SECTION 13075
BULLET RESISTANT FIBERGLASS ARMOR
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Bullet Resistant Fiberglass Armor.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Submit for approval prior to fabrication samples, brochures, specifications, UL LISTING
Verification and UL752 Current Test Results as provided by Underwriters Laboratories, and
printed data in sufficient detail to indicate compliance with the contract documents. ASTM
E119-98 One-Hour Fire Rating of Building Construction and Materials. Manufacturer's
Instructions for installation of Bullet Resistant Fiberglass Panel Armor.
C. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inches in size illustrating finish and edging.
1.03 REFERENCE
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification.
1. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY UL. 752 10th Edition,
Standard for Bullet Resisting Equipment dated March 10, 2000.
2. ASTM E119-98 Standard Test for One-Hour Fire-Rating of Building Construction and
Materials.
1.04 DESIGN
A. Through the design, manufacturing technique and material application the Bullet Resistant
Fiberglass shall be of the "non ricochet type;". This design is intended to permit the encapture and
retention of an attacking projectile lessening the potential of a random injury or lateral penetration.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver the materials to the project with the manufacturer's UL LISTED Labels intact and legible.
B. Handle the material with care to prevent damage.
C. Store the materials inside under cover, stack flat and off the floor.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. All materials and workmanship shall be warranted against defects for a period of two (2) years
from the date of receipt at the project site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. ArmorCore by Waco Composites I. Ltd., Waco, Texas. Toll Free 866-688-3088,
Fax#(254)776-1424, email: Web Site:
B. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. BULLET RESISTANT FIBERGLASS MATEERIAL - The panels shall be made of multiple layers of
woven roving ballistic grade fiberglass cloth impregnated with a thermoset polyester resin and
compressed into flat rigid sheets.
B. The production technique and materials used shall provide the controlled internal delamination to
permit the encapture of a penetrating projectile.
C. Bullet Resistant Fiberglass panels: 1-3/8" maximum thickness, and 14.0 pounds per square foot
maximum weight.
2.03 SECURITY LEVEL
A. A. The Bullet Resistant Fiberglass Armor will be rated and tested for UL752 Level 4.
PARTS EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that bullet resistant fiberglass material are ready to receive work.
1. Prior to installing the bullet resistive material the contractor shall verify that all appropriate
anchorage, blocking and supports have been installed as required by the shop drawings.
3.02 JOINTS PREPARATION
A. All joints shall be reinforced by a back-up layer of bullet resistive material.
B. The bullet resistance of the joint, as reinforced, shall be at least equal to that of the panel.
C. Minimum width of reinforcing layer at joint shall be 4-inches(2" on each panel or a 2" minimum
overlap).
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility BULLET RESISTANT FIBERGLASS ARMOR
Specifications 13075-1
D. APPLICATION
1. Armor shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations.
2. Armor panels shall be adhered using an industrial adhesive, mastic, screws or bolts.
3. Method of application shall maintain the bullet resistive rating at junctures with the concrete
floor slab, the concrete roof slab, the bullet resistive door frames, the bullet resistive window
frames, and all required penetrations.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility BULLET RESISTANT FIBERGLASS ARMOR
Specifications 13075-2
SECTION 13080
STRUCTURAL LIVE FIRE CAR TRAINER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This specification defines the functional and performance characteristics of a propane
and natural gas fueled, portable live fire car training unit. Manufacturers of described
prop who wish to provide a portable car trainer must meet the performance
requirements defined in this specification.
B. Car fire training prop shall be designed to operate within the Residential Burn Prop
Garage Room 103 using natural gas fuel source or in open space using portable
propane fuel source.
1. Work shall include all necessary gas and temperature sensors required by NFPA within
interior garage space.
2. Work to include support equipment for interior operation and activation.
3. Work to include support equipment for exterior operation and activation.
C. Scope Of Work:
1. Manufacture and ship the portable live fire trainer defined in this document.
2. Provide all required sensors, equipment and infrastructure within Garage 103.
3. Provide "On-Board" propane supply tank(s) for exterior operation.
4. Provide the required propane fuel supply hoses with adapters. Minimum length =
75ft.
5. Provide a heavy-duty power and communication cables to prop. Minimum length
= 75 ft.
6. Provide a weather resistant portable cart with cover which houses the power,
cables, controls, propane tanks, and fuel supply hoses.
7. Provide a two (2) year warranty on parts and defects in workmanship.
8. Emergency Stop control devices for both interior and exterior applications.
9. Provide a Live Fire Car Prop mockup.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete shop and coordination drawings required for installation and coordination of
work within Garage 103.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire training systems, equipment and vendor
supplied computer software include in operation and maintenance manuals.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Live Fire Car Trainer
Specifications 13080-1
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Live Fire System vendor must be a qualified company that possesses the following
requirements. Failure to comply with requirements may be cause for rejection.
1. Company Experience for live fire training systems:
a. Demonstrated experience in coordination, design, installation and training
of computerized environment training systems using propane gas fuel for
both interior and exterior applications.
b. Provide a list of at least five completed fire trainer systems of equal or
greater complexity, using propane gas fuel source. Live Fire System
Vender shall provide reference information form for each reference. Refer
paragraph 3.03. References information to include the award date, the
completion date, the contract value, and the name and telephone number
of a person employed by the Owner who has personal knowledge of the
training system supplier's contractual and technical performance.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide a minimum two (2) year warranty on parts and defects in workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers for the provision and installation of the portable live fire car
trainer are listed below, he Basis-of-Design is the following product model and
manufacturer:
1. Structural Fire Trainer Model "Hawk" as manufacturer by
FireBlast451, Inc.
4131 Tigris Way
Riverside, CA 92503
(951)277-8319
Website: http://www.fireblast.com
2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. The portable fire trainer shall be designed to provide hot, challenging multi-stage fires
to train both new recruits and seasoned firefighters. The fire trainer shall be completely
portable, capable of being setup and operated by one person. The fire trainer shall
consist of a flame-pilot system, designed to ignite one, or more, water-bath fire-pans,
by a tethered control pendant. The flame-pilot enclosure and the fire pan shall be
constructed of stainless steel and be designed to receive a car mockup structure, that
shall simulate various type of class of A and B fire situations.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Live Fire Car Trainer
Specifications 13080-2
2.03 PORTABLE FIRE TRAINER SYSTEM
A. The portable fire trainer shall provide training in the safe approach, cooling, and
extinguishment of simulated class A, B, or C type fire situations. The portable fire
trainer shall consist of the following main components described in this section:
1. Flame Pilot Module:
a. The flame pilot module shall be designed to be mobile with removable
wheels for ease of transport. The module housing shall be constructed of
stainless steel and water-cooled. The flame pilot module shall be designed
to house:
1) Flame-pilot electronic-ignition system
2) Burner control system consisting of:
3) Vapor gas train with inlet and outlet connection points for standard,
hand-tight acme fittings
4) Liquid gas train with inlet and outlet connection points for standard,
hand-tight acme fittings
b. The flame pilot shall not be extinguished by agent application. The flame
pilot shall be instructor controlled.
2. Fire Pans:
a. The fire pan shall be designed to be an integral part of multiple prop
structures. The fire pan shall be designed to be mobile with removable
wheels for ease of transport. The pan shall have minimal dimensions of 4
ft by 6ft (1.2m by 1.8m) and shall be constructed of stainless steel. The
pan shall contain standard inlet (hand-tight type), acme fittings. The pan
shall be provided with both propane vapor and liquid burners, each
constructed of stainless steel. The burners shall be designed to produce
flames consistent with the represented fire. The pan shall be filled with
water during training and easily drained during shutdown and disassembly.
3. Wired Control Pendant:
a. The control pendant shall be tethered and designed to be removable. The
training fires shall be controlled through the instructors control pendant.
The control pendant shall provide for full control of the flame pilot, the two-
stage fire, and dead-man capability. The "deadman" safety feature, when
enabled shall immediately turn off the fire.
4. Car Prop Structure:
a. Minimal Dimensions = 16ft L x 5ft W x 5ft H
b. The car mock-up shall be designed replicate a mid-size vehicle and include
the following features:
1) Operating hood with engine mock-up.
2) Operating passenger and driver doors.
3) Operating trunk.
4) Operating Driver and passenger seat mock-ups.
5) Steering wheel mock-up.
c. The car shall be designed to be mobile and be rolled over the fire pan as
required to create any of the following fire scenarios:
1) Engine fire.
2) Passenger area fire.
3) Wheel fire.
4) Fuel spill fire.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Live Fire Car Trainer
Specifications 13080-3
2.04 TRAINER OPERATION
A. Using the touch screen control pendant, the operator shall turn ON the "Constant
Flame Pilot".
B. After visually verifying that a constant flame pilot is present, the operator shall press
and hold the vapor and/or liquid flame buttons to create a single or dual stage flame
effect.
C. The vapor fire button and the liquid flame button must remain depressed throughout
the training exercise. Release of the button at any time shall cause the vapor and /or
fire(s) to extinguish.
D. Fire extinguishment shall be controlled by turning off each burner as the trainees apply
proper extinguishment techniques.
E. Once the training area is extinguished, the pilot shall be turned off.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Supplier shall extend propane gas supply from noted points of connection to terminus
points as required for operation of the fire training equipment.
B. Supplier shall extend electrical service from noted points of connection to terminus
points as required for operation of the fire training equipment. Conduit between
electrical panel and system PLC unit shall be provided by electrical contractor. All other
power and conduit shall be provided by fire training system installer, unless noted
otherwise.
C. Supplier shall provide five copies of an Operator and Maintenance Manual to the
Owner. The manual shall fully describe the delivered system and shall include
sections on system operation, troubleshooting and maintenance, associated diagrams
and drawings, and replaceable spare parts listing.
3.02 FINAL CLEANING AND CLOSE-OUT
A. Provide five (5) copies of an Operator and Maintenance Manual to the Owner. The
manual shall fully describe the delivered system and shall include sections on system
operation, troubleshooting and maintenance, associated diagrams and drawings, and
replaceable spare parts listing.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility . Structural Live Fire Car Trainer
Specifications 13080-4
3.03 REFERENCES
Customer References
The supplier must utilize this form to supply customer references for each unit. This
document should be copied for each reference offered. A minimum of five (5) units must
be supplied.
Department name:
Address:
Contact name:Contact phone #:
Model name/number:
Type of equipment:
Delivery date:
Number of props:
List all props installed including options:
Prop #1
Prop #6
Prop #2
Prop #7
Prop #3
Prop #8
Prop #4
Prop #9
Prop #5
Prop #10
NRTL certifying agency: Yes
No
Contact Name:Contact Number:
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility
Specifications
Structural Live Fire Car Trainer
13080-5
SECTION 14201
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Complete elevator systems.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1. Section 03300 - Cast-ln-Place Concrete: elevator motor and pump foundation, and
grouting thresholds.
2. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: divider beams, support for entrances and rails,
hoisting beam at top of hoistway.
3. Section 15500 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: ventilation and
temperature control of elevator equipment room.
4. Section 16100 - Electrical: electrical service to main disconnect in elevator machine
room; electrical power for elevator installation and testing; electrical-disconnecting
device to elevator equipment prior to activation of sprinkler system; electrical
service for machine room; machine room and pit receptacles with ground-fault
current protection; lighting in machine room and pit; wiring for telephone service to
machine room.
5. Section 16610 - Standby Power Supply Systems: emergency generator for elevator
operation.
6. Section 16720 - Fire Alarm Systems: fire and smoke detectors and interconnecting
devices; fire alarm signal lines to contacts in the machine room.
7. Section 16740 - Telephone Systems: ADAAG-required emergency communications
equipment.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with applicable building codes and elevator codes at the project site, including but not
limited to the following:
1. ANSI A117.1, Buildings and Facilities, Providing Accessibility and Usability for
Physically Handicapped People.
2. ADAAG, Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines.
3. ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection
Association; 2007.ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.ANSI/UL 10B, Fire Tests of
Door Assemblies.
5. CAN/CSA C22.1, Canadian Electrical Code.
6. CAN/CSA-B44, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
7. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; American Institute of Steel
Construction, Inc.; 2005.
8. Model Building Codes.
9. All other local applicable codes.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit approval layout drawings. Include the following:
1. Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway.
2. Maximum rail bracket spacing.
3. Maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to building structure.
4. Loads on hoisting beams.
5. Clearances and travel of car.
6. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions.
7. Location and sizes of access doors, hoistway entrances and frames.
C. Product Data: Provide data on the following items:
Submit manufacturer's product data for each system proposed for use. Include the following:
1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels and indicators.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PASSENGER ELEVATORS
Specifications , 14201-1
2. Cab design, dimensions and layout.
3. Hoistway-door and frame details.
4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
5. Expected heat dissipation of elevator equipment in machine room (BTU).
D. Maintenance Data - Provide manufacturer's standard operations and maintenance manual:
1. Parts catalog with complete list of equipment replacement parts; identify each entry with
equipment description and identifying code.
2. Technical information for servicing operating equipment.
3. Legible schematic of hydraulic piping and wiring diagrams of installed electrical equipment
and changes made in the Work. List symbols corresponding to identity or markings on
machine room and hoistway apparatus.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable code and as supplemented in this section.
B. Designer Qualifications: Design guide rails, brackets, anchors, and machine anchors under
direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this type
and licensed in California.
C. Manufacturer: Provide elevators manufactured by a firm with a minimum of 10 years experience
in fabrication of elevators equivalent to those specified. Elevator manufacturer shall be ISO9002
certified.
1. Installer: Elevators shall be installed by the manufacturer.
2. Regulatory Requirements: Elevator system design and installation shall comply with the
latest versions of ASME A17.1.
3. Elevator shall be designed in response to Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility
Guidelines (ADAAG).
D. Permits and Inspections: Provide licenses and permits and perform required inspections and
tests.
E. Perform structural steel design, fabrication, and installation in accordance with AISC 360,
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. Perform seismic design in accordance with
applicable code.
F. Fabricate and install door and frame assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Should the building or the site not be prepared to receive the elevator equipment at the agreed
upon date, the General Contractor will be responsible to provide a proper and suitable storage area
on or off the premises.
B. Should the storage area be off-site and the equipment not yet delivered, then the elevator
contractor, upon notification from the General Contractor, will divert the elevator equipment to the
storage area. If the equipment has already been delivered to the site, then the General Contractor
shall transport the elevator equipment to the storage area. The cost of elevator equipment taken to
storage by either party, storage, and redeliver to the job site shall not be at the expense of the
elevator contractor.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. The elevator contractor's acceptance is conditional on the understanding that their
warranty covers defective material and workmanship. The guarantee period shall not
extend longer than one (1) year from the date of completion or acceptance thereof by
beneficial use, whichever is earlier, of each elevator. The guarantee excludes ordinary
wear and tear or improper use, vandalism, abuse, misuse, or neglect or any other causes
beyond the control of the elevator contractor and this express warranty is in lieu of all other
warranties, express or implied, including any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a
particular purpose.
1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PASSENGER ELEVATORS
Specifications 14201 - 2
A. Maintenance service consisting of regular examinations, adjustments and lubrication of the
elevator equipment shall be provided by the elevator contractor for a period of twelve (12)
months after the elevator has been turned over for the customer's use. This service shall
not be subcontracted but shall be performed by the elevator contractor. All work shall be
performed by competent employees during regular working hours of regular working days
and shall include emergency 24-hour callback service. This service shall not cover
adjustments, repairs or replacement of parts due to negligence, misuse, abuse or
accidents caused by persons other than the elevator contractor. Only genuine parts and
supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of the original equipment shall be
provided.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Otis Elevator Co; Product Holess Hydraulic: www.otis.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600-Product Requirements.
B. All components to be manufactured by same entity, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 ELEVATORS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: Elevator No.: 1
A. Performance Requirements for Elevators:
1. Type: Twin direct acting hydraulic cylinder in hoistway without well holes.
2. Minimum Car Inside:
i. Minimum 6' 8" wide x 5' 5" deep (2032 mm x 1651 mm) to accommodate a 24" x
84" gurney.
ii. Inside Cab Height: 9' 7"(2921 mm)
iii. Door Height: 8' 0" Clear Opening
3. Operation and Controls: Two-stop automatic
4. Hoistway Doors and Frames: Stainless steel.
5. Door Type: Single - Slide Door - right
i. Door Opening Time: 3.5 seconds
6. Door Operation: Single Slide 42" door
7. Rated Net Capacity: 3,500 Ibs (1,588 kg).
8. Rated Speed: 125ft/min
9. Travel Distance: As indicated on drawings.
10. Number of Stops: (2) Two.
11. Hydraulic Motor and Pump Location: Approximately 15 feet (4.572 m) distant from the
hoistway.
12. Stopping Accuracy: ±1/4" (6.4 mm) under any loading condition or direction of travel.
13. Lighting Power Supply: 120 Volts, 1 Phase, 15 Amp, 60 Hz.
B. Door Control Features:
1. Closed Loop Door Operator is a closed loop, microprocessor based door operator
system. The door operator will facilitate smooth operation under varying environmental
influences such as, temperature, wind, friction, and component variation. The
processor will monitor the door's actual position and velocity compared to its desired
position and velocity. If variations are detected in the profile the command will be
automatically corrected. The Closed Loop Door Operator control system shall not
require machine room door control equipment.
2. Door noise not to exceed 58dBA.
3. Door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at a landing in response to a
normal hall or car call.
4. Elevator doors shall be provided with a reopening device that will stop and reopen the
car door(s) and hoistway door(s) automatically should the door(s) become obstructed
by an object or person.
5. Primary door protection shall consist of a two dimensional, multi-beam array projecting
across the car door opening. Under normal operation and for any door position, the
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PASSENGER ELEVATORS
Specifications 14201-3
system shall detect as a blockage an opaque object that is equal to or greater than 1.3
inches (33 mm) in diameter when inserted between the car doors at vertical positions
from within 1 inch (25 mm) above the sill to 71 inches (1800 mm) above the sill. Under
degraded conditions (one or more blocked or failed beams), the primary protection
shall detect opaque objects that are equal to or greater than 4" (100 mm) in diameter
for the same vertical coverage. If the system performance is degraded to the point
that the 4" object cannot be detected, the system shall maintain the doors open or
permit closing only under nudging force conditions.
6. The door reopening device shall also include a secondary, three dimensional,
triangular infrared multi-beam array projecting across the door opening and extending
into the hoistway door zone. The door opening device will cause the doors to reopen
when it detects a person(s) or object(s) entering or exiting the car in the area between
the hoistway doors or the entryway area adjacent to the hoistway doors.
7. The size of the secondary protection zone shall vary as the door positions vary during
opening and closing. The width of the zone shall be approximately one-third the size
of the separation between the doors (or door and strike plate for single-slide doors) and
shall be approximately centered in the door separation. In order to minimize detection
of hallway passers-by who are not entering the elevator, the maximum zone
penetration into the entryway shall not exceed 20" for any door separation. Normal
penetration depth into the entryway from the car doors shall be ~14" for a door
separation of 42". The penetration shall reduce proportionally as the doors close. At
door separations of 18" or less the secondary protection system may cease its normal
operation since the depth of the zone recedes to where it is inside the hoistway doors.
8. The vertical coverage of the secondary protection shall be ~19" (480 mm) above the
sill to -55" (1400 mm)above the sill (mid-thigh to shoulder of a typical adult).
9. The secondary protection shall have an anti-nuisance feature which will ignore
detection in the secondary zone after continual detection occurs for a significant time
period in the secondary zone without corresponding detection in the primary protection
zone; i.e. a person/object is in the entryway but does not enter. Normal secondary
protection shall be re-enabled whenever a detection occurs in the primary zone.
10. The reaction time of the door detector sub-system shall not exceed 60 milliseconds
when both primary and secondary protection capabilities are active; nor 40
milliseconds when the secondary protection is disabled.
11. Door nudging operation to occur if doors are prevented from closing for an adjustable
period of time.
12. Provide equipment according to Seismic zone.
C. Elevator Cabs: Finishes from manufacturers complete line of finishes.
1. Entrance frames and Doors Finish:
a. Satin Stainless Steel
2. Cab Wall Finish:
a. Horizontal Panels
i. Wilson Art (Decorative Metal Satin Brushed Black Aluminum 6296)
ii. Stainless Steel Wainscoting on bottom panel
3. Cab Ceiling:
a. Model DC 125, Low-Voltage Downlight
i. Incandescent Lighting
ii. Satin Stainless Steel Laminate
4. Handrails and Bumper Rail:
a. Flat Bar (DH50)
b. Satin Stainless Steel Finish
5. Cab Fixtures:
a. Classic Car & Hall Fixtures
6. Toe Kick:
a. 6" Satin Stainless Steel Finish
7. Flooring:
a. Shaw Carpet Group
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PASSENGER ELEVATORS
Specifications 14201 - 4
b. See Section 09680 - Carpet Tile
2.03 CONTROLS
A. Elevator Controls: Provide landing buttons and hall lanterns at each floor.
B. Door Controls:
1. Program door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at floor.
2. Render "Door Close" button inoperative when car is standing at dispatching terminal with
doors open.
3. If doors are prevented from closing for approximately ten seconds because of an obstruction,
automatically disconnect door reopening devices, close doors more slowly until obstruction
is cleared. Sound buzzer.
4. Door Safety Devices: Moveable, retractable safety edges, quiet in operation; equip with
photo-electric light rays.
C. Landing Buttons: Stainless steel type, one for originating UP and one for originating DOWN
calls, one button only at terminating landings; marked with arrows.
D. Provide "Firefighter's Operation" in accordance with applicable code. Designated Landing: first
floor.
2.04 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Electrical Characteristics:
1. 208 volts, three phase, 60 Hz.
2.05 MACHINE ROOM FITTINGS
A. Wall-Mounted Frames: Glazed with clear plastic; sized as required. Provide one for master
electric and hydraulic schematic and one for lubrication chart. Install charts.
PARTS EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that hoistway, pit, and machine room are ready for work of this section.
C. Verify hoistway shaft and openings are of correct size and within tolerance.
D. Verify location and size of machine foundation and position of machine foundation bolts.
E. Verify that electrical power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Arrange for temporary electrical power for installation work and testing of elevator components.
B. Excavate for holeless casing and hydraulic lines between plunger and remote machine room in
accordance with Section 02315.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install system components. Connect equipment to building utilities.
B. Provide conduit, boxes, wiring, and accessories.
C. Mount machines on vibration and acoustic isolators, on bed plate and concrete pad. Place on
structural supports and bearing plates. Securely fasten to building supports. Prevent lateral
displacement.
D. Accommodate equipment in space indicated.
E. Install guide rails using threaded bolts with metal shims and lock washers under nuts.
Compensate for expansion and contraction movement of guide rails.
F. Accurately machine and align guide rails. Form smooth joints with machined splice plates.
G. Coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction.
H. Install hoistway door sills, frames, and headers in hoistway walls. Grout sills in place. Set
entrances in vertical alignment with car openings and aligned with plumb hoistway lines.
I. Structural Metal Surfaces: Clean surfaces of rust, oil or grease; wipe clean with solvent; prime
two coats.
J. Machine Room Components: Clean and degrease; prime one coat, finish with one coat of
enamel.
K. Adjust equipment for smooth and quiet operation.
3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Guide Rail Alignment: Plumb and parallel to each other in accordance with ASME A17.1.
B. Cab Movement on Aligned Guide Rails: Smooth movement, with no objectionable lateral or
oscillating movement or vibration.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PASSENGER ELEVATORS
Specifications 14201 - 5
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and inspection by regulatory agencies will be performed at their discretion.
1. Schedule tests with agencies and notify Owner and Architect.
2. Obtain permits required to perform tests.
3. Document regulatory agency tests and inspections in accordance with the requirements of
Section 01400.
4. Perform tests required by regulatory agencies.
5. Furnish test and approval certificates issued by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Perform testing and inspection in accordance with requirements of Section 01400.
1. Perform tests as required by ASME A17.2.
2. Provide two weeks written notice of date and time of tests.
3. Supply instruments and execute specific tests.
C. Perform operational tests in the presence of Owner and Architect.
D. Operational Tests:
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car so not to cause passenger discomfort.
B. Adjust automatic floor leveling feature at each floor to achieve 1/4 inch (6 mm) from flush.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces.
B. Clean surfaces and components ready for inspection.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit construction traffic within cab after cleaning.
B. Protect installed products until project completion.
C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
3.09 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 01700 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to
maintenance service.
B. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
C. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under the supervision and in
the direct employ of the elevator manufacturer or original installer.
D. Provide service and maintenance of elevator system and components for two year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
E. Examine system components monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment.
F. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of elevator equipment. Maintain
hydraulic fluid levels. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the
manufacturer of the original equipment. Replace wire ropes when necessary to maintain the
required factor of safety.
G. Perform work without removing cars during peak traffic periods.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PASSENGER ELEVATORS
Specifications 14201-6
SECTION 14205
ELEVATOR DOORS AT TRAINING BUILDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Elevator door systems.
B. Summary: This section identifies the use of non-powered elevator doors located in the
Commercial Burn Prop building at the first and second floors.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 14201 - Passenger Elevators
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; American Institute of Steel Construction,
Inc.; 2005.
B. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2007.
C. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 2007.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings.
C. Product Data.
D. Maintenance Contract.
E. Maintenance Data: Include:
1. Parts catalog with complete list of equipment replacement parts; identify each entry with
equipment description and identifying code.
2. Technical information for servicing operating equipment.
3. Legible schematic of hydraulic piping and wiring diagrams of installed electrical equipment
and changes made in the Work. List symbols corresponding to identity or markings on
machine room and hoistway apparatus.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable code and as supplemented in this section.
B. Designer Qualifications: Design guide rails, brackets, anchors, and machine anchors under
direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this type
and licensed in California.
C. Perform structural steel design, fabrication, and installation in accordance with AISC 360,
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. Perform seismic design in accordance with
applicable code.
D. Fabricate and install door and frame assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide two year minimum manufacturer warranty for elevator operating equipment and devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Otis Elevator Co; www.otis.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. All components to be manufactured by same entity, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 ELEVATORS
A. Elevator Door No. 1: Located on first floor and indicated as door #53 on the drawings.
1. Elevator Doors and Frames: Painted Finish; ICl Paints - #OONN 13/000 "Obsidian Glass"
2. Door Type: Double leaf.
3. Door Operation: Center opening.
4. Door Size: 3'-6" door for 4'-0" opening
B. Elevator Door No.2: Located on first floor and indicated as door #54 on the drawings.
1. Elevator Doors and Frames: Painted Finish; ICl Paints - #OONN 13/000 "Obsidian Glass"
2. Door Type: Double leaf.
3. Door Operation: Center opening.
4. Door Size: 3'-6" door for 4'-0" opening
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PASSENGER ELEVATORS
Specifications 14205 -1
PARTS EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that hoistway, pit, and machine room are ready for work of this section.
C. Verify hoistway shaft and openings are of correct size and within tolerance.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install system components.
B. Accommodate equipment in space indicated.
C. Install hoistway door sills, frames, and headers in hoistway walls. Grout sills in place. Set
entrances in vertical alignment with car openings and aligned with plumb hoistway lines.
D. Structural Metal Surfaces: Clean surfaces of rust, oil or grease; wipe clean with solvent; prime
two coats.
E. Adjust equipment for smooth and quiet operation.
3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Guide Rail Alignment: Plumb and parallel to each other in accordance with ASME A17.1.
B. Cab Movement on Aligned Guide Rails: Smooth movement, with no objectionable lateral or
oscillating movement or vibration.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and inspection by regulatory agencies will be performed at their discretion.
1. Schedule tests with agencies and notify Owner and Architect.
2. Obtain permits required to perform tests.
3. Document regulatory agency tests and inspections in accordance with the requirements of
Section 01400.
4. Perform tests required by regulatory agencies.
5. Furnish test and approval certificates issued by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Perform testing and inspection in accordance with requirements of Section 01400.
1. Perform tests as required by ASME A17.2.
2. Provide two weeks written notice of date and time of tests.
3. Supply instruments and execute specific tests.
C. Perform operational tests in the presence of Owner and Architect.
D. Operational Tests.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth operation of non-powered doors.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces.
B. Clean surfaces and components ready for inspection.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until project completion.
B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
3.08 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 01700 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to
maintenance service.
B. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
C. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under the supervision and in
the direct employ of the elevator manufacturer or original installer.
D. Provide service and maintenance of elevator system and components for two year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
E. Examine system components monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment.
F. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of elevator equipment. Maintain
hydraulic fluid levels. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the
manufacturer of the original equipment. Replace wire ropes when necessary to maintain the
required factor of safety.
G. Perform work without removing cars during peak traffic periods.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PASSENGER ELEVATORS
Specifications 14205 - 2
SECTION 14600
WALL MOUNTED JIB CRANE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Heavy duty wall mounted jib crane
B. Heavy duty motor driven hoist
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04200 - Concrete Masonry Units
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction.
B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHPD), General Industry Standards
C. Crane Manufacturers Association of America, Specifications Numbers 70 and 74.
D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers/ American National Standard ANSI B30.
E. National Electric Code ANSI/ NFPA 70.
F. American Welding Society AWS-D14.1 and D1.1.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide product data on items to be installed including design data for mounting.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate mounting details, anchorages and connections.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field fabricated cranes will not be acceptable.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Provide service and maintenance of wall jib crane and hoist for two years from Date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WALL CANTELEVER JIB CRANE
A. Wall Cantelever Jib Crane 200 Degree Rotation Model 300-1/2 Ton - 10 Feet Span by Spanco
Inc., Morgantwon Business Park, 604 Hemlock Road, Margantown, PA, 19543. Phone
610-286-7200, Fax 610-286-0085, www.spanco.com
1. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. 1,000 pound capacity exterior industrial wall mounted cantelever jib crane and electrical cable
hoist.
1. All steel construction as required by manufacturer.
2. Wall mounted with reinforcing rods embedded into CMU wall. Coordinate with contractor.
3. Ensure building columns/walls are adequate ready to support the crane including the hoist,
rated load, and impact factor as outlined in the ANSI B30.11.
4. Do supply the correct size, length, number, and type of bolts required to attach the wall
mounted jib crane brackets to the structure. Recommend bolts are to be ASTM A325 grade.
5. Allow installation for proper clearance as outlined in ANSI B30.11. The following factors
which influence clearances are wheel float, truss sag, and boom deflection.
6. Boom fabricated from 'S1 or W steel shape with removeable steel end stops.
7. Machined lower roller carriage housed in the jib crane head covered with heavy steel side
plates. Crane to rotate 200 degrees. Lower roller carriage is mounted on adjustable tension
bolts to allow for field adjustments.
8. Provide bolt and base plate template to other trades for proper installation of wall cantelever
jib crane.
2.02 HOOK AND LUG MOUNTED HOIST
A. YALE/Shawbox Hoist: Y80M.5-050S18-1 SHAW-BOX Yale-Lift-Tech, A Division of Columbus
McKinnon Corp. 414 West Broadway Avenue, Muskegon, Ml 49443-0769, Phone (800) 742-9269
or (866) 805-2962. Fax (800) 742-9270
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility WALL MOUNTED JIB CRANE
Specifications 14600 -1
B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
1. Hoist to have the following characteristics:
a. 1/2 Ton Lift Capacity Hoist
b. 18 FPM Hoist Speed
c. 40 fpm trolley speed
d. RH Three-Phase Electric
e. Outdoor Weatherproof Wire Rope Hoist
f. 40 Feet Lift Height Minimum
g. Shrouded Lower Block to have 360 degree rotating hook riding on thrust bearings hook
and spring loaded latches.
h. Push Trolley Suspension - Mounting Hoists on Monorails to allow operator to move
loads by pushing on the load,
i. 30 minute rated with class 'F' insulation provided with a thermal actuated switch (TAS)
embedded in the motor winding for protection,
j. Motor brake rated at 150% torque, DC rectified short stroke, spring set disc brake for
posititve braking action and long life,
k. Gearing totally enclosed and oil bathed.
I. Outdoor Weatherproof Hoist frame and housing to be constructed from lightweight,
rugged alluminum alloy. Housing to be water and weather proof,
m. Mechanical load brake and overload protection to act as a load lowering control, a DC
disc motor brake backup and limiting the hoist from lifting beyond its stated capacity,
n. Upper, Middle and Lower control circuit limit switches,
o. Manufacturer's standard push-button control station in a weatherproof NEMA-4X
enclosure. Push-button cable is provided with built-in strain relief to help prevent cable
damage,
p. Fuse panel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrates and anchor bolts are installed per manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Commencement of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 STARTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Provide manufacturer's field representative to prepare and start equipment.
B. Adjust for proper operation within manufacturer's published tolerances.
C. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to Owner's designated representative.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Protect installed jib crane and hoist from subsequent construction operations.
B. Do not use crane or hoist for any construction activities.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility WALL MOUNTED JIB CRANE
Specifications 14600 - 2
SECTION 15000
GENERAL PIPING SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This Section describes the requirements and procedures for piping systems and
appurtenances that apply to a number of other complimentary Specification Sections.
The items are listed in this Section to avoid repetition in Sections elsewhere.
This Section includes, but is not limited to: Temporary above ground piping (high line),
wet taps, flexible pipe couplings, grooved and shouldered end couplings, joint restraint
system, field touch up, bolts, nuts, polyethylene wrap, warning/identification tape, tracer
wire, gate well and extension stems, meter boxes, abandonment and removal of existing
facilities, and salvage.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the
latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for.
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
CMWD Standard Drawings
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit manufacturers' catalog data showing dimensions, materials of construction by
ASTM reference and grade and coatings..
1.5 LINING CONTAMINATION PREVENTION
Volatile organic compounds present in the linings of items in contact with potable water
or recycled water shall not exceed concentrations allowed by the latest requirements of
the State Office of Drinking Water and Department of Health Services. Some products
and materials may also require proof of NSF certification on the lining materials to be
used.
1.6 TEMPORARY ABOVEGROUND PIPE (HIGH LINE)
High line piping, where shown on the Approved Plans or required by the City Engineer,
shall be furnished, installed, disinfected, connected, maintained, and removed by the
Contractor. Bacteriological sampling and testing shall be performed by a State of
California Certified testing laboratory. The Contractor shall provide a submittal to the City
showing pipe layout, materials, sizing, flow calculations, schedule and duration of use,
and disinfection for all high line piping. The submittal shall be reviewed and approved by
the Engineer prior to ordering or delivery of any materials.
JUNE 2008 1of15 SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
1.7 PIPE TAPPING (WET TAP)
All pipe tap (wet tap) connections to existing pipelines, whether for mainline extensions
or service laterals, shall be performed by the Contractor under the inspection of the City.
The Contractor shall provide materials and labor to excavate, pour thrust block, backfill,
compact, and repair pavement as indicated in this Section.
1.8 JOINT RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Joint Restraint Systems may be used for PVC or ductile-iron pipe only with prior
approval of the City Engineer. Joint restraint systems shall be used in the place of, or in
conjunction with, concrete thrust blocks as directed. Restrained joint systems shall be
wax tape coated and polyethylene encased. Contractor shall submit shop drawings,
calculations, and catalog data for joint restraint systems.
Splined gaskets, also known as joint restraint gaskets, may be used for PVC or ductile-
iron pipe located within casings, or for PVC pipe casings, only.
1.9 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
Polyethylene encasement shall be used for all ferrous metal materials that are not
protected with annodes.
A. Polyethylene wrap shall be used for the protection of buried valves in conjunction
with wax tape.
B. Polyethylene sleeves shall be used for the protection of buried ductile iron pipe
and fittings. Where the use of a sleeve is not practical, the fittings may be
wrapped. Additionally, all bolted connections shall be coated with wax tape in
accordance with Section 09902.
C. Polyethylene wrap or sleeves may also be installed around buried PVC pipe for
recycled water identification.
1.10 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Warning/identification tape shall be used to identify location of underground utilities and
to act as a warning against accidental dig-ins of buried utilities. Warning/identification
tape shall be used on all underground water and recycled water mains, potable and
recycled water irrigation systems, sewer mains, and all related appurtenances.
Warning/identification tape shall also be used on cathodic protection wiring systems and
tracer wire brought into and out of access ports.
1.11 GATE WELLS
Gate Wells shall be used for buried valves 4" and larger, unless otherwise indicated on
the Standard Drawings. Gate well box and lid shall be used on all gate wells.
JUNE 2008 2 of 15 SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
1.12 VALVE STEM EXTENSION
Valve Stem Extensions shall be installed when the valve operating nut is more than 5'
below grade. Stem extensions shall be of sufficient length to bring the operating nut to a
point between 12" and 18" below the gate well lid.
1.13 METER BOXES
A. Meter boxes shall be used for all water meters.
B. Meter boxes shall be sized for the specific meter size or size as indicated on the
Standard Drawings.
1.14 RECYCLED WATER IDENTIFICATION
Facilities installed for the use of recycled water shall be identified with purple color
coating, identification labels, or signs.
1.15 CURB IDENTIFICATION MARK FOR SERVICES
The Contractor shall mark the location of all potable water, recycled water and sewer
laterals at the curb crossing by stamping the face of the curb in 2" high letters as
described below:
A. Potable water laterals shall be stamped with a letter "W".
B. Recycled water laterals shall be stamped with a letter "RW".
C. Sewer laterals be stamped with a letter "S".
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 TEMPORARY ABOVEGROUND PIPE (HIGH LINE)
High line piping layout, materials and appurtenances shall be as indicated on the
approved submittal.
2.2 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS
Flexible pipe couplings shall be in accordance with the Approved Materials List and as
described below:
A. Steel Couplings shall have middle rings made of steel conforming to ASTM A
36/A 36M, A 53 (Type E or S), or A 512 having a minimum yield strength of
207 MPa (30,000 psi). Follower rings shall be ductile-iron per ASTM A 536, or
steel per ASTM A 108, Grade 1018 or ASTM A 510, Grade 1018. Minimum
middle ring length shall be 7" for pipe sized 6" through 24".
B. Sleeve bolts shall be made of stainless steel per ASTM A193 and shall have a
minimum yield strength of 276 MPa (40,000 psi), an ultimate yield strength of
414 MPa (60,000 psi), and shall conform to AWWA C111.
JUNE 2008 3 of 15 SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
2.3 GROOVED END OR SHOULDERED COUPLINGS FOR DUCTILE IRON OR
STEEL PIPE
Groove end or shouldered couplings shall be in accordance with the Approved Materials
List and as described below:
A. Use square-cut shouldered or grooved ends per AWWA C606. Grooved-end
couplings shall be malleable iron per ASTM A 47, or ductile iron per ASTM A
536. Gaskets shall be per ASTM D 2000.
B. Bolts in exposed service shall conform to ASTM A 183, 69 MPa (10,000 psi)
tensile strength.
2.4 JOINT RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Joint Restraint Systems shall be ductile-iron and shall consist of a split-ring restraint with
machined (not cast) serrations - on the inside diameter, a back-up ring, and connecting
bolts, and shall be selected from the Approved Materials List.
Splined gaskets, also known as joint restraint gaskets, shall be a rubber-ring type with
stainless steel locking segments vulcanized into the gasket.
2.5 FIELD TOUCH-UP APPLICATIONS
All surfaces of metallic appurtenances in contact with potable water and not protected
from corrosion by another system shall be shop-coated by the manufacturer.
Appurtenances with damaged coatings shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the
Engineer. Touch-up of damaged surfaces, when allowed by the Engineer, shall be
performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2.6 BOLTS AND NUTS
Bolts and nuts shall be as indicated below.
A. Cadmium-plated or zinc-plated bolts and nuts shall be used for the installation of
pipelines up to 20" diameter and shall be carbon steel conforming to ASTM A307,
Grade A, unless otherwise indicated on the approved drawings. Bolts shall be
standard ANSI B1.1, Class A coarse threads. Nuts shall be standard ANSI B1.1,
Class 2H coarse threads.
B. Stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be used for the installation of pipelines 24"
diameter and larger and for submerged flanges. Bolts and nuts shall be Type 316
stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B8M for bolts, and Grade 8M
for nuts. Use lubricant for stainless steel belts and nuts. Lubricant shall be
Husky Lube "O" Seal by Husk-ITT Corporation or equal
C. All bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal, except where special shapes are
required. Bolts shall be of such length that not less than 1/4" or more than 1/2"
shall project past the nut in tightened position.
D. Provide a washer under each nut and under each bolt head. Use washers of the
same materials as the nuts.
JUNE 2008 4 of 15 SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
2.7 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
Polyethylene encasement shall be as indicated below and shall be selected from the
Approved Materials List. Polyethylene materials shall be kept out of direct sunlight
exposure.
A. Polyethylene sleeves shall be a minimum 0.012" thick polyethylene plastic in
accordance with AWWA C105.
B. Polyethylene wrap shall be a minimum 0.008" thick polyethylene plastic in
accordance with AWWA C105.
C. Polyethylene wrap and sleeves shall be clear for use with potable water and
purple for use with recycled water.
D. Polyethylene or vinyl adhesive tape a minimum of 2" wide or plastic tie straps
shall be used to secure polyethylene encasement.
2.8 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Warning/identification tape shall be as indicated below and in accordance with the
Approved Materials List.
A. Tape shall be an inert plastic film or metallic formulated for prolonged
underground use that will not degrade when exposed to alkalies, acids and other
destructive substances commonly found in soil.
B. Tape shall be puncture-resistant and shall have an elongation of two times its
original length before parting.
C. Tape shall be colored to identify the type of utility intended for identification.
Printed message and tape color shall be as follows:
Printed Message Tape Color
Caution: Waterline Buried Below Blue
Caution: Recycled Waterline Buried Below Purple
Caution: Cathodic Protection Cable Buried Below Red
Caution: Electric Line Buried Below Red
Ink used to print messages shall be permanently fixed to tape and shall be black
in color with message printed continuously throughout.
D. Tape shall be minimum 0.004" thick x 6" wide with a printed message on one
side. Tape used with the installation of onsite potable and recycled water
irrigation systems shall be a minimum of 3" wide.
JUNE 2008 5 of 15 SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
2.9 INSULATING UNIONS & COUPLINGS
A. For insulating unions, use a molded nylon sealing sleeve mounted in a three-
piece malleable-iron body (ASTM A47 or A197). Use thread ends when
connecting to steel piping, and copper solder joint when connecting to copper
piping. Minimum working pressure shall be 150 psi.
B. Threaded insulating couplings shall provide dielectric protection from electrolytic
corrosion at points where piping of dissimilar metals is joined.
2.10 GATE WELLS
Valve gate wells shall be as indicated below in accordance with the Approved Materials
List.
A. Valve gate well size and material shall be as follows:
1.
Valve Size
4" and Larger
Gate Well Size and Material
8" diameter Class 150, C-900 PVC
PVC gate wells for use in recycled water system applications shall be
white.
2. PVC gate wells for use in potable water system applications shall be
white or blue.
B. Gate well lids shall be as indicated below in accordance with the Approved
Materials List.
1. Gate well box lids shall be circular ductile-iron, and shall include a skirt
for a close fit inside the upper portion of the gate well. Lids shall be cast
with the AGENCY NAME (CMWD) and the word WATER for use on
potable water systems, and Recycled Water for recycled water systems.
2. Lids shall be Brooks 4TT with long skirt or approved equal.
3. Normally closed potable water valves and recycled water valves shall use
box lids by Brooks 3RT or approved equal.
4. Lid sizes shall be as follows:
Valves
4" and Larger where the speed limit
is 35 mph or greater
Gate Well Lid
Machined ductile-iron frame and 8"
lid with 6" long skirt
JUNE 2008 6 of 15 SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
2.11 VALVE STEM EXTENSIONS
Stem extensions shall be complete with operating nut, location ring, and lower socket to
fit valve-operating nut. The configuration of the extension stem nut shall match that of
the valve it operates.
A. Stem extensions shall be square fiberglass tubing glued together to make a
continuous one-piece unit used to a maximum length 8'.
B. Steel stem extensions shall be used where the maximum length of the extension
exceeds 8' or at the request of the City Engineer. Steel stem extensions may be
round or square hot-dipped galvanized steel tubing of solid design (no pinned
couplings permitted) with guides.
2.12 METER BOXES
Meter boxes shall be polymer-type boxes with lids selected from the Approved Materials
List.
A. Meter box sizes shall be as follows:
Meter Box Size
12"x20"
17"x30"
Meter Box Uses
1 " water services
2" water services
B. Meter box lids for use in potable water system applications shall be gray.
C. Meter box lids for use in recycled water system applications shall be purple.
2.13 RECYCLED WATER IDENTIFICATION
Materials used to identify pipe and appurtenances used for recycled water, not
manufactured in purple color, shall be as described in Volume 2 of the Carlsbad
Engineering Standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY ABOVEGROUND PIPE (HIGH LINE)
A. All high line piping, fittings, and service connections shall be furnished, installed,
and maintained by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall make connections to
a water source designated by the City Engineer.
B. All pipe, valves, fittings, hose and connections furnished by the Contractor shall
be of good quality, clean, and suitable for conveying potable water in the opinion
of the City Engineer.
C. The high line pipe shall be installed in such a manner that it will not present a
hazard to traffic and will not interfere with access to homes and driveways along
its route.
JUNE 2008 7 of 15 SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
D. Valves shall be installed at 200' intervals or as directed by the City Engineer. The
use of pressure reducing valves (PRV) may be required as directed by the City
Engineer.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for disinfecting all high lines, connections,
and flushing.
F. Following disinfection and acceptance of the high line as a potable water system,
the Contractor shall maintain continuous service through the high line piping to all
consumers normally served both directly and indirectly by the pipeline.
G. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove the high line piping
and appurtenances.
H. If progress in making repairs to the high line is inadequate, the City Engineer,
may order necessary corrective measures. Corrective measures may consist of
directing City personnel or another contractor to complete the work. All costs for
corrective measures shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.2 CONNECTION TO EXISTING FACILITIES (WET TAPS AND CUT-IN
INSTALLATIONS)
The Contractor shall furnish the tapping sleeve or tee, valves and all other materials as
called for in the Standard Specifications in accordance with the Approved Materials List.
The Contractor shall provide all equipment and labor required for the excavation and
installation of the connection including, but not limited to, backfill and pavement
replacement. In certain circumstances the Contractor may be required to provide a
water truck, high line, and fittings as part of the equipment for making the connections.
In addition, the Contractor shall assist the City in alleviating any hardship incurred
during a shutdown for connections. Emergency standby equipment or materials may be
required of the Contractor by the City Engineer.
Wet taps or cut-in tee and valve installations shall be performed as follows:
A. Prior to construction, Contractor shall pothole the existing pipe at the location of
the proposed connection. The City shall inspect the pothole prior to Contractor's
repair of trench. Refer to Section 01000 for protection of existing facilities.
Contractor shall record the following information on as-built drawings:
1. Pipe size, outside diameter.
2. Pipe type such as ACP, PVC, Ductile-Iron or Steel.
3. Pipe class and/or pressure rating.
4. Elevation, grade, and alignment.
5. Location of collars, pipe bells, fittings or couplings, if found.
Note: Collars, bells, fittings, or couplings shall not be within 18-inches of
the outer dimension of the tapping saddle.
6. Potential conflicts with existing utilities.
JUNE 2008 8 of 15 SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
B. To facilitate the proposed connection and allow for slight adjustments in
alignment, the Contractor shall leave a minimum 10' gap between the new pipe
installation and the proposed connection point at the existing water main. The
Contractor shall leave a gap longer than 10' if conditions warrant, or if directed by
the Engineer.
C. The new pipeline shall have successfully passed pressure testing in accordance
with Section 15044 and disinfection and bacteriological testing in accordance
with Section 15041 prior to proceeding with the connection to the existing
pipeline.
D. After the City Engineer has given approval to proceed with the connection, the
Contractor shall schedule with the City for the wet tap or cut-in installation.
1. Shutdowns will be scheduled at the convenience of the City. Shutdowns
may be scheduled for nights or weekends if required.
2. The Contractor shall give the City a minimum of 5 working days notice
prior to any proposed excavation or shutdown of existing mains or
services. Scheduling shall be subject to approval by the City Engineer.
3. The City may postpone or reschedule any shutdown operation if, for any
reason, the City Engineer believes that the Contractor is improperly
prepared with competent personnel, equipment, or materials to proceed
with the connection.
4. If progress in completing the connection within the time specified is
inadequate, the Engineer may order necessary corrective measures.
Corrective measures may consist of directing City personnel or another
contractor to complete the work. All costs for corrective measures shall be
borne by the Contractor.
E. Contractor may proceed with excavation only after potholing has been
completed, materials have been approved and delivered, and wet tap or cut-in
installation has been scheduled with approved Connection Permit.
1. The Contractor shall saw-cut pavement, excavate and provide and install
shoring and steel plating, when necessary, one day prior to the wet tap or
cut-in installation.
2. The Contractor shall provide lights, barricades and traffic control in
accordance with the agency of jurisdiction and as deemed necessary for
the excavation by the Engineer.
3. The Contractor shall de-water existing mains in full compliance with
NPDES standards where cut-in installations are required and shall be
done in the presence of the Engineer and in accordance with Section
15041. Only City personnel are authorized to operate existing valves. The
Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damage resulting from
unauthorized operation of existing City facilities.
JUNE 2008 9 of 15 SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
4. The Contractor under the inspection of the City shall perform the following
work for wet taps and cut-in installations:
a. Wet taps: Disinfect and install and tapping saddle and tapping
valve and perform tapping operations.
b. Cut-ins: Cut and remove portions of existing mains, and disinfect
and install tees, valves, couplings, and appurtenances required to
complete the closure. The Contractor shall discard pipe and
appurtenances removed from service in accordance with this
Section.
5. After the Contractor has performed tapping or cut-in operations, and the
Engineer has given approval to proceed, the Contractor shall complete the
installation as shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with the
Standard Specifications including, but not limited to:
a. Disinfecting and installing the pipe section(s) necessary to make
the closure to the new system.
b. Installing and setting the valve gate well(s) in accordance with the
Standard Drawings.
c. Installing thrust and anchor blocks in accordance with Section
03000.
d. Completing all backfill and compaction of the trench in accordance
with Section 02223.
e. Repairing or replacing pavement as necessary.
3.3 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS
Flexible pipe couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and as described below:
A. Use plain-end pipe with flexible couplings per AWWA C200. Provide joint
harnesses per AWWA M11 for aboveground applications or where indicated on
the Approved Plans.
B. Flexible couplings may be used only where indicated on the drawings.
C. Clean oil, scale, rust, and dirt from the pipe ends and touch-up the epoxy coating
and allow time for curing before installing the coupling. Clean the gaskets before
installing.
D. Follow the manufacturer's recommendation for installation and bolt torque using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
E. Lubricate the bolt threads with graphite prior to installation.
JUNE 2008 10 of 15 SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
3.4 GROOVED-END OR SHOULDERED COUPLINGS FOR DUCTILE IRON OR
STEEL PIPE
Grooved-end or shouldered couplings shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and as described below:
A. Grooved-end or shouldered joint couplings shall be installed per AWWA C606
and the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Clean loose scale, rust, oil, grease, and dirt from the pipe or fitting groove and
touch-up the epoxy coating as necessary, allowing time for curing before
installing the coupling.
C. Clean the gasket before installation. Apply a lubricant selected from the
Approved Materials List to the gasket exterior including lips, pipe ends, and
housing interiors.
D. Fasten the coupling alternately and evenly until the coupling halves are seated.
Follow the manufacturer's recommendation for bolt torque using a properly
calibrated torque wrench.
3.5 JOINT RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Joint Restraint Systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and as described below:
A. Length of pipe to be restrained on each side of bends, tees, reducers and other
fittings shall be determined by the Private Engineer or manufacturer of the
restraint device and approved by the City Engineer.
B. Split ring restraint shall be installed on the spigot end of pipe, connected to a
back-up ring which seats behind the bell of the adjoining pipe or fitting.
C. Restraint devices can be installed prior to lowering pipe into the trench.
D. Splined gaskets, also known as joint restraint gaskets, shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.6 BOLTS AND NUTS
A. All bolts and nuts shall be new and unused.
B. Bolts and nuts shall be cleaned, if needed, by wire brushing and lubricated prior
to assembly.
C. Tighten nuts uniformly and progressively.
D. Buried bolts and nuts shall be coated with wax tape in accordance with Section
09902 prior to being encased with polyethylene.
JUNE 2008 11 of 15 SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
E. All stainless steel bolts shall be coated with an anti-seize compound selected
from the Approved Materials List.
F. Bolts and nuts shall not be reused once tightened. Used bolts and nuts shall be
discarded and removed from the job.
3.7 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A. Polyethylene encasement shall completely encase and cover all buried metal
surfaces not otherwise protected with a cathodic protection system. All bolted
connections shall be coated with wax tape prior to polyethylene encasement.
Pipe & Fittings: All ductile-iron pipe and fittings shall be encased with
polyethylene sleeves in accordance with Method A described in AWWA C105,
except that tees may be encased with polyethylene wrap in accordance with
Method C described in AWWA C105.
Valves: Buried valves shall have only the stem and operating nut exposed and
the wrap shall be attached so that valve operation will not disturb the wrapping or
break the seal. Refer to the applicable valve specification to determine other
coating requirements.
B. Polyethylene sleeves shall be secured with polyethylene or vinyl adhesive tape or
plastic tie straps at the ends and quarter points along the sleeve in a manner that
will hold the sleeve securely in place during backfill. Polyethylene wrap shall be
secured with polyethylene or vinyl adhesive tape in a manner that will hold the
wrap securely in place during backfill.
3.8 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed as described below in accordance with the
Standard Drawings.
A. Tape shall be placed at the top of the pipe zone 12" above and centered over the
utility intended for identification. Tape used with onsite potable and recycled
water irrigation systems shall be installed at 6" above the pipe.
B. Tape shall be installed with the printed side up and run continuously along the
entire length of the utility intended for identification. Tape shall be installed on the
main piping and all appurtenant laterals, including blowoffs, air valve assemblies,
fire hydrants, and services. Tape splices shall overlap a minimum of 24" for
continuous coverage.
C. Tape shall be installed prior to placement of the Trench Zone Backfill.
JUNE 2008 12 of 15 ' SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
3.9 GATE WELLS AND VALVE STEM EXTENSIONS
Gate wells shall be installed as shown on the Standard Drawings and as described
below:
A. Gate wells shall be installed as shown on the Standard Drawings and as
described below:
B. The top exterior portion of the gate well lid and ring shall be coated in accordance
with Section 09900.
C. Valve Stem Extensions shall be installed when the valve operating nut is more
than 5' below grade. Stem extensions shall be of sufficient length to bring the
operating nut to a point between 12" and 18" below the gate well lid. Valve stem
extensions shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Drawings.
3.10 METER BOX INSTALLATION
Meter boxes shall be installed at the elevations and locations shown on the Approved
Plans and in accordance with the Standard Drawings. Near the completion of the
project, a final meter box adjustment to finish grade may be required. Water meters
shall not be installed until final adjustments are made to the meter box and approved by
the City.
3.11 ABANDONMENT OR REMOVAL FROM SERVICE OF EXISTING FACILITIES
Before excavating for new mains that are to replace existing pipes or services, the
Contractor shall make provisions for the continuation and maintenance of service to
customers as directed by the City Engineer.
Abandonment or removal from service of existing mains, appurtenances or water
services shown on the Approved Plans or as called for by the City Engineer shall be as
directed by the City Engineer.
Abandonment or removal from service of existing mains, appurtenances or water
services shown on the Approved Plans or as called for by the City Engineer shall be as
indicated below and in accordance with the Standard Drawings:
A. Abandonment in place:
1. Existing pipe 4" and smaller shall have a short section of pipe removed
and pipe ends encased in concrete.
2. Existing pipe 6" through 14'' shall be cut and plugged with concrete or
shall be pressure-grouted at intervals of 200' as recommended by the
Engineer.
3. Existing pipe 16" and larger shall be entirely filled by pressure-grouting or
by blown sand as determined by the Engineer.
4. Existing pipe ends shall be filled with concrete.
JUNE 2008 13 of 15 SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
5. All valves shall be removed with remaining pipe or fittings permanently
sealed with blind flange or concrete plug.
6. Gate wells shall be cut 24" below grade and filled with 1-2 slurry sack
concrete or removed and replaced with compacted backfill.
7. Water service corporation stops shall be closed. Meter boxes and curb
stops shall be removed. Service laterals shall be cut back a minimum of
24-inches below the finish grade.
8. Water services to be abandoned that are connected to pipelines that will
remain in service shall be abandoned in-place.
B. Removal by excavation:
1. Existing pipe and appurtenances shall be removed from the ground as
indicated on the Approved Plans or as directed by the City Engineer.
2. Contractor shall provide measures that allow for the removal of existing
sewer mains and appurtenances with no leakage of raw sewage.
Transportation of sewer mains and appurtenances removed from service
shall be in waterproof trucks to prevent raw sewage from leaking on
public streets.
3. Removal of asbestos-cement pipe (ACP) and sewer mains and
appurtenances shall be in accordance with ail applicable State and
Federal requirements. Legal disposal is the responsibility of the
Contractor. Obtain approval from the agency having disposal jurisdiction
with respect to disposal sites.
4. Backfill, compaction, and surface repair of all excavations for removal of
pipe and appurtenances shall be made in accordance with the Approved
Plans, Section 02223 of the Standard Specifications, and the Standard
Drawings.
3.12 SALVAGE
When the Contractor is required to remove existing pipe and appurtenances, or portions
thereof, from the ground, such material may, at the discretion of the Engineer, be
considered salvage. All materials identified as salvage are considered property of the
City.
A. The Contractor shall remove and temporarily stockpile all materials identified as
salvage in a safe location that will not disrupt traffic or shall deliver salvage to the
City's Field Operations Yard as directed by the City Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall legally dispose of all other materials in an appropriate
manner. Disposal is the responsibility of the Contractor. Obtain concurrence from
the agency having disposal jurisdiction with respect to disposal sites and
transportation methods.
JUNE 2008 14 of 15 SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
3.13 RECONNECTIONS
A. The Contractor may encounter unused service laterals or appurtenant piping
connected to an existing pipeline being replaced. Laterals and appurtenance
piping that will not be connected to the new pipeline shall be abandoned as
described in section 3.11.
B. Existing service laterals or appurtenances to be connected to new pipelines shall
be installed as shown on the Approved Plans or as directed by the City Engineer
in accordance with the Standard Drawings.
END OF SECTION
JUNE 2008 15 of 15 SECTION 15000
General Piping System and Appurtenances
SECTION 15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Section Includes
A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 15 Sections, in
addition to Division 1 - General Requirements.
1.02 Description
A. Furnish materials and perform labor required to execute this work as indicated on the
drawings, as specified and as required to complete the work of this section, except as
otherwise herein specifically excluded.
1.03 Work Included
A. The complete Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) and Plumbing systems
(including Fire Protection systems), including but not limited to these major items.
1. Coordinate work of this Section with related trades.
2. Verify applicable dimensions at the jobsite.
3. Split cooling only ductless unit and related refrigerant piping.
4. Roof-top packaged gas-electric air conditioning unit (standard and 100% OSA).
5. Air filters (prefilters, 95% & HEPA).
6. Duct systems; supply, return and exhaust complete with manual dampers.
7. Diffusers, registers, and grilles.
8. Mechanical and plumbing equipment bases and roof curbs.
9. Exhaust and supply fans.
10. Furnishing and installation of miscellaneous hangers, supports, sleeves, inserts,
anchors and other auxiliary equipment for systems under this Division.
11. Duct lining and insulation.
12. Refrigeration piping, fittings, valves and specialties, and insulation.
13. Soil waste and vent system inside and outside the building including connections
to fixtures, equipment, clean-outs, indirect drains and sand/oil interceptors.
14. Water piping systems inside and outside the building, including connections to
fixtures, equipment, and pressure booster pump.
15. Fire protection system inside and outside the building including connections to
equipment.
16. Interruptible and non-interruptible fuel gas systems inside and outside the
building, including connections to equipment, and earthquake valves.
17. Plumbing fixtures, carriers, fittings, trim, hose bibs, wall hydrants, and
accessories.
18. Roof drain, overflow roof drain, and storm drain systems inside and outside the
building, including drains, overflow drains, accessories, and connections to site
storm drainage system.
19. Compressed air system, including connections, air compressors, and pressure
regulators.
20. Water heating systems, including water heating equipment, circulating pumps,
connections.
21. Temperature and Building Automation System.
22. Storage tanks.
23. Shop drawings.
24. Equipment identification.
25. Equipment and systems adjustments and balancing.
26. Air, water, waste and vent, and gas systems testing, adjusting and balancing.
27. Written operating and maintenance instructions.
28. Record drawings.
29. Guarantee
30. Commissioning.
31. Natural gas system inside and outside the building including connecting to gas
meter and connecting to equipment.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Basic Mechanical Requirements
Specifications 15010-1
1.04 Work Specified Elsewhere
A. Concrete, Architectural Sheet Metal, Door and Exterior Wall Louvers, Painting and
Electrical.
1.05 Site Inspection
A. Contractor shall familiarize himself with the conditions at the site. No allowance will be
made subsequently for any error through negligence in observing the site conditions.
Contractor shall observe and make cost allowance for any mechanical and/or electrical
items that must be relocated to accommodate the installation or servicing of any item
covered under this contract.
1.06 Ordinances, Regulations and Codes
A. References to Technical Societies, Trade Organizations, Governmental Agencies is
made in Division 15 in accordance with the following abbreviations.
API-Air Filter Institute
AMCA - Air Moving & Conditioning Association
ARI - Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials
AWSC - American Welding Society Code
ANSI -American National Standards Institute
CBC - California Building Code
CCR - California Code of Regulations
CEC - California Electrical Code
CFC - California Fire Codes
CMC - California Mechanical Code
CPC - California Plumbing Code
DSA - Division of the State Architect
FIA - Factory Insurance Association
NAFM - National Association of Fan Manufacturers
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
ORS - Office of Regulatory Services
OSHPD - Office of Statewide Health, Planning and Development
SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors
National Association
UFC - Uniform Fire Code
UL - Underwriter's Laboratories
UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Materials and installation shall comply with
applicable local, state, and national codes and ordinances. Rulings and interpretations of
the enforcing agencies shall be considered as part of the local codes. No extras will be
permitted for furnishing items required by the local codes but not specified or shown on
the drawings.
C. Codes and Standards:
1. 2006 IBC and 2007 California Amendments (2007 California Building Code - Part
2, Title 24, CCR)
2. 2006 UMC and 2007 California Amendments (2007 California Mechanical Code
- Part 4, Title 24 CCR)
3. 2006 UPC and 2007 California Amendments (2007 California Plumbing Code -
Part 5, Title 24 CCR)
4. 2006 International Fire Code with 2007 California State Amendments (2007
California Fire Code - Part 9, Title 24 CCR)
5. 2005 National Electrical Code (NEC) and 2007 California Amendments (2007
California Electrical Code - Part 3, Title 24 CCR)
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Basic Mechanical Requirements
Specifications 15010-2
6. National Fire Protection Association's - National Fire Code
D. Nothing in these drawings and specifications is to be construed to permit work in violation
thereof. Ordinances, regulations and codes are to be construed as minimum
requirements.
E. The responsibility of the Architect to conduct construction reviews of the Contractor's
performance is not intended to include the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures
in, on, or near the construction site.
F. Ventilating, refrigeration and electrical equipment and appliances are required to be
approved by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other nationally recognized testing
agency and installed per the testing agency's specifications.
1.07 Permits, Fees and Inspections
A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, fees, assessments, complimentary drawings,
required by any legally constituted public authorities having jurisdiction.
1.08 Drawings and Specifications
A. The Architect's decision will be final on interpretation of the Drawings and Specifications.
B. The Drawings and Specifications are complimentary. Any work called for on the
Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be performed as
though fully set forth in both.
C. Where codes, standards, drawings or specifications conflict, the most stringent shall
prevail, unless prior approval for variance is obtained. Specific details on the drawings
shall supercede the specification in the event of a conflict.
D. Alternate support or seismic detail shall have prior approval by the Architect; and the
Contractor shall obtain agency approval without any additional cost or time to the contract
and without any time penalty on the work schedule.
1.09 Submittals
A. Before starting work, the Contractor shall furnish for the approval of the Architect, shop
drawings and itemized equipment lists, complete in all details that he proposes to install.
All items shall be submitted at the same time. Submittal shall conform to Division 1.
B. Submittals must be specific to this project with respect to model number, capacities,
performance, etc., generic submittals will not be accepted.
C. Submittals shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following which are
mandatory:
1. Draw Equipment Layouts to %" scale, including equipment, piping accessories,
and showing clearances for operating and servicing.
2. Pumps, pump characteristic curves.
3. Schedule of pipe, fittings, valves, with manufacturer and catalog number.
4. Specialties, valves, gauges and thermometers of all types.
5. Foundations, supports, hangers, inserts.
6. Earthquake supports and calculations.
7. Expansion loops, expansion joints, guides, and anchors.
8. Insulation.
9. Ventilation and air conditioning equipment, specialties and the air control
systems.
10. Fans, fan characteristic curves, fan tests.
11. Dampers, louvers, grilles, registers, diffusers.
12. Shop fabrication drawings and installation drawings of ductwork and piping
layouts. Submit for approval prior to fabrication. Drawings shall indicate
dimensions from bottom of piping and ductwork to finish floor level.
13. Wiring diagrams, control panel board, motor starters and controls for electrically
operated equipment furnished by mechanical trades.
14. Automatic control system diagrams.
15. Above ground tanks, accessories.
16. Air compressors and accessories.
17. Boilers, pumps and accessories.
18. Water treatment components and accessories.
19. Exhaust and supply fans.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Basic Mechanical Requirements
Specifications 15010 - 3
20. Access panels.
21. Backflow preventers.
22. Clean-outs
23. Fixture carriers.
24. Interceptors
25. Hangers, inserts, supports, anchors.
26. Hose bibbs.
27. Hot water circulators.
28. Pipe, fittings and specialties.
29. Pipe isolators.
30. Plumbing fixtures, fittings, trim, drains and receptors.
31. Natural gas system and accessories.
32. Fuel oil system and accessories.
33. Fire protection system shop drawings.
34. Compressed air system and accessories.
35. Pressure regulators.
36. Roof flashing.
37. Sleeves, escutcheons, caulking, and waterproofing.
38. Strainers
39. Vaults
40. Water hammer arresters.
41. Water heating equipment.
42. Expansion joints, guides and anchors.
43. Shop fabrications drawings and calculations.
44. Approved seismic drawings and calculations for applicable piping equipment.
45. Special and miscellaneous products furnished under this section and not listed
herein.
1.10 Record Drawings and Manuals
A. Record Set During the Work: At site, maintain at least one set of Drawings as a Field
Record Set. Also maintain at least one copy of all Addenda, Modifications, approved
submittals, correspondence, and transmittals at site. Keep Drawings and data in good
order and readily available to Architect and Owner.
B. Changes: Clearly and correctly mark Record Drawings to show changes made during
the construction process at the time the changed work is installed. No such changes
shall be made in the work unless authorized by the Architect.
C. Final Record Drawings: Conform to Division 1 requirements.
D. Preparation of Final Record Drawings: Contractor shall transfer recorded changes in the
work indicated on the Field Record Set to the record set. Changes shall be neatly and
clearly drawn and noted by skilled draftsmen, and shown technically correct.
E. Approval: Prior to Architect's inspection for Substantial Completion, submit the Final
Record Drawings to the Architect for review, and make such revisions as may be
necessary for Final Record Drawings to be a true, complete, and accurate record of the
work.
F. Manuals: Obtain data from the various manufacturers and submit instruction, operation,
and maintenance manuals as required and to the extent required under other Sections.
G. Contents: Each manual shall have an index listing the contents. Information in the
manuals shall include not less than:
1. General introductions and overall equipment description, purpose, functions and
simplified theory of operation.
2. Specifications
3. Installation instructions, procedures, sequences, and precautions, including
tolerances for level, horizontal and vertical alignment.
4. Grouting requirements.
5. List showing lubricants for each item of mechanical equipment and
recommended lubrication intervals.
6. Start-up and beginning operation procedures.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Basic Mechanical Requirements
Specifications 15010 - 4
7. Operational procedures.
8. Shutdown procedures.
9. Maintenance and calibration procedures
10. Parts lists
11. Name, address and telephone number of each manufacturer's local
representative.
H. Manual Submittals: Unless otherwise specified, each submittal shall include two copies
of each manual, one of which will be returned to the Contractor, marked to show the
required review. When approved, deliver four copies to Architect unless otherwise
specified.
I. "As-Built" drawings of ductwork and piping, including all elbows, transitions, damper and
valve locations shall be provided prior to commencement of air and water balance.
1.11 Quality of Equipment, Materials and Workmanship
A. Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials used in the installation shall be new
and in perfect condition when installed. Articles provided for the same general purpose
or use shall be of the same make. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none
but competent mechanics skilled in their trades shall be employed. Furnish the services
of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of the work, together
with all necessary journeymen, helpers and laborers required.
1.12 Seismic Design
A. Contractor shall be responsible for anchors and connections of mechanical work to the
building structure including calculations for approval by Local Agency for items or work,
where alternate support or anchorage detail is proposed to prevent damage as a result of
an earthquake, including manufactured equipment, the connection and integrity of shop
fabricated and field fabricated materials and equipment. The anchorage of all pipes,
ducts, conduits, fixtures, equipment, etc. shall withstand the lateral forces and shall
accommodate calculated building displacement as required by the California Building
Code, and local city/county codes. Conform to the following:
1. In accordance with Title 24, 2001 CBC Section 1632A and Table No. 16A-O,
elements of structures and their attachments, permanent non-structural
components and their attachments, and the attachments for permanent
equipment supported by a structure shall be designed to resist the total design
seismic forces prescribed in Section 1632A.2.
2. The seismic anchorage of mechanical and electrical equipment shall conform to
C.C.R. Title 24, 2001 CBC Section 1632A and Table 16A-O. Anchorage details
for roof/floor-mounted equipment shall be shown on plans.
1.13 Substitutions and Changes
A. The design has been based on data from certain manufacturers, suitable for each
application. Recommendations for alternative manufacturers can be made for each
product, except when "no substitutions permitted" are indicated.
B. It is the intent of the Owner to have this project constructed with materials, products and
system originally designed and specified into the project.
C. Alternatives that may require the modification, realignment and/or adjustment of other
associated components, including impact on other trades, shall be accomplished at no
additional cost or time to the contract and shall have the approval of the Architect.
D. Substitutions shall be submitted addressing all features listed in the specifications.
Features that deviate from the plans and specifications shall be clearly identified
including justification for deviations. TMAD Taylor & Gaines will review initial submittal on
substitutes only. Subsequent submittals made to correct deficiencies in original
submittals will be reviewed at Contractor's expense based on TMAD Taylor & Gaines'
hourly rate for engineering services.
E. Should the Contractor elect to propose substitutions for the Owner's interest, the
substitutions shall be in compliance with Division 1.
1.14 Approvals
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Basic Mechanical Requirements
Specifications 15010-5
A. The Architect will have the right to accept or reject equipment, materials, workmanship,
tests and determine when the Contractor has complied with the requirements herein
specified.
1.15 Selection and Ordering of Equipment and Materials
A. Immediately after award of the Contract and after the approval of submittals by the
Architect, the Contractor shall arrange for the purchase and delivery of equipment and
materials required, in ample quantities and at the proper time. He shall deliver to the
Architect a complete list of equipment and materials ordered, giving descriptions, plate
numbers, brochures, name of the wholesalers, date of the orders and approximate
delivery dates.
1.16 Locations and Accessibility
A. Drawings show pipe and ductwork diagrammatically. Conform to Drawings as closely as
possible in layout work. Vary run of piping, run and shape of ductwork and make offsets
during progress of work as required to meet structural and other interferences as
approved by Architect. Install piping and ductwork to best suit field conditions after
coordinating with other trades. Run exposed piping and ductwork parallel to, or at right
angle to, building walls. Keep horizontal lines as close to bottom of structures as
possible. Conform to ceiling heights established on Drawings.
B. Install equipment in such a manner as to be readily accessible for maintenance and
repairs. Install piping, ducts and conduit in such a manner as to preserve headroom,
avoid obstructions and keep openings and passageways clear.
C. Installation at valves, thermometers, gauges, cleanouts, dampers, controls, and water
specialties, duct access doors or any other indicating equipment or specialties requiring
reading, adjustment, inspection, maintenance shall be conveniently and accessibly
located with reference to the finished building.
D. Where wall and ceiling access doors are required but not shown, such doors shall be
furnished under other sections and as directed by the Architect. Coordinate this
requirement with appropriate trade.
E. If changes in the indicated locations or arrangements are required, they shall be made
without additional charges.
F. Provide sheaves and belts if required, to Test, Adjust and Balance Agency, to allow air
moving equipment to meet flow requirements specified at no additional cost to the
Owner.
1.17 Coordination of Trades
A. Contractor shall coordinate all trades in the interest of obtaining the most practical overall
arrangement of equipment, piping, conduit, and ducts and to maintain maximum
headroom and accessibility.
B. No extras will be allowed for changes made necessary by interference between trades.
C. Submit Composite Drawings in accordance with Special Conditions. Include
dimensioned plans, elevations, sections and details and give complete information
particularly as to the kinds and types of materials and equipment, size and location of
sleeves, inserts, attachments, chases, openings, conduits, ducts, boxes, lighting,
structural interferences. Coordinate these Composite Drawings and field layouts in the
field for proper relationship to work of applicable trades based on field conditions.
Contractor shall have competent personnel readily available for coordinating, checking,
and supervision of field layouts. The procedures for submittals and resubmittals, and
final distribution shall be as specified in Division 1. Do not start installation of work
involved under Composite Drawings until the Architect reviews applicable submittal.
Discrepancies between the Drawings and Composite Drawings shall be specifically noted
and identified on the Composite Drawings. Drawings for the various trades involved shall
be submitted as required and reviewed prior to preparation of Composite Drawings.
1. Equipment Foundations and Bases: Furnish certified details and drawings for
approval before fabrication. Furnish parts necessary for each foundation sub
base and support.
2. Pipe Sleeves and Inserts: Furnish and install pipe sleeves and pipe support
inserts before concrete is poured.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Basic Mechanical Requirements
Specifications 15010-6
3. Roof, Wall and Floor Openings: Furnish Shop Drawings showing exact locations
and sizes of openings through roofs, walls and floors.
4. Concrete: Conform to Concrete Section of the Specifications.
1.18 Guarantees
A. Contractor shall guarantee workmanship, equipment and materials installed under his
contract for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of Substantial
Completion. Should any defects occur during this period, the Contractor shall promptly
repair or replace the defective item and any other damage caused to the building free of
charge to the Owner, including cost of labor and materials.
B. Guarantee included in this section to cover:
1. Faulty or inadequate design of equipment or material installed.
2. Improper assembly or erection.
3. Defective workmanship or material.
4. Incorrect or inadequate operation or other failure.
C. He shall guarantee the complete and perfect operation of the entire system and that
equipment will be supported in such a way as to be free of objectionable vibration and
noise.
D. Furnish the parts and labor to replace any items found to be defective in the refrigeration
equipment within the guarantee period.
E. In addition to other guarantees, furnish free maintenance for the refrigeration equipment,
including replacement of refrigerant and oil, for a period of one (1) year. This shall
include regular monthly maintenance and "On Call" service if required.
F. For equipment bearing a manufacturer's warranty in excess of one year, furnish a copy of
the warranty to the Owner, who shall be named as beneficiary.
1.19 Protection of Equipment and Materials
A. Provide adequate storage facilities for equipment and materials on the site and shall
make provisions to protect such materials and equipment from damage.
1.20 Closing-in of Uninspected Work
A. Contractor shall not allow or cause any of the work, specifically ductwork and piping, to
be covered up or enclosed until it has been inspected, tested, and approved by the
Architect. Should any of work be covered up or enclosed before such inspection and
test, he shall at his own expense, uncover the work and after it has been inspected,
tested, and approved, make repairs with such materials as may be necessary to restore
work to its original and proper condition.
1.21 Building Footing Clearances
A. Under no circumstances shall pipes, ducts, or conduits penetrate footings. They shall
cross below footings or through sleeves above footings. Those running parallel to
footings shall have the minimum clearance from the cone of influence indicated on the
Drawings or as required by Code.
1.22 Damage by Leaks
A. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises caused by rain
leaks through or around ducts or pipes, leaks or breaks in piping, equipment or fixtures
furnished or installed by him for a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial
Completion.
1.23 Equipment Labels
A. Equipment provided under this Section shall be provided with the manufacturer's metal
identification labels attached to each individual piece of equipment showing complete
performance characteristics, size, model and serial number.
1.24 Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling
A. Excavating, trenching and backfilling for utilities within the building area shall be done in
conformity with Division 2 - Sitework. Piping shall be installed promptly after excavation
in order to keep the trenches open as short a time as possible.
B. Excavating, trenching and backfilling for utilities outside the building area shall be done in
conformity with Division 2 - Site work.
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Basic Mechanical Requirements
Specifications 15010 - 7
C. Any existing underground piping and conduit that is encountered shall be properly shored
and protected from damage. Active piping shall be left intact and undamaged.
1.25 Preliminary Operation
A. Should the Owner request that any portion of the plant, apparatus, or equipment be
operated for the Owner's beneficial use prior to the final completion and acceptance of
the work, the Contractor shall conform to Beneficial Occupancy Provisions of the General
Conditions. Such operation shall be under the supervision and direction of the
Contractor. Such preliminary operation shall not be construed as an acceptance of any
of the work.
1.26 Electrical Work
A. Coordinate with Division 16 in making the line and low voltage electrical connections and
be responsible for the operation of the equipment furnished under this section.
B. Voltage for electrical work will be included in Division 16. However, any control wiring
which is required that is not shown on the control diagram shall be as described under
this Section. In the event that the Contractor chooses to provide equipment that requires
extra expense in the power or control wiring, he shall pay additional electrical costs.
C. Safety switches, starters, circuit breakers, unless provided as a portion of package
equipment, and the electrical connections of mechanical equipment to the electrical
power service shall be provided under Division 16.
D. Interconnecting wiring, safety switches, relays, controllers and motor starters which are
integral components of packaged equipment shall be provided as an integral part of that
equipment.
E. All interconnecting power wiring and conduits shall be provided by Division 16.
F. Control wiring and conduit shall be provided by Division 15, unless otherwise indicated on
the drawings. See Specification Sections 16010, 16111,16123 and 16130.
END OF SECTION
Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Basic Mechanical Requirements
Specifications 15010 - 8
SECTION 15041
DISINFECTION OF PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section describes requirements for disinfection by chlorination of potable and
recycled water mains, services, pipe appurtenances and connections.
1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the
latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for.
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA).
B300 Standard for Hypochlorites
B301 Standard for Liquid Chlorine
C651 Disinfecting Water Mains
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
CMWD Standard Specifications 15000, 15044, 15056, 15057, 15061, and 15064
1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION
A. All water mains and appurtenances taken out of service for inspection, repairs, or
other activity that might lead to contamination shall be disinfected before they are
returned to service.
B. All new water mains and temporary high lines shall be disinfected prior to
connection to the City's existing system.
C. All components incorporated into a connection to the City's existing system shall
be disinfected prior to installation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. A written disinfection and dechlorination plan signed by a certified chlorinator
shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval prior to starting
disinfection or dechlorination operations. Plan for disinfection method and
procedure shall include equipment used to inject the chlorine solution, gauges or
scales to measure the rate at which chlorine is injected, qualifications of
personnel, testing location and schedule, source of water and water disposal
locations. Personnel performing the disinfection shall demonstrate a minimum of
five years experience in the chlorination and dechlorination of pipelines.
B. Qualification of certified testing laboratory.
C. Four copies of bacteriological test results to the Engineer upon completion of
each test.
D. Emergency Response Plan.
JUNE 2008 1 of 6 SECTION 15041
Disinfection of Piping
1. 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Chlorination and dechlorination shall be performed by competent individuals
knowledgeable and experienced in the operation of the necessary application and safety
equipment in accordance with applicable Federal, State and Local laws and regulations.
The transport, storage and handling of these materials shall be performed in accordance
with Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1910.120 Hazardous Waste Operations and
Emergency Response, CFR 49.172 Hazardous Materials Regulations, and the General
Industry Safety Orders of the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5194.
1.7 CONCURRENT DISINFECTION AND HYDROSTATIC TESTING
The specified disinfection of the pipelines may be performed concurrently with the
hydrostatic testing in accordance with Section 15044. In the event repairs are necessary,
as indicated by the hydrostatic test, additional disinfection may be required by the
Engineer in accordance with this specification.
1.8 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MAINS
Prior to connection to existing mains, disinfection and bacteriological testing shall be
performed in accordance with this specification, and hydrostatic testing shall be
performed per Section 15044. A City Connection Permit is required authorizing
connection to an existing system shall and be given only on the basis of acceptable
hydrostatic, disinfection and bacteriological test results. Connection to existing mains
shall be performed in accordance with Section 15000.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 CHLORINE (GAS)
A. Liquid chlorine contains 100-percent available chlorine and is packaged in steel
containers in net weights of 68.1kg (150 Ib.) or 907.2kg (1 ton).
B. Liquid chlorine shall be used with appropriate gas flow chlorinators, heaters, and
injectors to provide a controlled, high-concentration solution feed to the water.
The chlorinators and injectors shall be the vacuum-operated type.
2.2 SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE (LIQUID)
Sodium hypochlorite is available in liquid form in glass or plastic containers, ranging in
size from 0.95 L (1 Qt.) to 18.93 L (5 Gal.). The solution contains approximately 10% to
15% available chlorine.
2.3 TABLET OR GRANULAR HYPOCHLORITE
Tablet or granular hypochlorite may be used if a solution container is utilized to provide a
continuous feed method.
JUNE 2008 2 of 6 SECTION 15041
Disinfection of Piping
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Disinfection of pipelines shall not proceed until all appurtenances and any
necessary sample ports have been installed and the Engineer provides
authorization.
B. Every effort shall be made to keep the water main and its appurtenances clean
and dry during the installation process.
C. All piping, valves, fittings, and appurtenances which become contaminated during
installation shall be cleaned, rinsed with potable water, and then sprayed or
swabbed with a 5 percent sodium hypochlorite disinfecting solution prior to
installation.
D. Water mains under construction that become flooded by storm water, runoff, or
groundwater shall be cleaned by draining and flushing with metered potable
water until clear water is evident. Upon completion, the entire main shall be
disinfected using a method approved by the Engineer.
3.2 METHODS
A. Chlorine (Gas)
1. Only vacuum-operated equipment shall be used. Direct-feed chlorinators,
which operate solely from gas pressure in the chlorine cylinder, shall not
be permitted. The equipment shall incorporate a backflow prevention
device at the point of connection to the potable water source used to fill
the line being tested.
2. The chlorinating agent shall be applied at the beginning of the system to
be chlorinated and shall be injected through a corporation stop, a
hydrant, or other approved connection to ensure treatment of the entire
system being disinfected.
3. Only a certified, licensed chlorination and testing contractor shall perform
gas chlorination work. The chlorination contractor must also possess a
Grade II Treatment Plant Operator Certification from the State of
California if required by the Engineer.
B. Sodium Hypochlorite Solution (Liquid)
1. Sodium hypochlorite solution shall be used for cleaning and swabbing
piping and appurtenances immediately prior to installation and for
disinfecting all components of connections to the City's existing system.
2. Sodium hypochlorite solution may be used for the initial disinfection of
newly installed water mains. The solution shall be applied at a terminus
of the system to be chlorinated using an injector which can adjust the
amount of solution being injected into the piping system. The solution
shall be injected in the appropriate concentration to achieve the specified
concentration range of chlorine throughout the entire piping system.
JUNE 2008 3 of 6 SECTION 15041
Disinfection of Piping
Where pumping equipment is used in conjunction with an injector, an
integral backflow prevention device shall be used and connected to the
potable water supply.
3. Water trucks, pumping equipment, piping, appurtenances and all other
equipment in contact with potable water shall be disinfected prior to use.
4. Sodium hypochlorite solution may also be used to increase the total
chlorine residual if the concentration from the initial chlorination of the
system is found to be low. The solution shall be added to the system in
sufficient amounts at appropriate locations to ensure that the disinfecting
solution is present at a concentration within the specified range
throughout the piping system.
3.3 PROCEDURE FOR DISINFECTING WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES
A. The pipeline shall be filled at a rate not to exceed 1,135 liters per minute
(300 GPM) or a velocity of 0.3m per second (1 foot per second), whichever is
less.
B. Disinfection shall result in a total chlorine concentration of not less than 25-mg/l.
This concentration shall be evenly distributed throughout the system to be
disinfected, using a continuous feed method of chlorination.
C. All valves shall be operated with the disinfection solution present in the pipeline.
All appurtenances such as air-vacuum relief valves, blowoffs, hydrants, backflow
prevention devices, and water service laterals shall be flushed with the treated
water a sufficient length of time to ensure a chlorine concentration within the
specified range in all components of each appurtenance. (Note the limitations for
discharge of chlorinated water outlined below.)
D. The Engineer will verify the presence of the disinfection solution throughout the
system by sampling and testing for acceptable chlorine concentrations at the
various appurtenances and/or at the test ports provided by the Contractor. Areas
of the system found to be below the specified chlorine concentration level shall
receive additional flushing as noted above and/or additional disinfection solution
as necessary. (Note the limitations for discharge of chlorinated water outlined
below.) Addition of disinfection solution after the initial charging of the line shall
be made by either the liquid chlorine (gas) method, or the sodium hypochlorite
method as directed by the Engineer.
E. The chlorinated water shall be retained in the system for a minimum of 24 hours.
The City Engineer will test the total chlorine residual. The system shall contain a
total chlorine residual of not less than 80% of the initial total chlorine residual
before the 24-hour soaking period began. If the total chlorine residual has
decreased more than 20%, the system shall be soaked for an additional 24-hour
period. If the total chlorine residual has not deceased after this additional 24-hour
period, the system shall be flushed in accordance with the procedure detailed
herein. If the total chlorine residual has decreased, the system shall be flushed in
accordance with the procedure detailed herein, and shall be re-disinfected.
F. Following a successful retention period as determined by the City Engineer, the
chlorinated water shall be flushed from the system at its extremities and at each
JUNE 2008 4 of 6 SECTION 15041
Disinfection of Piping
appurtenance, using potable water from a source designated by the City
Engineer. The minimum water velocity during flushing shall be 0.9 meters per
second (3 feet per second) or as directed by the Engineer. Flushing shall
continue until the replacement water in the new system is equal in chlorine
residual to the potable source of supply as verified by the City. (Note the
limitations for discharge of chlorinated water outlined below.)
G. The Contractor shall contract with a State certified sampling laboratory to perform
sampling, transport samples and perform bacteriological sampling and testing as
specified herein.
3.4 DISCHARGE OF CHLORINATED WATER
A. Indiscriminate onsite disposal or discharge to sewer systems, storm drains,
drainage courses or surface waters of chlorinated water is prohibited.
B. In locations where chlorine neutralization is required, the reducing agent shall be
applied to the water as it exits the piping system. The Developer shall monitor the
chlorine residual during the discharge operations. Total residual chlorine limits in
these locations, and for the discharge of chlorinated water from the testing of
pipelines to surface waters of the San Diego Region are as follows:
Total Residual Chlorine Effluent Limitations
30-Day Average - 0.002 mg/l
Average Daily Maximum - 0.008 mg/l
Instantaneous Maximum - 0.02 mg/l
The various methods of dechlorination available can remove residual chlorine to
concentrations below standard analytical methods of detection, 0.02 mg/l, which
will assure compliance with the effluent limit. The Developer will perform all
necessary tests, keeping and providing records to the Engineer to ensure that the
total residual chlorine effluent limitations listed above are met.
C. In locations where no hazard to the environment is evident based on the joint
examination described above, the chlorinated water may be broadcast for dust
control on the surface of the immediate site. Care shall be exercised in
broadcasting the water to prevent runoff.
3.5 BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING
The Contractor shall employ a State certified laboratory to perform bacteriological
sampling and testing of all new system installations. The testing methodology employed
by the City shall be as set forth in "Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Waste Water" (current edition). Testing requirements are as set forth in the California
Domestic Water Quality and Monitoring Regulations and commensurate with current
requirements for surface water testing. The testing laboratory will analyze the samples
for the presence of coliform bacteria and heterotrophic-type bacteria (heterotrophic plate
count). The evaluation criteria employed by the City for a passing test sample is as
follows:
A. Coliform bacteria: no positive sample, and
JUNE 2008 5 of 6 SECTION 15041
Disinfection of Piping
B. Heterotrophic plate count (HPC): 500 colony forming units/ml or less.
3.06 REDISINFECTION
If the initial disinfection fails to produce satisfactory bacteriological test results, the
pipeline system shall be re-flushed and re-sampled. If the second set of samples does
not produce satisfactory results, the pipeline system shall be re-chlorinated, flushed, and
re-stamped. The chlorination, flushing, and sampling procedure shall continue until
satisfactory results are obtained. Re-disinfection and retesting shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
3.07 DISINFECTING TIE-INS AND CONNECTIONS
Pipes, fittings, valves and all other components incorporated into connections with the
City's existing system shall be spray disinfected or swabbed with a liquid chlorine
solution in accordance with AWWA C651 and as specified herein. Upon connection to
the main, the line shall be flushed as directed by the City Engineer. Disinfection by this
method is generally limited to assemblies of 20' or less in length. Alternate methods such
as "predisinfection" prior to installation in accordance with AWWA C651 may be required
at the discretion of the City Engineer.
END OF SECTION
JUNE 2008 6 of 6 SECTION 15041
Disinfection of Piping
SECTION 15043
TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWER PIPELINES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and shall
perform all labor required to complete the work as indicated on the Drawings and specified
herein.
B. This Section covers the performance of all pipeline flushing and testing, complete, for sanitary
sewer system piping as specified herein and in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Gravity Sewer Pipe: 15063
1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Comply with the applicable reference specifications as specified in. the GENERAL
PROVISIONS.
1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the GENERAL PROVISIONS.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit in writing all proposed plans for testing, and for water
conveyance, control and disposal. The CONTRACTOR shall also submit written notice 48
hours in advance of the proposed testing schedule for review and concurrence of the
ENGINEER.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Temporary valves, plugs, bulkheads, and other air pressure testing and water control
equipment and materials shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR subject to the ENGINEER'S
review. No materials shall be used which will be injurious to pipeline structure and future
function. Air test gages shall be laboratory-calibrated annually. At the discretion of the City
Engineer, gages shall be recalibrated by a certified laboratory at the CONTRACTOR'S
expense prior to the leakage test.
SECTION 15043
JUNE 2008 1 of 3 Testing of Gravity Sewer Pipeline
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise specified, water for testing will be furnished by the CONTRACTOR; and, the
CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary provisions for conveying the water from the
AGENCY-designated source to the points of use.
B. Release of water from pipelines, after testing has been completed, shall be performed as
directed by the ENGINEER.
C. All testing operations shall be performed in the presence of the INSPECTOR.
3.2 SEWER PIPE CLEANING
A. All sewer pipe shall be thoroughly flushed with clean water, from access-hole to access-hole
with an appropriately sized inflatable ball.
B. All construction debris and water shall be removed from each access-hole prior to removal of
expandable plugs.
C. Water used in flushing the new sewer mains and laterals shall not be discharged into the
existing sewer system.
3.3 TESTING OF PIPELINE
A. General: All gravity sewer pipes and service laterals shall be tested for exfiltration and/or
infiltration and deflection, as specified. Sewer pipelines shall be backfilled prior to testing.
All leakage tests of sanitary sewer systems shall be in conformance with SSPWC Section 306-
1.4.1.
B. Water Exfiltration Test shall be in conformance with SSPWC Section 306-1.4.2.
C. Water Infiltration Test shall be in conformance with SSPWC Section 306-1.4.3.
Unless otherwise specified, infiltration will be measured by the CONTRACTOR using
measuring devices approved by the ENGINEER.
D. Air Pressure Test shall be in conformance with SSPWC Section 306-1.4.4.
E. At the CONTRACTOR'S option, joints may be air tested individually, joint by joint, with the use
of specialized equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall submit its joint testing procedure for the
ENGINEER'S review and approval prior to testing. Prior to each test, the pipe at the joint shall
be wetted with water. The maximum test pressure shall be 3.0 psi. The minimum allowable
pressure drop shall be 1.0 psi over a 30-second test period.
F. Water Pressure Test shall be in conformance with SSPWC Section 306-1.4.5.
SECTION 15043
JUNE 2008 2 of 3 Testing of Gravity Sewer Pipeline
G. Deflection Test: All flexible and semi-rigid main line pipe shall be tested in accordance with
SSPWC Sections 306-1.2.12 and 306-1.2.13 for deflection, joint displacement, or any other
obstruction by passing a rigid mandrel through the pipe by hand, not less than 30 days after
completion of the trench backfill, but prior to permanent resurfacing. The mandrel shall be a
full circle, solid cylinder, or a rigid, non-adjustable, odd-numbered leg (9 leg minimum) steel
cylinder, accepted by the ENGINEER as to design and manufacture. The circular cross
section of the mandrel shall have a diameter of at least 95 percent of the specified average
inside diameter of the pipe and the minimum length of the circular portion of the mandrel shall
be equal to the nominal diameter of the pipe. Obstructions encountered by the mandrel shall
be corrected by the CONTRACTOR.
3.4 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION INSPECTION
A. A closed circuit television inspection shall ne conducted of new sewer lines after sewer pipe
cleaning and mandrel testing.
B. Closed circuit television inspections shall be performed in accordance with the SSPWC,
500-1.1.5. Video documentation shall be provided in digital format (DVD).
C. All defects and evidence of reverse slope by ponding of water or dips in pipe alignment
revealed by the closed circuit television inspection shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the
City Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 15043
JUNE 2008 3 of 3 Testing of Gravity Sewer Pipeline
SECTION 15044
HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE PIPELINES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section describes the requirements and procedures for pressure and leakage
testing of all pressure mains.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
CMWD Standard Drawings
CMWD Standard Specifications 15000, 15041, 15056, 15061, and 15064
1.3 REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO TESTING
A. Provide testing procedure submittal including testing pressure, testing schedule,
test bulkhead locations, and water supply details.
B. All piping, valves, fire hydrants, services, and related appurtenances shall be
installed prior to testing.
C. The pipe trench shall have trench zone backfill placed and compacted with a
minimum of 2.5' of material over the pipe.
D. All concrete anchor blocks shall be allowed to cure a sufficient time to develop a
minimum strength of 13.79 MPa (2,000 psi) before testing.
E. Pressure tests on exposed and aboveground piping shall be conducted only after
the entire piping system has been installed and attached to pipe supports,
hangers or anchors as shown on the Approved Plans.
F. Steel pipelines shall not be tested before the mortar lining and coating on all pipe
lengths within the line have been in place for a minimum of fourteen (14) days.
Cement-mortar lined pipe shall not be filled with water until a minimum of eight
hours has elapsed after the last joint has been mortared.
1.4 CONCURRENT HYDROSTATIC TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF PIPELINES
Hydrostatic testing of pipelines shall be performed prior to or concurrently with the
disinfection operations in accordance with Section 15041. In the event repairs are
necessary, as indicated by the hydrostatic test, the City may require additional
disinfection in accordance with Section 15041.
1.5 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MAINS
Hydrostatic testing shall be performed prior to connections to existing mains.
A City Connection Permit authorizing connection to the existing system shall be given
JUNE 2008 1of4 SECTION 15044
Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines
only on the basis of acceptable hydrostatic, disinfection and bacteriological test results.
Connection to existing mains shall be performed in accordance with Section 15000.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 WATER
A. Potable water shall be used for hydrostatic testing of potable and recycled water
mains.
B. Potable water shall be supplied by a City-approved source. Make-up water for
testing shall also be potable water.
C. A chlorinated water solution, in accordance with Section 15041, shall be used to
charge the line and for make-up water when hydrostatic testing and disinfection
operations are combined.
D. Meet all applicable state and local requirements for disposal of testing water.
2.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Testing water shall be supplied through a metered connection equipped with a
backflow prevention device in accordance with Section 15112 at the point of
connection to the potable water source used.
B. The Contractor shall provide any temporary piping needed to deliver potable
water to the piping that is to be tested. Temporary piping shall be in accordance
with Section 15000.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All water systems shall be pre-tested to insure passage of test prior to scheduling
official test with inspector.
B. The Contractor shall provide the City with a minimum of 48 hours' notice prior to
the requested date and time for hydrostatic tests.
C. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment for testing.
D. Temporary blocking during the tests will be permitted only at temporary plugs,
caps or where otherwise directed by the City.
E. Al! valves and appurtenances shall be operated during the test period. The test
shall be conducted with valves in the open position. The Contractor is not
permitted to operate any valves on the City's system.
F. At the onset of testing, all valves, air vacuum assemblies, blowoffs, and services
shall be monitored for possible leakage and repairs made, if necessary, before
the test proceeds. The appurtenances shall be monitored through the duration of
the testing.
JUNE 2008 . 2 of 4 SECTION 15044
Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines
G. For pipe with porous lining, such as cement mortar, the pipe shall be filled with
water and placed under a slight pressure for a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours
prior to the actual hydrostatic test.
H. Testing shall be made before connecting the new line with the existing City pipes
and mains.
I. The pipeline should be filled at a rate such that the velocity of flow is less than 1
fps.
J. Maximum length of pipe to be included in any one (1) test shall not exceed 2,500
linear feet or vertical elevation difference of 58 feet.
3.2 FIELD TEST PROCEDURE
A. Before applying the specified test pressure, care shall be taken to release all air
within the pipe and appurtenances to be tested. Air shall be released through
services, fire hydrants, air release valves, or other approved locations.
B. The leakage shall be considered as the total amount of water pumped into the
pipeline during the test period.
C. Apply and maintain the test pressure by means of a hydraulic force pump.
D. Maintain the test pressure for the following duration by restoring it whenever it
falls an amount of 5 psi:
Pipe Diameter
(inches) Hours
18 and less 4
20 to 36 8
Greater than 36 24
E. After the test pressure is reached, use a meter to measure the additional water
added to maintain the pressure. This amount of water is the loss due to leakage
in the piping system. The allowable leakage for various sizes of PUC & DIP with
rubber gaskets are shown in the following table:
TYPE OF PIPE: P.V.C. & D.I.P.
CLASSES: 150&200
Pipe Sizes Allowable Leakage
(inches) Gals/4 hrs/1000' of pipe
4" .33 Gals
6" .50 Gals
8" .66 Gals
10" .83 Gals.
12" .99 Gals.
14" 1.16 Gals.
16" 1.32 Gals.
18" 1.49 Gals.
20" 1.66 Gals.
24" 1.98 Gals.
JUNE 2008 3 of 4 SECTION 15044
Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines
F. The allowable leakage for welded steel pipe shall be zero gallons.
G. The allowable leakage for piping having threaded, brazed, or welded (including
solvent welded) joints shall be zero gallons.
H. Repair and retest any pipes showing leakage rates greater than that allowed in
the above criteria.
3.3 TEST PRESSURE
Pipe sizes in excess of 16" diameter shall be tested at a pressure based on test pressure
as shown on the drawings. If no test pressure is shown, the pipeline at the low point in
test section shall be pumped to a hydrostatic test pressure of 125 percent of the
operating pressure or pipe class, whichever is the greater. Pressure shall be maintained
for a duration shown in section 3.2 and shall be repumped when it falls an amount of 5
p.s.i.
Pipe sizes 16" diameter and less shall be tested at 75 p.s.i. in excess to the pressure
class of the pipeline. Pressure shall be maintained for a duration shown in section 3.2
and shall be repumped when it falls an amount of 5 p.s.i.
The test pump gauge and meter shall be connected to the water main at a location other
than the highest point in the line, in order to allow release of air from the high point.
Means shall be provided for accurately measuring the quantity of water pumped through
a meter and pumped into the pipe immediately, during and after the test period in order to
maintain or restore the initial test pressure. All pipe, fittings, valves, services and
appurtenances shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test and irrespective of the measured
quantity of leakage, all detectable leaks shall be repaired by the Contractor at the
contractor's expense and no cost to Carlsbad Municipal Water District.
If a tested system is damaged or a leak occurs after official test the entire system or
portion of system will be retested as directed by Inspector.
END OF SECTION
JUNE 2008 4 of 4 SECTION 15044
Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines